LiveDC Wiki! - User contributions [en]

Extras

2015-10-14T15:41:21Z

Khackenmiller: /* Creating a Legend */

__TOC__

==Creating Accounting Shares==
An accounting share is a way to track what department or function of the business owns or is making payments for a piece of hardware. You will need to know the following information to create an accounting share:
*Business unit or business department having ownership of the device
*Number of shares that business unit owns
[[File:Accounting Share.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Select a business unit from the “Business Unit” drop-down menu or create a new “Business Unit” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Business Unit|Creating a Business Unit]] section for instructions)</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Examples: Accounting, Production, Marketing, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter the desired amount of shares into the “Shares” field</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating Address Type==
Creating an address type is required for each operating system, usually defined as IPv4 or IPv6. The address type is not considered the actual address.You will need to know the following information before creating an address type:
*Whether the address type is an IP-V4 or IP-V6
[[File:Address Type.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Address Type” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Address Types” this will open a new tab titled “Address Types”</li>
<li>In the address types tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Address Type”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the address type in the field titled “Name”</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: IP Address, IP Address (location-based), etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the address type in the “Details” field</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Business Unit==
A business unit or business department is a great way to track ownership or affected areas of the organization that touch a specific piece of hardware, software, or virtual machine. A business unit uses the parent-child relationship like a hardware product. This can be utilized for accounting and tracking purposes of the asset. You will need to gather the following information when creating a business unit:
*Name of the business unit or function you wish to create
*A parent business unit, if any
[[File:Business Unit.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Business Unit” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Business Unit” this will open a new tab titled “Business units”</li>
<li>Within the business unit tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Business Unit” or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, service tab in the business unit section click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the company name in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Target, Best Buy, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the name of the company in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the business unit tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, service tab in the business unit section click the star button</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the department in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Marketing, Accounting, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the department name in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the company name in the “Parent Business Unit” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Target, Best Buy, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Company==
Creating a company is a way to distinguish the physical history and payment history of an asset in the event of a merger and acquisition or any other event which would involve transfer of ownership. You will need to know the following information before creating a company:
*Name of the company you wish to create
[[File:Company.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Company” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Companies” this will open a new tab titled “Companies”</li>
<li>Within the companies tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Company.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the company name in the field titled “Name”</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the company in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Component==
Components tracking is a great way to record what is contained within a specific piece of hardware you are creating. The component information can give you insight into how much of a resource you are utilizing and consuming in your data center. It tracks everything from power to memory to peripheral cards inserted into the back of your servers. You will need to gather the following information to create a component record for your hardware:
*Memory in GB for the hardware
*Number of logical disk volumes
*Number of network interfaces for the hardware
*Number of management interfaces for the hardware
*Number of CPU’s in the hardware
*Other components, utilizing the parent-child relationship, located within the hardware
*Physical disks
*SAN connections
*Number and type of power plugs
[[File:Component.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Component” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Components” this will open a new tab titled “Components”</li>
<li>In the components tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Component.” If you are in the “Create Hardware” window, component tab in the component section click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the peripheral name of the components in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Network Card, PCIE Card, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the peripheral in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the components tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, component tab in the component section click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the ports in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: port numbers</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the ports in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the peripheral in the “Parent Component” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Network Card, PCIE Card, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Contact==
A contact is utilized when referring to an asset, specifically a piece of hardware. This is the organization and person you would contact if the asset has a disruption of service or experiences a failure or outage. You will need to gather the following information when creating a contact:
*Type of contact; electrician, service provider, maintenance, etc.
*Name of the contact; first and last name, company the contact works for, and contact method (see [[#Creating a Contact Method Type|Creating a Contact Method Type]] for instructions)
[[File:Contact.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Contact” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Contacts” this will open a new tab titled “Contacts”</li>
<li>Within the contact tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Contact”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the first name of the contact in the “First Name” field</li>
<li>Enter the last name of the contact in the “Last Name” field</li>
<li>Select which company the contact is associated with in the “Company” drop-down menu or create a new “Company” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Add a contact method by clicking the star button. In the “Create Contact Method” window enter the following:</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Enter a “Type” from the drop down menu or by clicking on the star button to create a new “Type” record. (see [[#Creating a Contact Method Type|Creating a Contact Method Type]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>Enter a phone number or email for the contact method in the “Value” field </li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information for the contact in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Contact Method Type==
A contact method type provides the means to reach the point of contact for an asset, typically for hardware. The contact method type refers to the email or phone number used to get in touch with the person. You will need to gather the following information when creating a contact method type:
*What mode of contact is preferred for reaching this person; email, SMS, mobile phone, etc.
[[File:Contact Method Type.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Contact Method Type” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Contact Method Types” this will open a new tab titled “Contact Method Types”</li>
<li>Within the contact method type tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Contact Method Type.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the contact method type in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the contact method type in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a CPU Type==
[[File:CPU Type.PNG]]
===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create CPU Type” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “CPU Types” this will open a new tab titled “CPU Types”</li>
<li>Within the CPU type tab, in the upper left-hand corner click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create CPU Type.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the CPU type in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Intel Xeon E5450</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the CPU type in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Enter the speed of the CPU type in the field “Speed in GHz”</li>
<li>Enter how many physical cores the CPU type has in the “Physical Cores” field</li>
<li>Enter how many virtual cores the CPU type has in the “Virtual Cores” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Discount Program==
A discount program is used when referring to the service of an asset, typically hardware. Creating a discount program record is valuable for tracking what service company your dollars are going to and what deal you are receiving from a discount standpoint. You will need to gather the following information before creating a discount program record:
*Name of the discount program, for tracking purposes
*Percentage of the discount program, to know what deal has been provided by the service company
[[File:Discount Program.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Discount Program” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Discount Program” this will open a new tab titled “Discount Programs”</li>
<li>Within the discount program tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Discount Program.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the discount program in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the discount program in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Enter a discount percent in the field called “Percent”</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Domain==
A domain record refers to a collection of devices within your network, similar to contoso.com, and helps delineate between internal devices and devices that reside in other domains. The LiveDC platform will track what domains are being utilized by which operating systems and provide ease of searching this information. You will need to gather the following information before creating a domain record:
*Name of the domain record you wish to create
[[File:Domain.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Domain” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Domains” this will open a new tab titled “Domains”</li>
<li>Within the domains tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Domain.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the domain in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: company_xyz.local</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the domain in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating an Influence==
An influence is the way to represent what is happening to a specific data series in the data center on a map. The influence is shown by using a color scale, known as a legend, to provide knowledge around the objects real-time state. The influence’s color is affected by the data series it is connected to. As the data in the data series changes, so does the color of the influence, based upon the legend associated with the map. You will need to gather the following information before creating an influence:
*Specific data series that you would like to attach to the influence (see [[Create a Data Series#Creating a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] for instructions)
*Map that you would like to place the influence on (see [[Create Map#Creating a Map|Creating a Map]] for instructions)
*Layer of the map you will be placing the influence on (see [[#Creating a Layer|Creating a Layer]] for instructions)
*Influence template that you will be using to give the influence boundaries, shape, and scale (see [[#Creating an Influence Template|Creating an Influence Template]] for instructions)
[[File:Influence.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Layers” this will open a new tab titled “Layers List”</li>
<li>Select the desired layer to place influences on from the layers list and click “Manage Influences.” This will open a new tab titled “Manage Influences.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Within the manage influence tab a list titled “Influence List,” where all of the influences for the desired layer will reside, will be open. Click “Create” to make a new influence.</li>
<li>A new window will open up titled “Create Influence”</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Select the data series you wish to correspond with the influence in the “Data Series” drop-down menu or create a new “Data Series” record by clicking the star button (see [[Create a Data Series#Creating a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select an influence template to define the parameters for the influence in the “Template” drop-down menu or create a new “Influence Template” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating an Influence Template|Creating an Influence Template]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Define the location of the influence horizontally in the “X Coordinate” field (this can be adjusted at a later time, default: 1)</li>
<li>Define the location of the influence vertically in the “Y Coordinate” field (this can be adjusted at a later time, default: 1)</li>
<li>Select the type of link for the influence in the “Link Type” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>If data series, select the corresponding data series or create a new “Data Series” record by clicking the star button (see [[Create a Data Series#Creating a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>If hardware visual, select the corresponding hardware or create a new “Hardware” record by clicking the star button (see [[Create a Site#Creating Hardware|Creating Hardware]] section for instructions)</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
<li>To edit the position of an influence, either edit the specific influence from the influence list or from the map (see [[#Editing a Map Influence|Editing a Map Influence]] for more information)</li>
</ol>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating an Influence Template==
An influence template provides the visual boundaries that are placed around an influence for a map. Basically, the template will tell the influence what shape to take, if the pixels are going to fade at the edges, and the algorithm to follow in reference to what you are trying to display (usually will be predefined “Power2”). You will need to gather the following information before you create an influence template:
*Name of the influence template you wish to create
*What shape you are intending your influence to have (See [[#Creating a Shape|Creating a Shape]] for instructions)
*Fade on the influence, basically if you want it to have hard edges or softer edges
[[File:Influence Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Influence Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Influence Templates” this will open a new tab titled “Influence Templates”</li>
<li>Within the influence templates tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Influence Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the influence template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Standard Humidity, Standard Temperature, Standard Power kW, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the influence template in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Select what shape you want to make the influence template in the drop-down menu called “Shapes” or create a new “Shape” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Shape|Creating a Shape]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>Select the “Algorithm” to be applied to the shape from the drop down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Default for temperature / humidity: Power2</li>
<li>Default for power: Constant</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter a value for the “Fade Pixels” of the shape if you want soft edges when two influences collide</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>The value is the number of pixels at the edge of the shape that will be softened</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Legend==
A legend is how to define the value boundaries for an influence to represent colors. The legend is seen at the bottom of a map to visually display the value range in a color scale. It all works as follows: First a data series produces a numerical value and pushes that number to the associated influence, next the influence template will give that numerical value a shape boundary, within the influence template boundary the numerical value will correspond with the legend to produce a certain color value for representation of the influence on the map. You will need to gather the following information to create a legend:
*Name of the legend you wish to create
*Number format template that corresponds with the numerical value you wish to display
*Define a low value for the legend
*Define a high value for the legend
*Define the number of hints you wish the legend to have (hints are the number of values displayed on the legend)
*Choose a gradient file to correspond with your legend. You can use https://dev.modern.ie/testdrive/demos/svgradientbackgroundmaker/ to create a gradient.
[[File:Legend.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Legend” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Legends” this will open a new tab titled “Legends”</li>
<li>Within the legend tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Legend.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the legend in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Data Center Power, Cost Per Cabinet, Data Center Temps, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the legend in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the number format template to be used with the legend in the “Number Format Template” drop-down menu or create a new “Number Format Template” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Number Format Template|Creating a Number Format Template]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>Enter value of lowest point in the “Low Value” field</li>
<li>Enter value of highest point in the “High Value” field</li>
<li>Enter a number of desired hints in the “# of Hints” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>If you want to represent 0-10, you would select 11 for number of hints</li>
</ol>
<li>Select a gradient file to use for the legend in the “New Gradient File” section. You can use https://dev.modern.ie/testdrive/demos/svgradientbackgroundmaker/ to create a gradient.</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Layer==
A layer is an aspect of the map that serves a very important purpose. The first layer is the solid background, which is the foundational piece for creating any map. The second layer is the layer on which the influences sit, which is usually placed in between the solid background and the floor plan layer. The third layer is a transparent floor plan layout of the data center; the top-down view of what infrastructure (cabinets, PDU’s, UPS, etc.) is located within the room. Lastly, you can add a link layer which allows you to click on the map and link out to either a URL, data series, graph, map, LiveTile, or a piece of hardware directly. This order of layering provides the capabilities to show a floor layout, 9-box model, risk assessment, etc. and the abilities to place influences on top to paint a clear picture of real-time metrics in your data center. You will need to gather the following information to create a layer:
*Name of the layer you wish to create
*What type of layer that is to be created; basic influence, image, link, or solid
*Legend you wish to correspond to the influences that will be placed on the map (see [[#Creating a Legend|Creating a Legend]] for instructions)
[[File:Create Layer.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Layer” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Layers” this will open a new tab titled “Layers”</li>
<li>Within the layers tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Layer.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the layer in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Floor Plan, Cost Per Cabinet, Humidity % 10 inch, Solid Background, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the layer in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the type of layer desired in the “Layer Type” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>If “Basic Influence," choose which legend to use in the “Legend” drop-down menu or create a new “Legend” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Legend|Creating a Legend]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>If “Image," select the appropriate image from the drop-down menu or create a new “Image” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Uploading an Image|Uploading an Image]] section for instructions. Select the placement of the image from the drop-down menu.</li>
<li>If “Link," no additional information is needed</li>
<li>If “Solid," define the desired color and percentage of transparency in the “Color” and “Transparency Percentage” fields</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create,” you can now view your layer in the Layers List</li>
<li>If you created a "Link Layer" see the next steps in section [[#Attaching a Link to a Link Layer|Attaching a Link to a Link Layer]]</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Attaching a Link to a Link Layer==

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Layers” this will open a new tab titled “Layers”</li>
<li>Select the desired link layer you want to add a link to from the “Layer List”. If the link layer is not created see [[#Creating a Layer|Creating a Layer]] section for instructions</li>
<li>On the bottom half of the screen, click "Manage Links"</li>
[[File:Manage-Links.png]]
<ol type="a">
<li>In the new tab,(in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Link”</li>
[[File:Create Link.JPG]]
<ol type="i">
<li>Enter the name of the link in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Example: Google, Facebook, Avg Cold Aisle Data Series, Executive Summary Map</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional details about the link in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the shape you want the link to have on the map from the drop down menu or create a new “Shape” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Shape|Creating a Shape]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Define the location of the Link horizontally in the “X Coordinate” field (this can be adjusted at a later time, default: 1) (see [[Create Map#Moving an Influence or Link Location on a Map|Moving an Influence or Link Location on a Map]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Define the location of the Link vertically in the “Y Coordinate” field (this can be adjusted at a later time, default: 1) (see [[Create Map#Moving an Influence or Link Location on a Map|Moving an Influence or Link Location on a Map]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select the type of link for the link layer in the “Link Type” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>If URL, enter URL into the text box</li>
<li>If data Series, select the corresponding data series from the drop-down menu or create a new data series record by clicking the star button (see [[Create a Data Series#Creating a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>If graph, select the corresponding graph from the drop-down menu or create a new graph record by clicking on the star button (see [[Create Graph#Creating a Graph|Creating a Graph]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>If hardware, select the corresponding hardware from the drop-down menu or create a new hardware record by clicking on the star button (see [[Create a Site#Creating Hardware|Creating Hardware]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>If LiveTile, select the corresponding LiveTile from the drop-down menu or create a new LiveTile record by clicking on the star button (see [[Create LiveTile#Creating a LiveTile|Creating a LiveTile]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>If Map, select the corresponding Map from the drop-down menu or create a new Map record by clicking on the star button (see [[Create Map#Creating a Map|Creating a Map]] section for instructions) </li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
<li>You have just successfully added a link to the specified layer.</li>
<li>To add your new layer to a map, see section [[Create Map#Applying a Layer to a Map|Applying a Layer to a Map]] for instructions </li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Number Format Template==
A number format template takes a raw number value and changes it into usable and contextual metrics. One would typically use this when formatting from Amps to kW or a whole number to a dollar amount or percentage, but it is not limited to that. You will need to gather the following information to create a number format template:
*Name of the number format template you wish to create
*Specified type of number format template; either simple, currency, or java decimal pattern
[[File:Number Format Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Number Format Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and select the button called “Number Format Templates” this will open a new tab titled “Number Format Templates”</li>
<li>Within the number format templates tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Number Format Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the number format template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Fahrenheit (rounded), Percent, kWh, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the number format template in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the type of number format template in the “Type” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>If “Simple” type, define Prefix and Suffix</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Prefix: $, etc.</li>
<li>Suffix: kW, Amps, Tons, Months</li>
</ol>
<li>If “Currency” type, choose “Locale” from the drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Default: en_US</li>
</ol>
<li>If “Java Decimal Pattern” type, enter the pattern in the “Pattern” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>To create a number with a single value after the decimal, you would enter: ##.#</li>
</ol>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Payment==
A payment record, referring to the payment for any asset, is a way to track a payment for a specific device and when/who the payment goes to through the LiveDC platform. You will need to gather the following information before you create a payment record:
*Date of the payment
*Amount to be paid
*How you will be paying the payment (see [[#Creating a Payment Type|Creating a Payment Type]] for instructions)
*Who the payment is paid by (see [[#Creating a Business Unit|Creating a Business Unit]] for instructions)
*Who the payment is paid to (see [[#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] for instructions)
[[File:Payment.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Enter the date of when the payment for the hardware is to be paid in the “Date” field</li>
<li>Enter the amount of the payment in the “Amount” field</li>
<li>Select the type of payment in the “Type” drop-down menu or create a new “Payment Type” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Payment Type|Creating a Payment Type]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select who will be making the payment in the “Paid By” drop-down menu or create a new “Paid By” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Business Unit|Creating a Business Unit]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select to whom the payment is going to in the “Paid To” drop-down menu or create a new “Paid To” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Add tags to the payment in the section titled “Tags” by selecting from the drop down menu and clicking the left-hand facing arrow or create a new “Tag” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating Tags|Creating Tags]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the payment in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Payment Type==
A payment type is defining the mode of how the payment is paid. Whether that be a check or automatic deposit, it’s the way to define how you are paying for an asset within the LiveDC platform.
[[File:Payment Type.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Payment Type” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Payment Types” this will open a new tab titled “Payment types”</li>
<li>Within the payment types tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Payment Type.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the payment type in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the payment type in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Physical Disk==
A physical disk is used to store all server data. LiveDC provides an avenue of tracking these disks for each piece of hardware. It is valuable to track each disk for the purposes of asset management.

[[File:Physical Disk.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Enter the amount of physical disks of the hardware in the “Quantity” field</li>
<li>Enter the amount of capacity the physical disk has in the “Capacity in GB” field</li>
<li>Select the physical disk RAID that is utilized by the hardware in the “RAID” drop-down menu or create a new “Physical Disk RAID” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Physical Disk RAID|Creating a Physical Disk RAID]] section for instructions) </li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the physical disk RAID in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: Disk Controller</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the physical disk RAID in the “Details” field</li>
</ol>
<li>Select the physical disk speed that is utilized by the hardware in the “Speed” drop-down menu or create a new “Physical Disk Speed” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Physical Disk Speed|Creating a Physical Disk Speed]] section for instructions)</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the physical disk speed in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the physical disk speed in the “Details” field</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug==
The LiveDC platform provides a means of tracking power plugs for each piece of hardware. This is valuable from the standpoint of tracking single and dual corded devices. You will need to gather the following information before creating a power plug:
*Number of power plugs for the specific piece of hardware
*Type of power plug
*Observed wattage
*Estimated wattage
*Amount of wattage displayed on the nameplate of the hardware
*Amount of ampere
*Backup source of the hardware
*What circuit the hardware is linked back to
*Amount of voltage for the hardware
[[File:Power Plug.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>In the window titled “Creating Hardware”, enter the amount of Power Plugs for the piece of hardware in the “Quantity” field</li>
<li>Select the type of power plug in the “Plug Type” drop-down menu or create a new “Plug Type” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Power Plug Type|Creating a Power Plug Type]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Enter the amount of watts observed in the “Observed Watts” field)</li>
<li>Enter the amount of watts estimated in the “Estimated Watts” field</li>
<li>Enter the amount of watts on the nameplate of the hardware in the “Nameplate Watts” field</li>
<li>Select an ampere for the power plug in the “Ampere” drop-down menu or create a new “Ampere” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Power Plug Ampere|Creating a Power Plug Ampere]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select a backup source for the power plug in the “Backup Source” drop-down menu or create a new “Backup Source” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Power Plug Backup Source|Creating a Power Plug Backup Source]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select a power circuit for the power plug in the “Circuit” drop-down menu or create a new “Circuit” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Power Plug Circuit|Creating a Power Plug Circuit]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select a voltage for the power plug in the “Voltage” drop-down menu or create a new “Voltage” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Power Plug Voltage|Creating a Power Plug Voltage]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug Ampere==
LiveDC tracks the amperage that is produced in each power plug. Tracking such information is useful for estimating power usage throughout your data center.

[[File:Power Plug Ampere.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Power Plug Ampere” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Power Plug Amperes” this will open a new tab titled “Power Plug Amperes”</li>
<li>Within the power plug amperes tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Power Plug Amperes.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the power plug ampere in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the power plug ampere in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug Backup Source==
Tracking the backup source related to each power plug for hardware is important information to have on hand in the case of a power failure or outage. LiveDC will track the backup power source for each piece of hardware located in your data center.
[[File:Power Plug Backup.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Power Plug Backup Source” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Power Plug Backup Sources” this will open a new tab titled “Power Plug Backup Sources”</li>
<li>Within the power plug backup sources tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Power Plug Backup Source.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the power plug backup source in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the power plug backup source in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug Circuit==
LiveDC can track which specific circuit breaker(s) a piece of hardware is connected to. This sort of information is valuable to know for proactively managing scheduled maintenance and powering down hardware.
[[File:Power Plug Circuit.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Power Plug Circuit” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Power Plug Circuits” this will open a new tab titled “Power Plug Circuits”</li>
<li>Within the power plug circuits tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Power Plug Circuits.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the power plug circuit in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the power plug circuit in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug Type==
In LiveDC, the type of power plug that is used can be tied back to a specific piece of hardware. We track this information to help identify how many plugs of each type are available in each rack and how many are used.
[[File:Power Plug Type.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Power Plug Type” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click called “Power Plug Types” this will open a new tab titled “Power Plug Types”</li>
<li>Within the power plug types tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Power Plug Type.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the power plug type in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the power plug type in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug Voltage==
Tracking voltage, utilizing the LiveDC platform, is a simple and valuable operation. By entering the voltage information about a specific piece of hardware, you are able to plan for power usage and estimate monthly costs surrounding a single device or many devices.

[[File:Power Plug Voltage.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Power Plug Voltage” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Power Plug Voltages” this will open a new tab titled “Power Plug Voltages”</li>
<li>In the power plug voltages tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Power Plug Voltage.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the power plug voltage in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the power plug voltage in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Product==
LiveDC utilizes a parent-child relationship for creating and tracking products. Products tie directly to assets in your data center and make the search function of LiveDC a valuable means of accessing and analyzing your information. You will need to gather the following information before creating a product:
*Manufacturer of the product
*Category of the product
*Model of the product
*Model number of the product
*Generation of the product
[[File:Create Product.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Product” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Products” this will open a new tab titled “Product”</li>
<li>Within the products tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Product” or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, basic tab in the “Product” section, click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the manufacturer name of the product in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Dell, Oracle, EMC, HP, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the manufacturer name of the product in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the products tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, basic tab, “Product” section, click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the category name of the product in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Server, Storage, Network, or Infrastructure</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the category name of the product in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the manufacturer in the “Parent Product” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Dell, Oracle, EMC, HP, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the products tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, basic tab, “Product” section, click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the model name of the product in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: ProLiant, PowerEdge, SunFire, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the model name of the product in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the “Manufacturer – Category” in the “Parent Product” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Dell-Server</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the products tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, basic tab, “Product” section, click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the model number name of the product in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: DL385, 2900, X4250, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the model number name of the product in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the “Manufacturer – Category – Model” in the “Parent Product” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Dell-Server-ProLiant</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the products tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, basic tab, “Product” section, click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the generation / version name of the product in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: G5, V2, 7.1, etc</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the qualifier name of the product in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the “Manufacturer – Category – Model – Model Number” in the “Parent Product” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: Dell-Server-Proliant-DL385</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>You can create as many levels of information as needed, but the 5 levels we have just described seem to cover almost all instances of product tracking</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a SAN Connection==
A SAN (Storage Area Network) connection can be tracked within the LiveDC platform. Tracking this information in LiveDC is valuable, for storage devices especially, to provide an understanding of which SAN fabrics a device is connected to and to determine if there is redundancy. You will need to gather the following information before creating a SAN connection record:
*Number of connections the hardware has
*Name of the SAN
*Amount of capacity in GB of the SAN connection
[[File:SAN Connection.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Enter the amount of SAN connections the hardware obtains in the “Number of Connections” field</li>
<li>Select the SAN in the “SAN” drop-down menu or create a new “SAN” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a SAN|Creating a SAN]] for instructions)</li>
<li>Enter the amount of capacity the SAN connection has in the “Capacity in GB” field</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a SAN==
The SAN (Storage Area Network) is used primarily with storage devices. Tracking this information in LiveDC is valuable, for storage devices especially, to provide an understanding of which SAN fabrics a device is connected to and to determine if there is redundancy between SANs.

[[File:Create SAN.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create SAN” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “SANs” this will open a new tab titled “SANs”</li>
<li>Within the SANs tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create SAN.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the SAN in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: SAN A, SAN B, Storage SAN, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the SAN in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating Service Infos==
LiveDC tracks what and who will perform service on each piece of hardware through the service infos section. This information is valuable to track for knowing who to contact in the case of scheduled maintenance, an outage, or failure. You will need to gather the following information before creating a service info record:
*Name of the provider (See [[#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] for instructions)
*Type of service that the provider performs
*Start date of the service for the hardware
*End date of the service for the hardware
*Discount program of the service (See [[#Creating a Discount Program|Creating a Discount Program]] for instructions)
*Amount of base monthly cost for the service
[[File:Service Info.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Select the company that does the service for the hardware in the “Provider” drop-down menu or create a new “Company” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select the type of service the company provides for that hardware in the “Service Type” drop-down menu</li>
<li>Select a beginning date of the service in the “Start Date” field</li>
<li>Select an ending date of the service in the “Stop Date” field</li>
<li>Select a discount program for the company in the “Discount Program” drop-down menu or create a new “Discount Program” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Discount Program|Creating a Discount Program]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Enter a monthly cost in the “Base Monthly Cost” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the service in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Service Tier==
In the LiveDC platform, you can track both the requested and actual service tier associated with each piece of hardware. This information is valuable to have when considering recovery times and planning for outages and failures.

[[File:Service Tier.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Service Tier” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Service Tiers” this will open a new tab titled “Service Tiers”</li>
<li>Within the service tiers tab, in the upper left-hand corner click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Service Tier.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the service tier in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Tier 1, Tier 2, Tier 3, Tier 4, etc. </li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the service tier in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Shape==
Shapes in LiveDC refer to the boundaries for an influence that are placed on maps. The shapes for an influence can be either a square or a circle, but can be manipulated to represent different sizes for cabinets, PDUs, UPS equipment, etc. A color will fill the shape when it is corresponded to a legend on the map. You will need to gather the following information before creating a shape:
*Name of the shape you wish to create
*Which basic shape you are wishing to create, circle or square
*Pixel height of the shape
*Scale width of the shape you are creating
*Degrees of rotation of the shape
*Disregard the last 4 items (fill color, fill transparency, border pixels, border color) as they have no impact on the shape at the current time, they are placeholders for future functionality

[[File:Shape.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Shape” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Shapes” this will open a new tab titled “Shapes”</li>
<li>Within the shapes tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Shape.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the shape in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Cabinet, Standard Humidity Return, Standard Temperature, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the shape in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select what kind of shape to create in the “Basic Shape” drop-down menu</li>
<li>Define the height of the shape in the “Pixel Height” field</li>
<li>Enter a value for the width in the “Scale Width” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>This value is in relation to the height, so if you wanted a square that was 10 high x 20 wide, you would enter 10 for height and 2 for scale width</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter a value of rotation for the shape in the “Rotation Degrees” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>This would be used if you wanted to represent a diamond, you would create a square and rotate it 90 degrees</li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a SNMP V1 Template==
An SNMP V1 template is a set of rules for Elicit to follow to collect data points from an asset. Utilizing a web address, read community string, and an OID, Elicit will gather information using these instructions and populate data series for use in maps, LiveTiles, and/or graphs. You will need to gather the following information to create an SNMP V1 template:
*Name of the SNMP V1 template you wish to create
*IP address or URL for Elicit to communicate with
*Specified read community string: default is public
*Specific OID for the piece of information you are trying to gather
*The regular expression to tell Elicit which data you are specifically looking for
*An adjustment expression for the data being returned to the LiveDC platform
*Specific invalid raw values that are typically returned, which can be excluded. Some sensors return a 0 when in error state.

[[File:SNMP V1 Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create SNMP V1 Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “SNMP V1 Templates” this will open a new tab titled “SNMP V1 Templates”</li>
<li>Within the SNMP V1 templates tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create SNMP V1 Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the SNMP V1 template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Chatsworth Humidity (Port 1), Chatsworth Power % 30A (Phase XY), etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the SNMP V1 template in the “Details” field</li>
<li>The parameter format can be left as is and provides a way for you to specify what values you need to enter and what the label should be in the pop-up screen</li>
<li>Enter the Internet Protocol Address in the “Address” field using the defined parameter format</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: { {Address} }</li>
<li>This will prompt the user to enter the specific IP address each time</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter the community string in the “Read Community String” field using the defined parameter format</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>If standard across the organization, you can enter it here and not have to enter it again when creating a data series</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter the object identification number in the “Object Identifier OID” field using the defined parameter format</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Usually very specific for a type of power strip and can be entered here once and used for all power strips of that type</li>
<li>Example: 1.3.6.1.4.1.319.1.2.1.0</li>
</ol>
<li>Define the regular expression in the “Regular Expression” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Leave blank as it is not really leveraged at this time</li>
</ol>
<li>Define the adjustment expression in the “Adjustment Expression” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>This will take the raw value received via SNMP and perform an adjustment on that before sending the database for data normalization</li>
<li>Example: Raw/100</li>
</ol>
<li>Add any raw values that are invalid in the “Invalid Raw Values” field and click the left-hand facing arrow, if applicable</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating Tags==
Tags are what connects almost everything together in LiveDC. Giving a record a tag is very valuable for tracking purposes. Objects with tags are easily found using LiveDC's robust search function. Tags can be used to define location, category of product, type of metric in a data series, client specific tags, or anything else for that matter.

[[File:Tag.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Tag” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Tags” this will open a new tab titled “Tags”</li>
<li>Within the Tags tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Tag.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the tag in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: A Side, Row 10, Server, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the Tag in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Timing Template==
Data series utilize timing templates to tell Elicit how often to collect data from a device. The templates can be configured from polling once every minute to once every month, depending on how important the data is to the end-user.

[[File:Timing Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Timing Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Timing Templates” this will open a new tab titled “Timing Templates”</li>
<li>Within the timing templates tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Timing Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the timing template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: 1 minute, 1 hour, 15 minute, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the timing template in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Define how often the desired poll will take place in the “Poll Period” field</li>
<li>Define how often the desired warning period will last in the “Warning Period” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>This warning period will provide alerts if a data series has not communicated within the specified interval</li>
</ol>
<li>Define when, if at all, the poll will expire in the “Expire Period” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>This expire period will provide alerts if a data series has not communicated within the specified interval and will expire the reading so that it does not show up on maps</li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Trend Template==
A trend template tells Elicit to create a data series based upon the data that is in a separate data series. The new data series is created by choosing either the average, maximum, median, minimum, or sum of the data series being polled.

[[File:Trend Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Trend Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Trend Templates” this will open a new tab titled “Trend Templates”</li>
<li>Within the trend templates tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Trend Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the trend template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Past 3 Months, Past Day, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the trend template in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select what “Operation” you would like to perform on the data from the drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Average, Count, Maximum, Minimum, Median, Sum</li>
</ol>
<li>Define time period in which you would like the data to trend in the “Time Period” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: 30 Days, 1 Month, 24 Hours</li>
</ol>
<li>Snap to Date</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Leave as red x if you do not want to “reset” after each time period (selected in step D)</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>For example if you set the time period to 1 month, this template would include values since the same day during the previous month</li>
<li>Using these options, calculating a trend on the 13th of this month would include values from the 13th of the previous month through the 13th of this month</li>
</ol>
<li>Change to a green check mark if you want to “reset” after each time period (selected in step D)</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>For example if you set the time period to 1 month, this template would “reset” after each month</li>
<li>A Data Series with a Derived Data Start Date of July 1st, 2014 that uses this Trend Template with a 1 Month period and Snap to Date would “reset” on the first of each following month</li>
<li>Using these options, calculating a trend on the 13th of this month would include values from the 1st of this month through the 13th of this month</li>
</ol>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Uploading an Image==
Uploading an image provides flexibility for the user to customize maps specific to one’s data center. Maps are not limited to just a floor plan though, you can upload virtually any image to construct a map that will depict your data.

[[File:Upload Image.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Uploaded Images” this will open a new tab titled “Upload Images”</li>
<li>Within the uploaded images tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Uploaded Image.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the uploaded image in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: DC Room 1, Storage, POD 2, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Choose the file that to upload in the “Image File” section</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the uploaded image in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a URL Scrape Template==
A URL scrape template provides an avenue for Elicit to collect data from a specific web page (a web page with no login requirements). This is valuable for collecting data off of the web for many different reasons. Typically the data series created are based upon intelligent assets in the data center that have a web server serving up an HTTP page. You will need to gather the following information prior to creating a URL scrape template:
*Name of the URL scrape template
*Specific URL you intend to collect the data from
*Regular expression to tell Elicit where to look within all the text on the web page
*Adjustment expression, if you want to format the data as it enters the LiveDC platform
*Any invalid raw values you do not wish to use in the data series

[[File:URL Scrape Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create URL Scrape Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “URL Scrape Templates” this will open a new tab titled “URL Scrape Templates”</li>
<li>Within the URL Scrape Templates tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create URL Scrape Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the URL scrape template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: C:\ Drive, Configuration File Collection, CPU, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the URL scrape template in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Define the format for the parameters of the URL scrape template in the “Parameter Format” fields</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: {{ }}</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter the URL that will be used to gather the data in the “URL Scrape Template” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: File:///c|public/{ {hostname} }{ {counter} }.txt</li>
</ol>
<li>Define the regular expression in the “Regular Expression” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: =(\d*)</li>
</ol>
<li>Define the adjustment expression in the “Adjustment Expression” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: 100-raw</li>
</ol>
<li>Add any raw values that are invalid in the “Invalid Raw Values” field and click the left-hand facing arrow, if applicable</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Virtual Machine Datacenter==
Since there is no physical location to put a virtual machine, creating a virtual machine datacenter is the solution. This is the place for virtual machines to reside. It ties the virtual machine to a logical location for tracking purposes.

[[File:Virtual Machine Data Center.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Virtual Machine” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Virtual Machine Datacenters” this will open a new tab titled “Virtual Machine Datacenters”</li>
<li>Within the Virtual Machine Datacenters tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Virtual Machine Datacenter.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the virtual machine datacenter in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: Virtual Room 1</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the virtual machine datacenter in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Importing from a File==
Importing from a file is the mode of entering large amounts of data records into LiveDC at one time. There is a learning curve to this process, but once this skill is acquired it becomes very useful. Essentially, the user is inputting all of their data records in at the same time and letting LiveDC do the heavy lifting and analysis. Importing from a file is used all across the LiveDC platform, where mostly everything in the software can be imported in a bulk format. You will need to gather the following information prior to importing a file:
*Asset specific information
*Location and physical dimension information regarding the asset
*Data series specific information
*Visual specific information

[[File:Import from File.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and select the button called “Import from File…” this will open a new window titled “Import from File”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Click the “Browse” button to select the document to import into LiveDC</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Once the file is selected, you will have the option to perform analysis on the imported data before committing that information to the database</li>
<li>This helps prevent errors and will give you the results back to ensure all values are correct before actually importing the data</li>
</ol>
<li>To perform an analysis on the document, check the box titled “Perform Analysis Only” to green check mark</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Once you have validated that there are no errors and the data looks correct (denoted by performing analysis and getting all green highlighted columns back in the results spreadsheet)</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Green means you are good to go, there are no errors found</li>
<li>Yellow means warning, something has been updated but you are still ok to upload</li>
<li>Red means error, this item will not be imported into LiveDC</li>
<li>No color or white means that that item is already in the software and there are no changes to it</li>
</ol>
<li>To actually import the file and commit the data into LiveDC, check the box titled “Perform Analysis Only” to change it to the red X</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Import”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Graph Line==
[[File:Graph Line.PNG]]
===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Enter the following information in the “Create Graph Line” window </li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the line in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Physical Servers, Average Temperature, Historical Power, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter a name for the legend of this line in the “Legend Label” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Historical, Max Temp, Physical Servers, etc.</li>
<li>This will appear in the bottom of the graph window</li>
</ol>
<li>Select a color for the graph line in the “Color” section</li>
<li>Select the data series that will provide the data for the graph line in the drop-down menu or create a new data series record by clicking the star button (See [[Create a Data Series#Creating a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Add a futures line to show how the graph line could change in the future by clicking the star button to create a new “Futures” record </li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Enter the name of the graph line future in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Example: 2.5%</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter a label for the legend in the “Legend Label” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Example: 2.5%</li>
</ol>
<li>Define the period of time the graph will extend into the future in the “Time Period” section</li>
<li>Enter the amount of future graph lines to come from the historical data in the “Number Per Period” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Example: 1 Month</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter a formula for the future graph line in the “Formula” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Example: prev*1.05</li>
</ol>
<li>Define a color for the future graph line in the “Color” field</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Add” on the “Create Graph Line” window</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Physical Disk RAID==
A physical disk RAID is a redundant array of independent disks. LiveDC provides an avenue for tracking these disks for each piece of hardware. It is valuable to track each disk for the purposes of asset management.

[[File:Physical Disk RAID.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>In the “Create Physical Disk RAID” window enter the following:</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the physical disk RAID in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: Disk Controller</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the physical disk RAID in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Physical Disk Speed==
LiveDC provides an avenue for tracking these disks for each piece of hardware. It is valuable to track each disk speed for the purposes of asset management.

[[File:Physical Disk Speed.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>In the “Create Physical Disk Speed” window enter the following:</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the physical disk speed in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the physical disk speed in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Exporting a File==
[[File:Export.PNG]]
===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left side), click the desired tab to export records from. To find specific records, utilize LiveDC's robust Search feature (See [[Using LiveDC Search#How to Use Search|How to Use Search]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Once the desired records are in a list format on the screen, click “Export” in the top right corner of the screen</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>A small window titled “Confirm Export” will appear</li>
<li>Click "Export"</li>
<li>LiveDC will compile an Excel spreadsheet of the desired records (these records can be used for the mass import format as a template for what data needs to be entered before importing)</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>To import new records (See [[#Importing from a File|Importing from a File]] section for instructions)</li>
</ol>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Adding a Floor Plan to a Map==
===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>First you need to upload a PNG floor plan into LiveDC (See [[#Uploading an Image|Uploading an Image]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>Once the floor plan is uploaded into LiveDC, On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Layers” this will open a new tab titled “Layers”</li>
<li>Within the layers tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Layer.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the layer in the "Name" Field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Server Room Floor Plan, Data Center Floor Plan</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter additional information about the layer in the "Details" field</li>
<li>For a floor plan layer, we will select "Image" in the "Layer Type" drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>In the drop-down list find the floor plan image you uploaded in step 1</li>
<li>Select "center" from the "Placement" drop-down menu</li>
[[File:Image Layer.JPG]]
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
<li>Next we need to create a Solid Background layer for the map</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Again, in the upper left-hand corner click "Create"</li>
<li>Enter the name of the layer in the "Name" Field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Solid Background</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter additional information about the layer in the "Details" field</li>
<li>For a solid background layer, we will select "Solid" in the "Layer Type" drop-down menu</li>
<li>Select the color you want the background to be</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>We like to use #808080</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter the Transparency Percent</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>We usually do 0%</li>
[[File:Solid Layer.JPG]]
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Visuals” and click “Maps” this will open a new tab titled “Maps”</li>
<li>Within the maps tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Map.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the map in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Operational Model – Cooling, Power %, Operational Cost per Cabinet, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the map in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Define a horizontal size in pixels for the map in the “Width” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>A good rule of thumb is to look at the properties of the image and use those predefined dimensions (usually no more than 1650 pixels)</li>
</ol>
<li>Define a vertical size in pixels for the map in the “Height” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>A good rule of thumb is to look at the properties of the image and use those predefined dimensions (usually no more than 1300 pixels)</li>
</ol>
<li>Add a legend to the map in the section titled “Legends” by selecting from the drop down menu and clicking the left-hand facing arrow or create a new “Legend” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Legend|Creating a Legend]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>In the Map Layers section, click the star button</li>
<li>Select the "Solid Background" layer from the drop-down list</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Change the red x to a green check mark for "Show Dots" and "Show Values"</li>
<li>Do not change line color, text color, background color or background transparency percent</li>
[[File:Solid Map Layer.JPG]]
<li>Click "Add"</li>
</ol>
<li>Again, click the star button in the Map Layers section</li>
<li>Select the floor plan layer you created above from the drop-down list</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Change the red x to a green check mark for "Show Dots"</li>
<li>Do not change line color, text color, background color or background transparency percent</li>
[[File:Floor plan map layer.JPG]]
<li>Click "Add"</li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
<li>You have now created a Map with a floor plan. You will need to add additional layers to the map to see data. (See [[Map#Creating a Map|Creating a Map]] section for instructions)</li>
</ol>
</ol>

New User

2015-08-04T15:51:21Z

Khackenmiller: /* Creating New User */

As part of the security measures taken to ensure your data is protected, we have enabled two factor authentication when setting up a new user. You will need to send an email to [mailto:livedc@ncompass-inc.com livedc@ncompass-inc.com] requesting that a new user be created. The LiveDC team will add you to LiveDC and then you can begin the second part of setting up a new user as outlined in the steps below.

==Creating New User==
<ol>
<li>Go to the [https://livedc.ncompass-inc.com/LiveDC/ui.html LiveDC website]</li>
<li>Click "Create a new User Profile"</li>
[[File:Login Box.png]]
<li>Enter your name and email address in fields provided and click “Create new User Profile” button</li>
[[File:Login Box2.png]]
<li>An email will be sent to the email address you entered above with a system-generated password. Click on the link within the email message and enter your log-in information.</li>
<li>Once the steps above have been completed, send an email to either your N'compass Account Representative or to [mailto:livedc@ncompass-inc.com livedc@ncompass-inc.com] asking to be added to your company's LiveDC account.</li>
</ol>

Extras

2015-08-03T20:08:02Z

Khackenmiller: /* Creating a Legend */

__TOC__

==Creating Accounting Shares==
An accounting share is a way to track what department or function of the business owns or is making payments for a piece of hardware. You will need to know the following information to create an accounting share:
*Business unit or business department having ownership of the device
*Number of shares that business unit owns
[[File:Accounting Share.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Select a business unit from the “Business Unit” drop-down menu or create a new “Business Unit” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Business Unit|Creating a Business Unit]] section for instructions)</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Examples: Accounting, Production, Marketing, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter the desired amount of shares into the “Shares” field</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating Address Type==
Creating an address type is required for each operating system, usually defined as IPv4 or IPv6. The address type is not considered the actual address.You will need to know the following information before creating an address type:
*Whether the address type is an IP-V4 or IP-V6
[[File:Address Type.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Address Type” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Address Types” this will open a new tab titled “Address Types”</li>
<li>In the address types tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Address Type”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the address type in the field titled “Name”</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: IP Address, IP Address (location-based), etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the address type in the “Details” field</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Business Unit==
A business unit or business department is a great way to track ownership or affected areas of the organization that touch a specific piece of hardware, software, or virtual machine. A business unit uses the parent-child relationship like a hardware product. This can be utilized for accounting and tracking purposes of the asset. You will need to gather the following information when creating a business unit:
*Name of the business unit or function you wish to create
*A parent business unit, if any
[[File:Business Unit.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Business Unit” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Business Unit” this will open a new tab titled “Business units”</li>
<li>Within the business unit tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Business Unit” or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, service tab in the business unit section click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the company name in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Target, Best Buy, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the name of the company in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the business unit tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, service tab in the business unit section click the star button</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the department in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Marketing, Accounting, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the department name in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the company name in the “Parent Business Unit” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Target, Best Buy, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Company==
Creating a company is a way to distinguish the physical history and payment history of an asset in the event of a merger and acquisition or any other event which would involve transfer of ownership. You will need to know the following information before creating a company:
*Name of the company you wish to create
[[File:Company.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Company” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Companies” this will open a new tab titled “Companies”</li>
<li>Within the companies tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Company.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the company name in the field titled “Name”</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the company in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Component==
Components tracking is a great way to record what is contained within a specific piece of hardware you are creating. The component information can give you insight into how much of a resource you are utilizing and consuming in your data center. It tracks everything from power to memory to peripheral cards inserted into the back of your servers. You will need to gather the following information to create a component record for your hardware:
*Memory in GB for the hardware
*Number of logical disk volumes
*Number of network interfaces for the hardware
*Number of management interfaces for the hardware
*Number of CPU’s in the hardware
*Other components, utilizing the parent-child relationship, located within the hardware
*Physical disks
*SAN connections
*Number and type of power plugs
[[File:Component.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Component” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Components” this will open a new tab titled “Components”</li>
<li>In the components tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Component.” If you are in the “Create Hardware” window, component tab in the component section click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the peripheral name of the components in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Network Card, PCIE Card, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the peripheral in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the components tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, component tab in the component section click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the ports in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: port numbers</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the ports in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the peripheral in the “Parent Component” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Network Card, PCIE Card, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Contact==
A contact is utilized when referring to an asset, specifically a piece of hardware. This is the organization and person you would contact if the asset has a disruption of service or experiences a failure or outage. You will need to gather the following information when creating a contact:
*Type of contact; electrician, service provider, maintenance, etc.
*Name of the contact; first and last name, company the contact works for, and contact method (see [[#Creating a Contact Method Type|Creating a Contact Method Type]] for instructions)
[[File:Contact.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Contact” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Contacts” this will open a new tab titled “Contacts”</li>
<li>Within the contact tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Contact”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the first name of the contact in the “First Name” field</li>
<li>Enter the last name of the contact in the “Last Name” field</li>
<li>Select which company the contact is associated with in the “Company” drop-down menu or create a new “Company” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Add a contact method by clicking the star button. In the “Create Contact Method” window enter the following:</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Enter a “Type” from the drop down menu or by clicking on the star button to create a new “Type” record. (see [[#Creating a Contact Method Type|Creating a Contact Method Type]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>Enter a phone number or email for the contact method in the “Value” field </li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information for the contact in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Contact Method Type==
A contact method type provides the means to reach the point of contact for an asset, typically for hardware. The contact method type refers to the email or phone number used to get in touch with the person. You will need to gather the following information when creating a contact method type:
*What mode of contact is preferred for reaching this person; email, SMS, mobile phone, etc.
[[File:Contact Method Type.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Contact Method Type” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Contact Method Types” this will open a new tab titled “Contact Method Types”</li>
<li>Within the contact method type tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Contact Method Type.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the contact method type in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the contact method type in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a CPU Type==
[[File:CPU Type.PNG]]
===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create CPU Type” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “CPU Types” this will open a new tab titled “CPU Types”</li>
<li>Within the CPU type tab, in the upper left-hand corner click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create CPU Type.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the CPU type in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Intel Xeon E5450</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the CPU type in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Enter the speed of the CPU type in the field “Speed in GHz”</li>
<li>Enter how many physical cores the CPU type has in the “Physical Cores” field</li>
<li>Enter how many virtual cores the CPU type has in the “Virtual Cores” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Discount Program==
A discount program is used when referring to the service of an asset, typically hardware. Creating a discount program record is valuable for tracking what service company your dollars are going to and what deal you are receiving from a discount standpoint. You will need to gather the following information before creating a discount program record:
*Name of the discount program, for tracking purposes
*Percentage of the discount program, to know what deal has been provided by the service company
[[File:Discount Program.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Discount Program” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Discount Program” this will open a new tab titled “Discount Programs”</li>
<li>Within the discount program tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Discount Program.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the discount program in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the discount program in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Enter a discount percent in the field called “Percent”</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Domain==
A domain record refers to a collection of devices within your network, similar to contoso.com, and helps delineate between internal devices and devices that reside in other domains. The LiveDC platform will track what domains are being utilized by which operating systems and provide ease of searching this information. You will need to gather the following information before creating a domain record:
*Name of the domain record you wish to create
[[File:Domain.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Domain” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Domains” this will open a new tab titled “Domains”</li>
<li>Within the domains tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Domain.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the domain in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: company_xyz.local</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the domain in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating an Influence==
An influence is the way to represent what is happening to a specific data series in the data center on a map. The influence is shown by using a color scale, known as a legend, to provide knowledge around the objects real-time state. The influence’s color is affected by the data series it is connected to. As the data in the data series changes, so does the color of the influence, based upon the legend associated with the map. You will need to gather the following information before creating an influence:
*Specific data series that you would like to attach to the influence (see [[Create a Data Series#Creating a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] for instructions)
*Map that you would like to place the influence on (see [[Create Map#Creating a Map|Creating a Map]] for instructions)
*Layer of the map you will be placing the influence on (see [[#Creating a Layer|Creating a Layer]] for instructions)
*Influence template that you will be using to give the influence boundaries, shape, and scale (see [[#Creating an Influence Template|Creating an Influence Template]] for instructions)
[[File:Influence.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Layers” this will open a new tab titled “Layers List”</li>
<li>Select the desired layer to place influences on from the layers list and click “Manage Influences.” This will open a new tab titled “Manage Influences.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Within the manage influence tab a list titled “Influence List,” where all of the influences for the desired layer will reside, will be open. Click “Create” to make a new influence.</li>
<li>A new window will open up titled “Create Influence”</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Select the data series you wish to correspond with the influence in the “Data Series” drop-down menu or create a new “Data Series” record by clicking the star button (see [[Create a Data Series#Creating a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select an influence template to define the parameters for the influence in the “Template” drop-down menu or create a new “Influence Template” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating an Influence Template|Creating an Influence Template]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Define the location of the influence horizontally in the “X Coordinate” field (this can be adjusted at a later time, default: 1)</li>
<li>Define the location of the influence vertically in the “Y Coordinate” field (this can be adjusted at a later time, default: 1)</li>
<li>Select the type of link for the influence in the “Link Type” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>If data series, select the corresponding data series or create a new “Data Series” record by clicking the star button (see [[Create a Data Series#Creating a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>If hardware visual, select the corresponding hardware or create a new “Hardware” record by clicking the star button (see [[Create a Site#Creating Hardware|Creating Hardware]] section for instructions)</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
<li>To edit the position of an influence, either edit the specific influence from the influence list or from the map (see [[#Editing a Map Influence|Editing a Map Influence]] for more information)</li>
</ol>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating an Influence Template==
An influence template provides the visual boundaries that are placed around an influence for a map. Basically, the template will tell the influence what shape to take, if the pixels are going to fade at the edges, and the algorithm to follow in reference to what you are trying to display (usually will be predefined “Power2”). You will need to gather the following information before you create an influence template:
*Name of the influence template you wish to create
*What shape you are intending your influence to have (See [[#Creating a Shape|Creating a Shape]] for instructions)
*Fade on the influence, basically if you want it to have hard edges or softer edges
[[File:Influence Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Influence Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Influence Templates” this will open a new tab titled “Influence Templates”</li>
<li>Within the influence templates tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Influence Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the influence template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Standard Humidity, Standard Temperature, Standard Power kW, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the influence template in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Select what shape you want to make the influence template in the drop-down menu called “Shapes” or create a new “Shape” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Shape|Creating a Shape]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>Select the “Algorithm” to be applied to the shape from the drop down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Default for temperature / humidity: Power2</li>
<li>Default for power: Constant</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter a value for the “Fade Pixels” of the shape if you want soft edges when two influences collide</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>The value is the number of pixels at the edge of the shape that will be softened</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Legend==
A legend is how to define the value boundaries for an influence to represent colors. The legend is seen at the bottom of a map to visually display the value range in a color scale. It all works as follows: First a data series produces a numerical value and pushes that number to the associated influence, next the influence template will give that numerical value a shape boundary, within the influence template boundary the numerical value will correspond with the legend to produce a certain color value for representation of the influence on the map. You will need to gather the following information to create a legend:
*Name of the legend you wish to create
*Number format template that corresponds with the numerical value you wish to display
*Define a low value for the legend
*Define a high value for the legend
*Define the number of hints you wish the legend to have (hints are the number of values displayed on the legend)
*Choose a gradient file to correspond with your legend. You can use http://www.colorzilla.com/gradient-editor/ to create a gradient.
[[File:Legend.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Legend” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Legends” this will open a new tab titled “Legends”</li>
<li>Within the legend tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Legend.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the legend in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Data Center Power, Cost Per Cabinet, Data Center Temps, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the legend in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the number format template to be used with the legend in the “Number Format Template” drop-down menu or create a new “Number Format Template” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Number Format Template|Creating a Number Format Template]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>Enter value of lowest point in the “Low Value” field</li>
<li>Enter value of highest point in the “High Value” field</li>
<li>Enter a number of desired hints in the “# of Hints” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>If you want to represent 0-10, you would select 11 for number of hints</li>
</ol>
<li>Select a gradient file to use for the legend in the “New Gradient File” section. You can use http://www.colorzilla.com/gradient-editor/ to create a gradient.</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Layer==
A layer is an aspect of the map that serves a very important purpose. The first layer is the solid background, which is the foundational piece for creating any map. The second layer is the layer on which the influences sit, which is usually placed in between the solid background and the floor plan layer. The third layer is a transparent floor plan layout of the data center; the top-down view of what infrastructure (cabinets, PDU’s, UPS, etc.) is located within the room. Lastly, you can add a link layer which allows you to click on the map and link out to either a URL, data series, graph, map, LiveTile, or a piece of hardware directly. This order of layering provides the capabilities to show a floor layout, 9-box model, risk assessment, etc. and the abilities to place influences on top to paint a clear picture of real-time metrics in your data center. You will need to gather the following information to create a layer:
*Name of the layer you wish to create
*What type of layer that is to be created; basic influence, image, link, or solid
*Legend you wish to correspond to the influences that will be placed on the map (see [[#Creating a Legend|Creating a Legend]] for instructions)
[[File:Create Layer.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Layer” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Layers” this will open a new tab titled “Layers”</li>
<li>Within the layers tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Layer.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the layer in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Floor Plan, Cost Per Cabinet, Humidity % 10 inch, Solid Background, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the layer in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the type of layer desired in the “Layer Type” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>If “Basic Influence," choose which legend to use in the “Legend” drop-down menu or create a new “Legend” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Legend|Creating a Legend]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>If “Image," select the appropriate image from the drop-down menu or create a new “Image” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Uploading an Image|Uploading an Image]] section for instructions. Select the placement of the image from the drop-down menu.</li>
<li>If “Link," no additional information is needed</li>
<li>If “Solid," define the desired color and percentage of transparency in the “Color” and “Transparency Percentage” fields</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create,” you can now view your layer in the Layers List</li>
<li>If you created a "Link Layer" see the next steps in section [[#Attaching a Link to a Link Layer|Attaching a Link to a Link Layer]]</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Attaching a Link to a Link Layer==

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Layers” this will open a new tab titled “Layers”</li>
<li>Select the desired link layer you want to add a link to from the “Layer List”. If the link layer is not created see [[#Creating a Layer|Creating a Layer]] section for instructions</li>
<li>On the bottom half of the screen, click "Manage Links"</li>
[[File:Manage-Links.png]]
<ol type="a">
<li>In the new tab,(in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Link”</li>
[[File:Create Link.JPG]]
<ol type="i">
<li>Enter the name of the link in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Example: Google, Facebook, Avg Cold Aisle Data Series, Executive Summary Map</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional details about the link in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the shape you want the link to have on the map from the drop down menu or create a new “Shape” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Shape|Creating a Shape]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Define the location of the Link horizontally in the “X Coordinate” field (this can be adjusted at a later time, default: 1) (see [[Create Map#Moving an Influence or Link Location on a Map|Moving an Influence or Link Location on a Map]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Define the location of the Link vertically in the “Y Coordinate” field (this can be adjusted at a later time, default: 1) (see [[Create Map#Moving an Influence or Link Location on a Map|Moving an Influence or Link Location on a Map]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select the type of link for the link layer in the “Link Type” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>If URL, enter URL into the text box</li>
<li>If data Series, select the corresponding data series from the drop-down menu or create a new data series record by clicking the star button (see [[Create a Data Series#Creating a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>If graph, select the corresponding graph from the drop-down menu or create a new graph record by clicking on the star button (see [[Create Graph#Creating a Graph|Creating a Graph]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>If hardware, select the corresponding hardware from the drop-down menu or create a new hardware record by clicking on the star button (see [[Create a Site#Creating Hardware|Creating Hardware]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>If LiveTile, select the corresponding LiveTile from the drop-down menu or create a new LiveTile record by clicking on the star button (see [[Create LiveTile#Creating a LiveTile|Creating a LiveTile]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>If Map, select the corresponding Map from the drop-down menu or create a new Map record by clicking on the star button (see [[Create Map#Creating a Map|Creating a Map]] section for instructions) </li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
<li>You have just successfully added a link to the specified layer.</li>
<li>To add your new layer to a map, see section [[Create Map#Applying a Layer to a Map|Applying a Layer to a Map]] for instructions </li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Number Format Template==
A number format template takes a raw number value and changes it into usable and contextual metrics. One would typically use this when formatting from Amps to kW or a whole number to a dollar amount or percentage, but it is not limited to that. You will need to gather the following information to create a number format template:
*Name of the number format template you wish to create
*Specified type of number format template; either simple, currency, or java decimal pattern
[[File:Number Format Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Number Format Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and select the button called “Number Format Templates” this will open a new tab titled “Number Format Templates”</li>
<li>Within the number format templates tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Number Format Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the number format template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Fahrenheit (rounded), Percent, kWh, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the number format template in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the type of number format template in the “Type” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>If “Simple” type, define Prefix and Suffix</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Prefix: $, etc.</li>
<li>Suffix: kW, Amps, Tons, Months</li>
</ol>
<li>If “Currency” type, choose “Locale” from the drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Default: en_US</li>
</ol>
<li>If “Java Decimal Pattern” type, enter the pattern in the “Pattern” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>To create a number with a single value after the decimal, you would enter: ##.#</li>
</ol>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Payment==
A payment record, referring to the payment for any asset, is a way to track a payment for a specific device and when/who the payment goes to through the LiveDC platform. You will need to gather the following information before you create a payment record:
*Date of the payment
*Amount to be paid
*How you will be paying the payment (see [[#Creating a Payment Type|Creating a Payment Type]] for instructions)
*Who the payment is paid by (see [[#Creating a Business Unit|Creating a Business Unit]] for instructions)
*Who the payment is paid to (see [[#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] for instructions)
[[File:Payment.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Enter the date of when the payment for the hardware is to be paid in the “Date” field</li>
<li>Enter the amount of the payment in the “Amount” field</li>
<li>Select the type of payment in the “Type” drop-down menu or create a new “Payment Type” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Payment Type|Creating a Payment Type]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select who will be making the payment in the “Paid By” drop-down menu or create a new “Paid By” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Business Unit|Creating a Business Unit]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select to whom the payment is going to in the “Paid To” drop-down menu or create a new “Paid To” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Add tags to the payment in the section titled “Tags” by selecting from the drop down menu and clicking the left-hand facing arrow or create a new “Tag” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating Tags|Creating Tags]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the payment in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Payment Type==
A payment type is defining the mode of how the payment is paid. Whether that be a check or automatic deposit, it’s the way to define how you are paying for an asset within the LiveDC platform.
[[File:Payment Type.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Payment Type” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Payment Types” this will open a new tab titled “Payment types”</li>
<li>Within the payment types tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Payment Type.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the payment type in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the payment type in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Physical Disk==
A physical disk is used to store all server data. LiveDC provides an avenue of tracking these disks for each piece of hardware. It is valuable to track each disk for the purposes of asset management.

[[File:Physical Disk.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Enter the amount of physical disks of the hardware in the “Quantity” field</li>
<li>Enter the amount of capacity the physical disk has in the “Capacity in GB” field</li>
<li>Select the physical disk RAID that is utilized by the hardware in the “RAID” drop-down menu or create a new “Physical Disk RAID” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Physical Disk RAID|Creating a Physical Disk RAID]] section for instructions) </li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the physical disk RAID in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: Disk Controller</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the physical disk RAID in the “Details” field</li>
</ol>
<li>Select the physical disk speed that is utilized by the hardware in the “Speed” drop-down menu or create a new “Physical Disk Speed” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Physical Disk Speed|Creating a Physical Disk Speed]] section for instructions)</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the physical disk speed in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the physical disk speed in the “Details” field</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug==
The LiveDC platform provides a means of tracking power plugs for each piece of hardware. This is valuable from the standpoint of tracking single and dual corded devices. You will need to gather the following information before creating a power plug:
*Number of power plugs for the specific piece of hardware
*Type of power plug
*Observed wattage
*Estimated wattage
*Amount of wattage displayed on the nameplate of the hardware
*Amount of ampere
*Backup source of the hardware
*What circuit the hardware is linked back to
*Amount of voltage for the hardware
[[File:Power Plug.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>In the window titled “Creating Hardware”, enter the amount of Power Plugs for the piece of hardware in the “Quantity” field</li>
<li>Select the type of power plug in the “Plug Type” drop-down menu or create a new “Plug Type” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Power Plug Type|Creating a Power Plug Type]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Enter the amount of watts observed in the “Observed Watts” field)</li>
<li>Enter the amount of watts estimated in the “Estimated Watts” field</li>
<li>Enter the amount of watts on the nameplate of the hardware in the “Nameplate Watts” field</li>
<li>Select an ampere for the power plug in the “Ampere” drop-down menu or create a new “Ampere” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Power Plug Ampere|Creating a Power Plug Ampere]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select a backup source for the power plug in the “Backup Source” drop-down menu or create a new “Backup Source” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Power Plug Backup Source|Creating a Power Plug Backup Source]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select a power circuit for the power plug in the “Circuit” drop-down menu or create a new “Circuit” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Power Plug Circuit|Creating a Power Plug Circuit]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select a voltage for the power plug in the “Voltage” drop-down menu or create a new “Voltage” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Power Plug Voltage|Creating a Power Plug Voltage]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug Ampere==
LiveDC tracks the amperage that is produced in each power plug. Tracking such information is useful for estimating power usage throughout your data center.

[[File:Power Plug Ampere.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Power Plug Ampere” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Power Plug Amperes” this will open a new tab titled “Power Plug Amperes”</li>
<li>Within the power plug amperes tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Power Plug Amperes.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the power plug ampere in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the power plug ampere in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug Backup Source==
Tracking the backup source related to each power plug for hardware is important information to have on hand in the case of a power failure or outage. LiveDC will track the backup power source for each piece of hardware located in your data center.
[[File:Power Plug Backup.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Power Plug Backup Source” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Power Plug Backup Sources” this will open a new tab titled “Power Plug Backup Sources”</li>
<li>Within the power plug backup sources tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Power Plug Backup Source.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the power plug backup source in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the power plug backup source in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug Circuit==
LiveDC can track which specific circuit breaker(s) a piece of hardware is connected to. This sort of information is valuable to know for proactively managing scheduled maintenance and powering down hardware.
[[File:Power Plug Circuit.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Power Plug Circuit” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Power Plug Circuits” this will open a new tab titled “Power Plug Circuits”</li>
<li>Within the power plug circuits tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Power Plug Circuits.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the power plug circuit in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the power plug circuit in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug Type==
In LiveDC, the type of power plug that is used can be tied back to a specific piece of hardware. We track this information to help identify how many plugs of each type are available in each rack and how many are used.
[[File:Power Plug Type.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Power Plug Type” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click called “Power Plug Types” this will open a new tab titled “Power Plug Types”</li>
<li>Within the power plug types tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Power Plug Type.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the power plug type in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the power plug type in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug Voltage==
Tracking voltage, utilizing the LiveDC platform, is a simple and valuable operation. By entering the voltage information about a specific piece of hardware, you are able to plan for power usage and estimate monthly costs surrounding a single device or many devices.

[[File:Power Plug Voltage.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Power Plug Voltage” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Power Plug Voltages” this will open a new tab titled “Power Plug Voltages”</li>
<li>In the power plug voltages tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Power Plug Voltage.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the power plug voltage in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the power plug voltage in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Product==
LiveDC utilizes a parent-child relationship for creating and tracking products. Products tie directly to assets in your data center and make the search function of LiveDC a valuable means of accessing and analyzing your information. You will need to gather the following information before creating a product:
*Manufacturer of the product
*Category of the product
*Model of the product
*Model number of the product
*Generation of the product
[[File:Create Product.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Product” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Products” this will open a new tab titled “Product”</li>
<li>Within the products tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Product” or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, basic tab in the “Product” section, click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the manufacturer name of the product in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Dell, Oracle, EMC, HP, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the manufacturer name of the product in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the products tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, basic tab, “Product” section, click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the category name of the product in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Server, Storage, Network, or Infrastructure</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the category name of the product in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the manufacturer in the “Parent Product” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Dell, Oracle, EMC, HP, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the products tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, basic tab, “Product” section, click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the model name of the product in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: ProLiant, PowerEdge, SunFire, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the model name of the product in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the “Manufacturer – Category” in the “Parent Product” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Dell-Server</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the products tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, basic tab, “Product” section, click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the model number name of the product in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: DL385, 2900, X4250, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the model number name of the product in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the “Manufacturer – Category – Model” in the “Parent Product” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Dell-Server-ProLiant</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the products tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, basic tab, “Product” section, click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the generation / version name of the product in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: G5, V2, 7.1, etc</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the qualifier name of the product in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the “Manufacturer – Category – Model – Model Number” in the “Parent Product” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: Dell-Server-Proliant-DL385</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>You can create as many levels of information as needed, but the 5 levels we have just described seem to cover almost all instances of product tracking</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a SAN Connection==
A SAN (Storage Area Network) connection can be tracked within the LiveDC platform. Tracking this information in LiveDC is valuable, for storage devices especially, to provide an understanding of which SAN fabrics a device is connected to and to determine if there is redundancy. You will need to gather the following information before creating a SAN connection record:
*Number of connections the hardware has
*Name of the SAN
*Amount of capacity in GB of the SAN connection
[[File:SAN Connection.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Enter the amount of SAN connections the hardware obtains in the “Number of Connections” field</li>
<li>Select the SAN in the “SAN” drop-down menu or create a new “SAN” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a SAN|Creating a SAN]] for instructions)</li>
<li>Enter the amount of capacity the SAN connection has in the “Capacity in GB” field</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a SAN==
The SAN (Storage Area Network) is used primarily with storage devices. Tracking this information in LiveDC is valuable, for storage devices especially, to provide an understanding of which SAN fabrics a device is connected to and to determine if there is redundancy between SANs.

[[File:Create SAN.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create SAN” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “SANs” this will open a new tab titled “SANs”</li>
<li>Within the SANs tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create SAN.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the SAN in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: SAN A, SAN B, Storage SAN, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the SAN in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating Service Infos==
LiveDC tracks what and who will perform service on each piece of hardware through the service infos section. This information is valuable to track for knowing who to contact in the case of scheduled maintenance, an outage, or failure. You will need to gather the following information before creating a service info record:
*Name of the provider (See [[#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] for instructions)
*Type of service that the provider performs
*Start date of the service for the hardware
*End date of the service for the hardware
*Discount program of the service (See [[#Creating a Discount Program|Creating a Discount Program]] for instructions)
*Amount of base monthly cost for the service
[[File:Service Info.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Select the company that does the service for the hardware in the “Provider” drop-down menu or create a new “Company” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select the type of service the company provides for that hardware in the “Service Type” drop-down menu</li>
<li>Select a beginning date of the service in the “Start Date” field</li>
<li>Select an ending date of the service in the “Stop Date” field</li>
<li>Select a discount program for the company in the “Discount Program” drop-down menu or create a new “Discount Program” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Discount Program|Creating a Discount Program]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Enter a monthly cost in the “Base Monthly Cost” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the service in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Service Tier==
In the LiveDC platform, you can track both the requested and actual service tier associated with each piece of hardware. This information is valuable to have when considering recovery times and planning for outages and failures.

[[File:Service Tier.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Service Tier” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Service Tiers” this will open a new tab titled “Service Tiers”</li>
<li>Within the service tiers tab, in the upper left-hand corner click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Service Tier.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the service tier in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Tier 1, Tier 2, Tier 3, Tier 4, etc. </li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the service tier in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Shape==
Shapes in LiveDC refer to the boundaries for an influence that are placed on maps. The shapes for an influence can be either a square or a circle, but can be manipulated to represent different sizes for cabinets, PDUs, UPS equipment, etc. A color will fill the shape when it is corresponded to a legend on the map. You will need to gather the following information before creating a shape:
*Name of the shape you wish to create
*Which basic shape you are wishing to create, circle or square
*Pixel height of the shape
*Scale width of the shape you are creating
*Degrees of rotation of the shape
*Disregard the last 4 items (fill color, fill transparency, border pixels, border color) as they have no impact on the shape at the current time, they are placeholders for future functionality

[[File:Shape.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Shape” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Shapes” this will open a new tab titled “Shapes”</li>
<li>Within the shapes tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Shape.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the shape in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Cabinet, Standard Humidity Return, Standard Temperature, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the shape in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select what kind of shape to create in the “Basic Shape” drop-down menu</li>
<li>Define the height of the shape in the “Pixel Height” field</li>
<li>Enter a value for the width in the “Scale Width” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>This value is in relation to the height, so if you wanted a square that was 10 high x 20 wide, you would enter 10 for height and 2 for scale width</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter a value of rotation for the shape in the “Rotation Degrees” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>This would be used if you wanted to represent a diamond, you would create a square and rotate it 90 degrees</li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a SNMP V1 Template==
An SNMP V1 template is a set of rules for Elicit to follow to collect data points from an asset. Utilizing a web address, read community string, and an OID, Elicit will gather information using these instructions and populate data series for use in maps, LiveTiles, and/or graphs. You will need to gather the following information to create an SNMP V1 template:
*Name of the SNMP V1 template you wish to create
*IP address or URL for Elicit to communicate with
*Specified read community string: default is public
*Specific OID for the piece of information you are trying to gather
*The regular expression to tell Elicit which data you are specifically looking for
*An adjustment expression for the data being returned to the LiveDC platform
*Specific invalid raw values that are typically returned, which can be excluded. Some sensors return a 0 when in error state.

[[File:SNMP V1 Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create SNMP V1 Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “SNMP V1 Templates” this will open a new tab titled “SNMP V1 Templates”</li>
<li>Within the SNMP V1 templates tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create SNMP V1 Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the SNMP V1 template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Chatsworth Humidity (Port 1), Chatsworth Power % 30A (Phase XY), etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the SNMP V1 template in the “Details” field</li>
<li>The parameter format can be left as is and provides a way for you to specify what values you need to enter and what the label should be in the pop-up screen</li>
<li>Enter the Internet Protocol Address in the “Address” field using the defined parameter format</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: { {Address} }</li>
<li>This will prompt the user to enter the specific IP address each time</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter the community string in the “Read Community String” field using the defined parameter format</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>If standard across the organization, you can enter it here and not have to enter it again when creating a data series</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter the object identification number in the “Object Identifier OID” field using the defined parameter format</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Usually very specific for a type of power strip and can be entered here once and used for all power strips of that type</li>
<li>Example: 1.3.6.1.4.1.319.1.2.1.0</li>
</ol>
<li>Define the regular expression in the “Regular Expression” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Leave blank as it is not really leveraged at this time</li>
</ol>
<li>Define the adjustment expression in the “Adjustment Expression” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>This will take the raw value received via SNMP and perform an adjustment on that before sending the database for data normalization</li>
<li>Example: Raw/100</li>
</ol>
<li>Add any raw values that are invalid in the “Invalid Raw Values” field and click the left-hand facing arrow, if applicable</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating Tags==
Tags are what connects almost everything together in LiveDC. Giving a record a tag is very valuable for tracking purposes. Objects with tags are easily found using LiveDC's robust search function. Tags can be used to define location, category of product, type of metric in a data series, client specific tags, or anything else for that matter.

[[File:Tag.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Tag” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Tags” this will open a new tab titled “Tags”</li>
<li>Within the Tags tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Tag.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the tag in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: A Side, Row 10, Server, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the Tag in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Timing Template==
Data series utilize timing templates to tell Elicit how often to collect data from a device. The templates can be configured from polling once every minute to once every month, depending on how important the data is to the end-user.

[[File:Timing Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Timing Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Timing Templates” this will open a new tab titled “Timing Templates”</li>
<li>Within the timing templates tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Timing Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the timing template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: 1 minute, 1 hour, 15 minute, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the timing template in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Define how often the desired poll will take place in the “Poll Period” field</li>
<li>Define how often the desired warning period will last in the “Warning Period” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>This warning period will provide alerts if a data series has not communicated within the specified interval</li>
</ol>
<li>Define when, if at all, the poll will expire in the “Expire Period” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>This expire period will provide alerts if a data series has not communicated within the specified interval and will expire the reading so that it does not show up on maps</li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Trend Template==
A trend template tells Elicit to create a data series based upon the data that is in a separate data series. The new data series is created by choosing either the average, maximum, median, minimum, or sum of the data series being polled.

[[File:Trend Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Trend Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Trend Templates” this will open a new tab titled “Trend Templates”</li>
<li>Within the trend templates tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Trend Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the trend template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Past 3 Months, Past Day, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the trend template in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select what “Operation” you would like to perform on the data from the drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Average, Count, Maximum, Minimum, Median, Sum</li>
</ol>
<li>Define time period in which you would like the data to trend in the “Time Period” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: 30 Days, 1 Month, 24 Hours</li>
</ol>
<li>Snap to Date</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Leave as red x if you do not want to “reset” after each time period (selected in step D)</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>For example if you set the time period to 1 month, this template would include values since the same day during the previous month</li>
<li>Using these options, calculating a trend on the 13th of this month would include values from the 13th of the previous month through the 13th of this month</li>
</ol>
<li>Change to a green check mark if you want to “reset” after each time period (selected in step D)</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>For example if you set the time period to 1 month, this template would “reset” after each month</li>
<li>A Data Series with a Derived Data Start Date of July 1st, 2014 that uses this Trend Template with a 1 Month period and Snap to Date would “reset” on the first of each following month</li>
<li>Using these options, calculating a trend on the 13th of this month would include values from the 1st of this month through the 13th of this month</li>
</ol>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Uploading an Image==
Uploading an image provides flexibility for the user to customize maps specific to one’s data center. Maps are not limited to just a floor plan though, you can upload virtually any image to construct a map that will depict your data.

[[File:Upload Image.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Uploaded Images” this will open a new tab titled “Upload Images”</li>
<li>Within the uploaded images tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Uploaded Image.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the uploaded image in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: DC Room 1, Storage, POD 2, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Choose the file that to upload in the “Image File” section</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the uploaded image in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a URL Scrape Template==
A URL scrape template provides an avenue for Elicit to collect data from a specific web page (a web page with no login requirements). This is valuable for collecting data off of the web for many different reasons. Typically the data series created are based upon intelligent assets in the data center that have a web server serving up an HTTP page. You will need to gather the following information prior to creating a URL scrape template:
*Name of the URL scrape template
*Specific URL you intend to collect the data from
*Regular expression to tell Elicit where to look within all the text on the web page
*Adjustment expression, if you want to format the data as it enters the LiveDC platform
*Any invalid raw values you do not wish to use in the data series

[[File:URL Scrape Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create URL Scrape Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “URL Scrape Templates” this will open a new tab titled “URL Scrape Templates”</li>
<li>Within the URL Scrape Templates tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create URL Scrape Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the URL scrape template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: C:\ Drive, Configuration File Collection, CPU, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the URL scrape template in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Define the format for the parameters of the URL scrape template in the “Parameter Format” fields</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: {{ }}</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter the URL that will be used to gather the data in the “URL Scrape Template” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: File:///c|public/{ {hostname} }{ {counter} }.txt</li>
</ol>
<li>Define the regular expression in the “Regular Expression” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: =(\d*)</li>
</ol>
<li>Define the adjustment expression in the “Adjustment Expression” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: 100-raw</li>
</ol>
<li>Add any raw values that are invalid in the “Invalid Raw Values” field and click the left-hand facing arrow, if applicable</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Virtual Machine Datacenter==
Since there is no physical location to put a virtual machine, creating a virtual machine datacenter is the solution. This is the place for virtual machines to reside. It ties the virtual machine to a logical location for tracking purposes.

[[File:Virtual Machine Data Center.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Virtual Machine” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Virtual Machine Datacenters” this will open a new tab titled “Virtual Machine Datacenters”</li>
<li>Within the Virtual Machine Datacenters tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Virtual Machine Datacenter.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the virtual machine datacenter in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: Virtual Room 1</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the virtual machine datacenter in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Importing from a File==
Importing from a file is the mode of entering large amounts of data records into LiveDC at one time. There is a learning curve to this process, but once this skill is acquired it becomes very useful. Essentially, the user is inputting all of their data records in at the same time and letting LiveDC do the heavy lifting and analysis. Importing from a file is used all across the LiveDC platform, where mostly everything in the software can be imported in a bulk format. You will need to gather the following information prior to importing a file:
*Asset specific information
*Location and physical dimension information regarding the asset
*Data series specific information
*Visual specific information

[[File:Import from File.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and select the button called “Import from File…” this will open a new window titled “Import from File”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Click the “Browse” button to select the document to import into LiveDC</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Once the file is selected, you will have the option to perform analysis on the imported data before committing that information to the database</li>
<li>This helps prevent errors and will give you the results back to ensure all values are correct before actually importing the data</li>
</ol>
<li>To perform an analysis on the document, check the box titled “Perform Analysis Only” to green check mark</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Once you have validated that there are no errors and the data looks correct (denoted by performing analysis and getting all green highlighted columns back in the results spreadsheet)</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Green means you are good to go, there are no errors found</li>
<li>Yellow means warning, something has been updated but you are still ok to upload</li>
<li>Red means error, this item will not be imported into LiveDC</li>
<li>No color or white means that that item is already in the software and there are no changes to it</li>
</ol>
<li>To actually import the file and commit the data into LiveDC, check the box titled “Perform Analysis Only” to change it to the red X</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Import”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Graph Line==
[[File:Graph Line.PNG]]
===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Enter the following information in the “Create Graph Line” window </li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the line in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Physical Servers, Average Temperature, Historical Power, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter a name for the legend of this line in the “Legend Label” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Historical, Max Temp, Physical Servers, etc.</li>
<li>This will appear in the bottom of the graph window</li>
</ol>
<li>Select a color for the graph line in the “Color” section</li>
<li>Select the data series that will provide the data for the graph line in the drop-down menu or create a new data series record by clicking the star button (See [[Create a Data Series#Creating a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Add a futures line to show how the graph line could change in the future by clicking the star button to create a new “Futures” record </li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Enter the name of the graph line future in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Example: 2.5%</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter a label for the legend in the “Legend Label” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Example: 2.5%</li>
</ol>
<li>Define the period of time the graph will extend into the future in the “Time Period” section</li>
<li>Enter the amount of future graph lines to come from the historical data in the “Number Per Period” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Example: 1 Month</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter a formula for the future graph line in the “Formula” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Example: prev*1.05</li>
</ol>
<li>Define a color for the future graph line in the “Color” field</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Add” on the “Create Graph Line” window</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Physical Disk RAID==
A physical disk RAID is a redundant array of independent disks. LiveDC provides an avenue for tracking these disks for each piece of hardware. It is valuable to track each disk for the purposes of asset management.

[[File:Physical Disk RAID.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>In the “Create Physical Disk RAID” window enter the following:</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the physical disk RAID in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: Disk Controller</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the physical disk RAID in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Physical Disk Speed==
LiveDC provides an avenue for tracking these disks for each piece of hardware. It is valuable to track each disk speed for the purposes of asset management.

[[File:Physical Disk Speed.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>In the “Create Physical Disk Speed” window enter the following:</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the physical disk speed in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the physical disk speed in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Exporting a File==
[[File:Export.PNG]]
===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left side), click the desired tab to export records from. To find specific records, utilize LiveDC's robust Search feature (See [[Using LiveDC Search#How to Use Search|How to Use Search]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Once the desired records are in a list format on the screen, click “Export” in the top right corner of the screen</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>A small window titled “Confirm Export” will appear</li>
<li>Click "Export"</li>
<li>LiveDC will compile an Excel spreadsheet of the desired records (these records can be used for the mass import format as a template for what data needs to be entered before importing)</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>To import new records (See [[#Importing from a File|Importing from a File]] section for instructions)</li>
</ol>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Adding a Floor Plan to a Map==
===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>First you need to upload a PNG floor plan into LiveDC (See [[#Uploading an Image|Uploading an Image]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>Once the floor plan is uploaded into LiveDC, On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Layers” this will open a new tab titled “Layers”</li>
<li>Within the layers tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Layer.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the layer in the "Name" Field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Server Room Floor Plan, Data Center Floor Plan</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter additional information about the layer in the "Details" field</li>
<li>For a floor plan layer, we will select "Image" in the "Layer Type" drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>In the drop-down list find the floor plan image you uploaded in step 1</li>
<li>Select "center" from the "Placement" drop-down menu</li>
[[File:Image Layer.JPG]]
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
<li>Next we need to create a Solid Background layer for the map</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Again, in the upper left-hand corner click "Create"</li>
<li>Enter the name of the layer in the "Name" Field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Solid Background</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter additional information about the layer in the "Details" field</li>
<li>For a solid background layer, we will select "Solid" in the "Layer Type" drop-down menu</li>
<li>Select the color you want the background to be</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>We like to use #808080</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter the Transparency Percent</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>We usually do 0%</li>
[[File:Solid Layer.JPG]]
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Visuals” and click “Maps” this will open a new tab titled “Maps”</li>
<li>Within the maps tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Map.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the map in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Operational Model – Cooling, Power %, Operational Cost per Cabinet, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the map in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Define a horizontal size in pixels for the map in the “Width” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>A good rule of thumb is to look at the properties of the image and use those predefined dimensions (usually no more than 1650 pixels)</li>
</ol>
<li>Define a vertical size in pixels for the map in the “Height” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>A good rule of thumb is to look at the properties of the image and use those predefined dimensions (usually no more than 1300 pixels)</li>
</ol>
<li>Add a legend to the map in the section titled “Legends” by selecting from the drop down menu and clicking the left-hand facing arrow or create a new “Legend” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Legend|Creating a Legend]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>In the Map Layers section, click the star button</li>
<li>Select the "Solid Background" layer from the drop-down list</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Change the red x to a green check mark for "Show Dots" and "Show Values"</li>
<li>Do not change line color, text color, background color or background transparency percent</li>
[[File:Solid Map Layer.JPG]]
<li>Click "Add"</li>
</ol>
<li>Again, click the star button in the Map Layers section</li>
<li>Select the floor plan layer you created above from the drop-down list</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Change the red x to a green check mark for "Show Dots"</li>
<li>Do not change line color, text color, background color or background transparency percent</li>
[[File:Floor plan map layer.JPG]]
<li>Click "Add"</li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
<li>You have now created a Map with a floor plan. You will need to add additional layers to the map to see data. (See [[Map#Creating a Map|Creating a Map]] section for instructions)</li>
</ol>
</ol>

The LiveDC Experience

2015-07-30T22:54:43Z

Khackenmiller:

__NOEDITSECTION__
__NOTOC__

==Internet Browser Information==
The recommended browsers for LiveDC are: Google Chrome, Mozilla Firefox or Safari. Internet Explorer (IE) 9, 10 and 11 are not recommended but will allow completion of most tasks within the platform. If you are using IE we recommend you install the add-on “Chrome Frame”, which will allow IE to interpret the page similar to the way Google Chrome does.

The documentation / steps outlined in this wiki were written using Google Chrome.

==Recent News==
'''New Capability Release:''' [http://www.ncompass-inc.com/2014/new-livedc-capability-link-layers/ N'compass Announces New LiveDC Capability - Link Layers]

'''News Release:''' [http://www.ncompass-inc.com/2014/ncompass-introduces-new-livedc-user-experience/ N'compass Introduces New LiveDC User Experience]

{|border="0" cellspacing="12" cellpadding-left="20"| style="text-align: left;"
|
= [[Get Started]] =
|

= [[Setup LiveDC]] =
|-
|
====Learn basic LiveDC concepts and terminology ====
* [[Product_Overview|LiveDC Overview]]
* [[Video Tutorials]]
* [[Extras|Extras]]
* [[Glossary of Terms|Glossary]]
* [https://livedc.ncompass-inc.com/ LiveDC Log-In Page]
----
| |
==== Setting up and configuring LiveDC ====
* [[Configure Elicit]]
* [[Change Password]]
* [[New User]]
* [[Forgot Password]]
* [[Password Security]]

----
|-
|
= [[Analyze]] =
|
= [[Visualize]] =
|-
|
==== Create and analyze data within LiveDC ====
*[[Create a Data Series|Create Data Series]]
*[[Create a Site|Create a Site]]
*[[Creating and Use Notifications|Notifications]]
*[[Using LiveDC Search|Search]]

----
| |
==== Developing and viewing your data in LiveDC ====
*[[LiveTile]]
*[[Graph]]
*[[Map]]
*[[LiveView Interface]]

----
| |

|}

The LiveDC Experience

2015-06-25T15:41:21Z

Khackenmiller:

__NOEDITSECTION__
__NOTOC__

==Internet Browser Information==
The recommended browsers for LiveDC are: Google Chrome, Mozilla Firefox or Safari. Internet Explorer (IE) 9, 10 and 11 are not recommended but will allow completion of most tasks within the platform. If you are using IE we recommend you install the add-on “Chrome Frame”, which will allow IE to interpret the page similar to the way Google Chrome does.

The documentation / steps outlined in this wiki were written using Google Chrome.

==Recent News==
'''New Capability Release:''' [http://www.ncompass-inc.com/2014/new-livedc-capability-link-layers/ N'compass Announces New LiveDC Capability - Link Layers]

'''News Release:''' [http://www.ncompass-inc.com/2014/ncompass-introduces-new-livedc-user-experience/ N'compass Introduces New LiveDC User Experience]

{|border="0" cellspacing="12" cellpadding-left="20"| style="text-align: left;"
|
= [[Get Started]] =
|

= [[Setup LiveDC]] =
|-
|
====Learn basic LiveDC concepts and terminology ====
* [[Product_Overview|LiveDC Overview]]
* [[Video Tutorials]]
* [[Extras|Extras]]
* [[Glossary of Terms|Glossary]]
* [https://livedc.ncompass-inc.com/LiveDC/ui-choice.html/ LiveDC Log-In Page]
----
| |
==== Setting up and configuring LiveDC ====
* [[Configure Elicit]]
* [[Change Password]]
* [[New User]]
* [[Forgot Password]]
* [[Password Security]]

----
|-
|
= [[Analyze]] =
|
= [[Visualize]] =
|-
|
==== Create and analyze data within LiveDC ====
*[[Create a Data Series|Create Data Series]]
*[[Create a Site|Create a Site]]
*[[Creating and Use Notifications|Notifications]]
*[[Using LiveDC Search|Search]]

----
| |
==== Developing and viewing your data in LiveDC ====
*[[LiveTile]]
*[[Graph]]
*[[Map]]
*[[LiveView Interface]]

----
| |

|}

The LiveDC Experience

2015-06-25T15:33:59Z

Khackenmiller:

__NOEDITSECTION__
__NOTOC__

==Internet Browser Information==
The recommended browsers for LiveDC are: Google Chrome, Mozilla Firefox or Safari. Internet Explorer (IE) 9, 10 and 11 are not recommended but will allow completion of most tasks within the platform. If you are using IE we recommend you install the add-on “Chrome Frame”, which will allow IE to interpret the page similar to the way Google Chrome does.

The documentation / steps outlined in this wiki were written using Google Chrome.

==Recent News==
'''New Capability Release:''' [http://www.ncompass-inc.com/2014/new-livedc-capability-link-layers/ N'compass Announces New LiveDC Capability - Link Layers]

'''News Release:''' [http://www.ncompass-inc.com/2014/ncompass-introduces-new-livedc-user-experience/ N'compass Introduces New LiveDC User Experience]

{|border="0" cellspacing="12" cellpadding-left="20"| style="text-align: left;"
|
= [[Get Started]] =
|

= [[Setup LiveDC]] =
|-
|
====Learn basic LiveDC concepts and terminology ====
* [[Product_Overview|LiveDC Overview]]
* [[Video Tutorials]]
* [[Extras|Extras]]
* [[Glossary of Terms|Glossary]]

----
| |
==== Setting up and configuring LiveDC ====
* [[Configure Elicit]]
* [[Change Password]]
* [[New User]]
* [[Forgot Password]]
* [[Password Security]]

----
|-
|
= [[Analyze]] =
|
= [[Visualize]] =
|-
|
==== Create and analyze data within LiveDC ====
*[[Create a Data Series|Create Data Series]]
*[[Create a Site|Create a Site]]
*[[Creating and Use Notifications|Notifications]]
*[[Using LiveDC Search|Search]]

----
| |
==== Developing and viewing your data in LiveDC ====
*[[LiveTile]]
*[[Graph]]
*[[Map]]
*[[LiveView Interface]]

----
| |

|}

Password Security

2015-06-25T15:33:16Z

Khackenmiller:

All too often passwords are exposed. As such, we recently implemented additional security features around passwords to keep your account safe.

<ol>
<li>'''Incorrect Password Lockout:'''If a user enters the wrong password 5 consecutive times within a 60 minute period, their user account will be locked for 60 minutes. Once the user account is locked, the user will be sent an email that will have a link that they can click on to unlock their user account.</li>
<li>'''Password Change Requirement:'''Each company account within LIVE has a setting to determine how often a user must change their password. All accounts are defaulted to zero, indicating the feature is disabled. When enabled, if the user hasn’t changed their password within the required number of days, they won’t be able to connect to the account until they use the [[Change Password]] functionality to update their password. Below are instructions on how to enable this feature (you must be an Admin on your company account to make changes to this feature):</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>In Live Control in the upper right hand corner click “ Account Summary”</li>
<li>Click “View” next to the company account</li>
<li>Click “Edit” in the pop-up window</li>
<li>Enter the number of days you want to require the users to change their passwords</li>
<li>Click “Save”</li>
</ol>
<li>'''Password Complexity Requirements:'''Users now need to have a password that meets the following requirements (Existing passwords will still work, these new requirements will apply when the user changes their password):</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>At least 10 characters long</li>
<li>Need to use at least 3 types of characters:</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Uppercase letter(s)</li>
<li>Lowercase letter(s)</li>
<li>Number</li>
<li>Special symbols ($%&*)</li>
</ol>
</ol>
</ol>

Password Security

2015-06-25T15:31:55Z

Khackenmiller:

Password Security

2015-06-25T15:28:58Z

Khackenmiller:

Password Security

2015-06-25T15:26:18Z

Khackenmiller: Created page with "All too often passwords are exposed. As such, we recently implemented additional security features around passwords to keep your account safe. <ol>"

All too often passwords are exposed. As such, we recently implemented additional security features around passwords to keep your account safe.

<ol>

Map

2015-04-30T19:51:59Z

Khackenmiller:

__TOC__

==Creating a Map==
A map is a customizable representation of data where individual values contained in the visual are shown by colors. Fed by data series, a map can show many different types of data, such as power usage, temperature, humidity, etc. A map does not just need to be an image of your data center, you can place an influence on any transparent image uploaded into LiveDC. You will need to gather the following information prior to creating a map:
*Name of the map
*Width in pixels of the map (determined by looking at the properties of the image)
*Height in pixels of the map (determined by looking at the properties of the image)
*The legend that corresponds with the map (Temp, Humidity, Power, Cost, etc.)
**This is the representative color scale you see at the bottom of each map
*The layers that will make up your map (solid background, influences layer, transparent floor layout, etc.)
**Most maps are made of those three (3) layers
**A good way to make your floor layout transparent is to use an open source program called GIMP, which can be downloaded from the web
***Import the floor layout into GIMP
***Change all colors to “Gray scale” by selecting mode under the image menu
***Create a black border for the floor layout using the selection tool under the tools menu in GIMP
***Select ‘Color to Alpha’ from the colors menu to change the selected area into a transparent part of the image
***Export the image as a .PNG file and save to your preferred location
***Import the PNG file into LiveDC utilizing the “Uploaded Images” feature (see “Uploading an Image” for more information)
[[File:Heatmap.png]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Visuals” and click “Maps” this will open a new tab titled “Maps”</li>
<li>Within the maps tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Map.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the map in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Operational Model – Cooling, Power %, Operational Cost per Cabinet, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the map in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Define a horizontal size in pixels for the map in the “Width” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>A good rule of thumb is to look at the properties of the image and use those predefined dimensions (usually no more than 1650 pixels)</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>If you have an image larger than that, you can scale the image down to a smaller size before importing</li>
[[File:Map-Properties.png]]
</ol>
</ol>
<li>Define a vertical size in pixels for the map in the “Height” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>A good rule of thumb is to look at the properties of the image and use those predefined dimensions (usually no more than 1300 pixels)</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>If you have an image larger than that, you can scale the image down to a smaller size before importing</li>
[[File:Map-Properties-Height.png]]
</ol>
</ol>
<li>Add a legend to the map in the section titled “Legends” by selecting from the drop down menu and clicking the left-hand facing arrow or create a new “Legend” record by clicking the star button (see [[Extras#Creating a Legend|Creating a Legend]] section for instructions)</li>
[[File:Legend.png]]
<li>Add layers to the map in the section titled “Layers” by clicking of the star button and selecting from the drop-down list or create a new “Layer” record by clicking the star button (see [[Extras#Creating a Layer|Creating a Layer]] section for instructions)</li>
[[File:Layer.png]]
<li>Click “Create”</li>
<li>The next step is to add a data series/influence to the map (see [[Extras#Creating an Influence|Creating an Influence]] section for instructions)</li>
[[File:Heatmap-influence.png]]
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Moving an Influence or Link Location on a Map==

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Visuals” and click “Maps” this will open a new tab titled “Maps”</li>
<li>Highlight the desired map that you want to view from the map list and click "Generate"</li>
[[File:Map-Generate.PNG]]
<li>Click near or on the influence/link desired to move, this will open a window titled “Items Near (specific X,Y coordinate)"</li>
[[File:Items-near-x,y.png]]
<ol type="a">
<li>From the list, find the influence/link that you want move</li>
<li>Click the cross-hair button next to that item</li>
[[File:Cross-hair.png]]
<li>Adjust the x and y coordinates by using the arrows,entering a number, or by clicking where you want to place it</li>
[[File:Map-Move.PNG]]
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Applying a Layer to a Map==

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Visuals” and click “Maps” this will open a new tab titled “Maps”</li>
<li>Select the desired map you want to place a layer on from the maps list and click "Edit". This will open a new window titled "Edit Map".</li>
[[File:Edit-Map.png]]
<li>In the map layers section, click the star button, and select a layer from the drop-down menu or create a new layer record by clicking on the star button (see [[Extras#Creating a Layer|Creating a Layer]] section for instructions)</li>
[[File:Map-Layers.png]]
<li>Adjust the red x’s to green check marks for attributes you want to display on the map for this layer (these attributes can be adjusted when viewing the map and will be the defaults for viewing each time this map is generated) (see [[#Customize Display Options When Viewing a Map|Customize Display Options When Viewing a Map]] section for instructions)</li>
[[File:Attributes.png]]
<li>Adjust the line, text and background color for this layer </li>
<li>Adjust the transparency percentage for this layer</li>
<li>Click "Add"</li>
<li>Click "Save"</li>
</ol>
 

==Customize Display Options When Viewing a Map==

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Visuals” and click “Maps” this will open a new tab titled “Maps”</li>
<li>Select the desired map you want to view and click "Generate"</li>
<li>In the upper left-hand corner click the "wrench" icon, this will open a window titled "Customize Display Options"</li>
[[File:Display-Options.png]]
<ol type="i">
<li>From this window, you can choose which attributes to display, the color of the line, text, and background as well as the transparency percentage for any and all of the layers that comprise the current map</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Opening a Link on a Map==

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Visuals” and click “Maps” this will open a new tab titled “Maps”</li>
<li>Select the desired map you want to view and click "Generate"</li>
<li>Click on the map near the location of the link you wish to select</li>
<li>A window will open titled "Items near xx,yy"</li>
[[File:Link.png]]
<ol type="i">
<li>Find the record that you want to view the link</li>
<li>Click on the link button in the link column for that record</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Editing / Managing Influences on a Map==

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Visuals” and click “Maps” this will open a new tab titled “Maps”</li>
<li>Select the desired map you want to view and click "Generate"</li>
<li>To manage or edit an influence you can either do it from each individual influence level (see step 4) or from the layer level (see step 5)</li>
<li>Click on the map near the location of the influence you want to edit and click on the influence name from the "Items near x,y window that pops up.</li>
[[File:Influence-Link.png]]
<ol type="i">
<li>Click edit in the Influence window</li>
<li>Make changes to the influence and click Save</li>
</ol>
<li>OR you can click the wrench icon in the upper left hand corner and click on the layer name that your influence is attached to, and click manage influences in the Layer window that pops up.</li>
[[File:Layer-Influence.png]]
<ol type="i">
<li>In the Manage Influences tab, select the influence you want to edit from the Influence List</li>
<li>Click edit</li>
<li>Make changes to the influence and click Save</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating an Animation==
===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Visuals” and click “Maps” this will open a new tab titled “Maps”</li>
<li>Select the desired map you want to view and click "Generate"</li>
<li>Click “New” in the top left corner of the Map window (this will open a new window titled “Create Map Options”)</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Select “Animation” in the Heatmap Type drop-down menu</li>
<li>Select the duration or “frame spacing” of each frame (# of hours, days, minutes), select how many frames (12 frames at 1 hour spacing = 12 hours), select Before or After for playing the animation before or after the date and time selected, and select the date and time you would like to animate</li>
<li>Click “Create”. Your animation will have to generate. It usually takes a few minutes to load all of the frames.</li>
</ol>
<li>Once your animation is fully generated, you can save it by clicking “Save” in the top left corner of the Map window. You can save it as a web page or locally as a GIF file.</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Historical View==
===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Visuals” and click “Maps” this will open a new tab titled “Maps”</li>
<li>Select the desired map you want to view and click "Generate"</li>
<li>Click “New” in the top left corner of the Map window (this will open a new window titled “Create Map Options”)</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Select “Historical” in the Heatmap Type drop-down menu</li>
<li>Select the date and time you want to view</li>
<li>Click “Create”.</li>
</ol>
</ol>

New User

2015-04-16T14:20:33Z

Khackenmiller:

New User

2015-04-16T14:19:52Z

Khackenmiller:

As part of the security measures taken to ensure your data is protected, we have enabled two factor authentication when setting up a new user. You will need to send an email to [mailto:livedc@ncompass-inc.com livedc@ncompass-inc.com] requesting that a new user be created. The LiveDC team will add you to LiveDC and then you can begin the second part of setting up a new user as outlined in the steps below.

==Creating New User==
<ol>
<li>Go to the [https://livedc.ncompass-inc.com/livedc/ui.html/ LiveDC website]</li>
<li>Click "Create a new User Profile"</li>
[[File:Login Box.png]]
<li>Enter your name and email address in fields provided and click “Create new User Profile” button</li>
[[File:Login Box2.png]]
<li>An email will be sent to the email address you entered above with a system-generated password. Click on the link within the email message and enter your log-in information.</li>
</ol>

New User

2015-04-16T14:18:17Z

Khackenmiller:

As part of the security measures taken to ensure your data is protected, we have enabled two factor authentication when setting up a new user. You will need to send an email to [mailto:livedc@ncompass-inc.com livedc@ncompass-inc.com] requesting that a new user be created. The LiveDC team will add you to LiveDC and then you can begin the second part of setting up a new user as outlined in the steps below.

==Creating New User==
<ol>
<li>Go to the [livedc.ncompass-inc.com/livedc/ui.html/ LiveDC website]</li>
<li>Click "Create a new User Profile"</li>
[[File:Login Box.png]]
<li>Enter your name and email address in fields provided and click “Create new User Profile” button</li>
[[File:Login Box2.png]]
<li>An email will be sent to the email address you entered above with a system-generated password. Click on the link within the email message and enter your log-in information.</li>
</ol>

New User

2015-04-16T14:17:19Z

Khackenmiller:

As part of the security measures taken to ensure your data is protected, we have enabled two factor authentication when setting up a new user. You will need to send an email to [mailto:livedc@ncompass-inc.com livedc@ncompass-inc.com] requesting that a new user be created. The LiveDC team will add you to LiveDC and then you can begin the second part of setting up a new user as outlined in the steps below.

==Creating New User==
<ol>
<li>Go to the [LiveDC website | livedc.ncompass-inc.com/livedc/ui.html]</li>
<li>Click "Create a new User Profile"</li>
[[File:Login Box.png]]
<li>Enter your name and email address in fields provided and click “Create new User Profile” button</li>
[[File:Login Box2.png]]
<li>An email will be sent to the email address you entered above with a system-generated password. Click on the link within the email message and enter your log-in information.</li>
</ol>

New User

2015-04-16T14:14:53Z

Khackenmiller:

As part of the security measures taken to ensure your data is protected, we have enabled two factor authentication when setting up a new user. You will need to send an email to [mailto:livedc@ncompass-inc.com livedc@ncompass-inc.com] requesting that a new user be created. The LiveDC team will add you to LiveDC and then you can begin the second part of setting up a new user as outlined in the steps below.

==Creating New User==
<ol>
<li>Go to the [LiveDC website livedc.ncompass-inc.com/livedc/ui.html]</li>
<li>Click "Create a new User Profile"</li>
[[File:Login Box.png]]
<li>Enter your name and email address in fields provided and click “Create new User Profile” button</li>
[[File:Login Box2.png]]
<li>An email will be sent to the email address you entered above with a system-generated password. Click on the link within the email message and enter your log-in information.</li>
</ol>

LiveDC Overview

2015-04-01T21:17:44Z

Khackenmiller: /* Our Director of LiveDC */

At the core of LiveDC, is the aggregation of data. In order to do this, LiveDC utilizes four components for execution: 1) Elicit; 2) templates; 3) tags; and 4) data series. Elicit is our data collector that resides on your network. It is used to capture all of the critical data that will be analyzed using the LiveDC platform.

As data is collected, it is organized and polled via instructions provided by various “templates” within the platform. These templates provide the key instructions for which data is sought, frequency of data requests, and format of data after it enters the platform. Templates help formulate standardized re-usable polling frequency / timing, layers for maps, influences, numbers, trends, URL Scrapes and SNMP collection. Templates are designed to help speed up the creation of data series and eliminate the possibility of errors. This ensures that all of the data collected is formatted appropriately to meet your needs for data analysis.

Identified, captured and tagged data in LiveDC is used by “data series” to make sense of all this disparate information. As the name implies, a data series is all the data values tracked over time, thus a series of data. The power of LiveDC comes from the aggregation of data series from all types of sources such as temperature, space, power, humidity, utilization, or manual entries. Each data series can also be combined with other data series to create higher order data series also known as a "dynamic set" for greater analysis and big data manipulation. Think of each data series as a brick in building the ultimate block of knowledge of your environment. Once data series are identified and created, LiveDC utilizes them to automatically gather the data and view the attributes through a number of mechanisms such as Maps, Graphs, and LiveTiles. Data to be utilized by LiveDC can be collected from a number of sources including, but not limited to: SNMP, HTTP, CSV, and Excel. Once the various data series are created, they can be utilized over and over for the creation of multiple LiveTiles, graphs, maps or customized analysis.

Leveraging tags helps make it easier to aggregate the various individual data series for new grouped data series. Tags can be set up in the beginning or added on the fly as you determine new needs or requirements based on business demand. As you will see, the quantities of data elements can grow very large depending on your needs. To assist in the use of all of this data, we have created the ability to tag data series with common names to help with capturing the right data series for the creation of dynamic sets. Tags are short labels that are easy to remember and can be easily combined with other tags to identify the various data series needed in your analysis. This provides you the power to easily search, poll, and create notifications, alerts, graphs, and LiveTiles, utilizing tags. We have built a foundational dictionary to help in the initial setup and creation of these tags. As you go through the variations of data series and their related polling types, keep in mind some of the ways you want to use the data so that a solid foundation can be set up. Every environment is unique, thus the requirement of client specific data series. To generically create data series would only help in the short term. By engaging the user to go through the data series setup process, the real power of LiveDC is realized. To assist in the basics, we have provided templates for data series to utilize so you can quickly edit and setup your environment.

As you go through the setup process, you will quickly see the constant use of data series to help capture the real-time information you desire. Naming data series with clear and concise terms will be very important to help realize the full value LiveDC provides.

==About this Manual==
The purpose of this user manual is to provide guidance on using LiveDC. It is our assumption that the users of LiveDC have little to no knowledge of the platform.

The recommended browsers for LiveDC are: Google Chrome, Mozilla Firefox or Safari. Internet Explorer (IE) 9, 10 and 11 are not recommended but will allow to complete most tasks within the platform. If you are using IE we recommend you install the add-on “Chrome Frame”, which will allow IE to interpret the page similar to the way Google Chrome does.

The documentation / steps outlined in this wiki were written using Google Chrome.

You can obtain more information about LiveDC by visiting [http://www.ncompass-inc.com/services/livedc-dcim/ www.ncompass-inc.com] or emailing [mailto:livedc@ncompass-inc.com livedc@ncompass-inc.com].

Change Password

2015-04-01T18:41:31Z

Khackenmiller:

<ol>
<li>Log-in to LiveDC</li>
<li>Once logged in, in the upper right hand corner, click "Change Password"</li>
[[File:Change_Password.png]]
<li>In the "Change Password" pop-up enter your current password and desired new password twice to confirm they are the same. The minimum password requirements are: 8 characters long and 3 kinds of characters (uppercase, lowercase, numbers and/or symbols)</li>
[[File:Change_Password_Box.png]]
<li>Click "Change Password"</li>
</ol>

Data Series

2015-03-25T18:08:19Z

Khackenmiller: /* Creating a Data Series */

__TOC__

==Creating a Data Series==
Data series are the foundation of LiveDC. The data gathered in each data series can be pushed to LiveTiles, graphs, maps, executive reports, operational cost reports, etc. Data series can gather data in many different ways. The LiveDC platform can collect data by leveraging common protocols such as SNMPv1, HTTP URL scrapes, dynamic sets, trends, formulas, record counts, and by manually inputting the data. In a nutshell, data series tie everything together throughout the LiveDC platform. Information you need to know before setting up a data series:
*Name of the data series - usually contains cabinet location, row, etc.
*Whether the data is a number or text - most often we utilize numbers
*What format you would like the number to return as - Amps, kW, Fahrenheit, $, etc.
*How often you would like to collect the data - 5 mins, 15 mins, 1 hour, 1 day, etc.
*How you would like to collect the data - SNMP, manual, formula, trend, etc.

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Data Series” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window, continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Data” and click “Data Series.” This will open a new tab titled “Data Series.”</li>
<li>Within the Data Series tab (upper left-hand corner) click “Create.” A new window will open titled “Create Data Series.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>In the “Name” field enter the title of the data series</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Average Temperature Front 10 inch, CO2 Average, POD 3 – Row 5 – Cabinet 6, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Add additional information about the data series in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the tags that best describe your data series from the drop down menu and click the left-hand facing arrow or create a new “Tag” record by clicking on the star button (See [[Extras#Creating Tags|Creating Tags]] section for instructions)</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>To remove a tag from a data series select the tag and click the right-hand facing arrow</li>
[[File:Data-Series.png]]
</ol>
<li>Select the type of data you want to collect from the drop down list in the “Data Type” field (Date, Number or Text - number is the most commonly used)</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>If you select data type “Number,” you will need to select a number format template you want to apply to your data. Pick a template from the drop down menu or create a new “Number Format Template” record by clicking the star button (see [[Extras#Creating a Number Format Template|Creating a Number Format Template]] section for instructions).</li>
</ol>
<li>Select the “Timing Template” from the drop down menu or create a new “Timing Template” record by clicking the star button (see [[Extras#Creating a Timing Template|Creating a Timing Template]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select the appropriate poll type based on how your data will be collected. If you select "Manual" you can proceed to step g.</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>If you select “Dynamic Set” you will need to fill in additional information. A dynamic set allows you to perform a function on a set of data which is categorized by tags. For example, average cold aisle temperature would take all data series with the tag "cold aisle" and average them out to give you one data point. The additional information needed is:</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Data points start date</li>
<li>Inclusion - All, Any</li>
<li>Tags: Select from the drop down menu and click the left-hand facing arrow or create a new “Tag” record by clicking the star button (See [[Extras#Creating Tags|Creating Tags]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Operation - Average, Count, Maximum, Median, Minimum, Sum</li>
<li>Enter minimum and maximum values if you want to apply restrictions to the calculations. Leave them blank for no restrictions. You can change the red x to green check marks if you want to include the exact values entered for minimum or maximum values.</li>
<ol>
<li>Example: If you wanted to only include non-freezing temperature values you would set the minimum to be 32 and change the red x to a green check mark – now you can track just the temperatures above freezing (32 degrees or higher)</li>
</ol>
<li>Adjustment Expression</li>
</ol>
<li>If you select “Formula” you will need to fill in additional information. A formula data series allows you to apply logic to a number of data series. For example, difference of power in cabinet 1 and cabinet 2 would take these two data series and subtract them from each other to give you one data point. The additional information needed is:</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Data points start date</li>
<li>Formula- what you want to do with the data points outlined in number 3 below, example syntax: v0 - v1, where v0 = Power in cabinet 1 and v1 = Power in cabinet or additional variables can be used in the formula and would be referenced as v3, v4, etc.</li>
<li>Values: Select from the drop down menu and click the left-hand facing arrow or create a new “Value” record by clicking the star button (See [[Create a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Adjustment Expression</li>
</ol>
<li>If you select “Record Count” you will need to fill in additional information. A record count data series allows you to get a count of how many data series contain a specific tag or set of tags. The record count data series leverages the search capability built in to LiveDC. The additional information needed is:</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Data points start date</li>
<li>Search Criteria: Select from the drop down menu or create a new “Search Criteria” record by clicking the star button (See [[Using LiveDC Search#Creating a Saved Search Criteria|Creating a Saved Search Criteria]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Adjustment Expression</li>
</ol>
<li>If you select “SNMPv1” you will need to fill in additional information. An SNMPv1 data series polls intelligent devices that talk SNMP and you specify the interval at which you want to request this data. The additional information needed is:</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Collector Assignment - usually use Automatic</li>
<li>SNMPV1 Template: Select from the drop down menu or create a new “SNMPv1 Template” by clicking the star button (See [[Extras#Creating a SNMP V1 Template|Creating a SNMP V1 Template]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Address - IP Address</li>
<li>Read Community String - usually by default this is "Public"</li>
<li>Regular Expression - usually left blank</li>
<li>SNMP OID</li>
</ol>
<li>If you select “Trend” you will need to fill in additional information. A trend data series allows you to look at a standard data series over a period of time. For example, if you had the power of a cabinet over the last year you could set up a trend data series to use the power data series and look at a trend over the last 3 months. The additional information needed is:</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Data points start date</li>
<li>Data series to trend. Select from the drop down menu or create a new “Data Series to Trend” record by clicking the star button (See [[Create a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Trend template: Select from the drop down menu or create a new “Trend Template” record by clicking the star button (See [[Extras#Creating a Trend Template|Creating a Trend Template]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Enter minimum and maximum values if you want to apply restrictions to the calculations. Leave them blank for no restrictions. You can change the red x to green check marks if you want to include the exact values entered for minimum or maximum values.</li>
<ol>
<li>Example: If you wanted to only include non-freezing temperature values you would set the minimum to be 32 and change the red x to a green check mark – now you can track just the temperatures above freezing (32 degrees or higher)</li>
</ol>
<li>Adjustment Expression</li>
</ol>
<li>If you select “URL Scrape” you will need to fill in additional information. A URL Scrape data series allows you to pull information from an unsecured web page using regex to determine the location of the information on the webpage. </li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Collector Assignment - usually use Automatic</li>
<li>URL Scrape Template: Select from the drop down menu or create a new “URL Scrape Template” record by clicking the star button (See [[Extras#Creating a URL Scrape Template|Creating a URL Scrape Template]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Regular Expression</li>
<li>URL - website to find the information</li>
</ol>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
<li>You now have a data series that will be collecting data on the interval you specified and the data series will be able to be used in Maps, Graphs and LiveTiles.</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Cloning a Data Series==
Cloning a data series will save time when creating the same type of data series for multiple locations. When cloning a data series, the only information needed is essentially the name and details. Selecting different poll types will provide different “cloned” items, each will return specific information pertaining to the poll type.

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Data Series” window skip to step 4. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Data” and click “Data Series,” this will open a new tab titled “Data Series”</li>
<li>Highlight the desired data series that is associated with the new data series desired to clone. Within the data series tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Clone” button. A new window will open titled “Edit Data Series.” The following line items will be auto-filled in the data series window:</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Tags</li>
<li>Data Type</li>
<li>Number Format</li>
<li>Timing Template</li>
<li>Poll Type</li>
[[File:Cloning-Data-Series.png]]
</ol>
<li>In the “Name” field enter the title / name of the data series</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Examples: Average Temperature Front 10 inch, CO2 Average, POD 3 – Row 5 – Cabinet 6, etc. </li>
</ol>
<li>Add additional information about the data series in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
<li>You will now have a data series with a very similar structure to the data series you used for cloning.</li>

Extras

2015-03-25T17:56:17Z

Khackenmiller: /* Creating a Power Plug Voltage */

__TOC__

==Creating Accounting Shares==
An accounting share is a way to track what department or function of the business owns or is making payments for a piece of hardware. You will need to know the following information to create an accounting share:
*Business unit or business department having ownership of the device
*Number of shares that business unit owns
[[File:Accounting Share.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Select a business unit from the “Business Unit” drop-down menu or create a new “Business Unit” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Business Unit|Creating a Business Unit]] section for instructions)</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Examples: Accounting, Production, Marketing, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter the desired amount of shares into the “Shares” field</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating Address Type==
Creating an address type is required for each operating system, usually defined as IPv4 or IPv6. The address type is not considered the actual address.You will need to know the following information before creating an address type:
*Whether the address type is an IP-V4 or IP-V6
[[File:Address Type.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Address Type” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Address Types” this will open a new tab titled “Address Types”</li>
<li>In the address types tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Address Type”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the address type in the field titled “Name”</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: IP Address, IP Address (location-based), etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the address type in the “Details” field</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Business Unit==
A business unit or business department is a great way to track ownership or affected areas of the organization that touch a specific piece of hardware, software, or virtual machine. A business unit uses the parent-child relationship like a hardware product. This can be utilized for accounting and tracking purposes of the asset. You will need to gather the following information when creating a business unit:
*Name of the business unit or function you wish to create
*A parent business unit, if any
[[File:Business Unit.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Business Unit” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Business Unit” this will open a new tab titled “Business units”</li>
<li>Within the business unit tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Business Unit” or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, service tab in the business unit section click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the company name in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Target, Best Buy, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the name of the company in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the business unit tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, service tab in the business unit section click the star button</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the department in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Marketing, Accounting, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the department name in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the company name in the “Parent Business Unit” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Target, Best Buy, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Company==
Creating a company is a way to distinguish the physical history and payment history of an asset in the event of a merger and acquisition or any other event which would involve transfer of ownership. You will need to know the following information before creating a company:
*Name of the company you wish to create
[[File:Company.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Company” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Companies” this will open a new tab titled “Companies”</li>
<li>Within the companies tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Company.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the company name in the field titled “Name”</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the company in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Component==
Components tracking is a great way to record what is contained within a specific piece of hardware you are creating. The component information can give you insight into how much of a resource you are utilizing and consuming in your data center. It tracks everything from power to memory to peripheral cards inserted into the back of your servers. You will need to gather the following information to create a component record for your hardware:
*Memory in GB for the hardware
*Number of logical disk volumes
*Number of network interfaces for the hardware
*Number of management interfaces for the hardware
*Number of CPU’s in the hardware
*Other components, utilizing the parent-child relationship, located within the hardware
*Physical disks
*SAN connections
*Number and type of power plugs
[[File:Component.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Component” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Components” this will open a new tab titled “Components”</li>
<li>In the components tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Component.” If you are in the “Create Hardware” window, component tab in the component section click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the peripheral name of the components in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Network Card, PCIE Card, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the peripheral in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the components tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, component tab in the component section click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the ports in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: port numbers</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the ports in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the peripheral in the “Parent Component” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Network Card, PCIE Card, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Contact==
A contact is utilized when referring to an asset, specifically a piece of hardware. This is the organization and person you would contact if the asset has a disruption of service or experiences a failure or outage. You will need to gather the following information when creating a contact:
*Type of contact; electrician, service provider, maintenance, etc.
*Name of the contact; first and last name, company the contact works for, and contact method (see [[#Creating a Contact Method Type|Creating a Contact Method Type]] for instructions)
[[File:Contact.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Contact” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Contacts” this will open a new tab titled “Contacts”</li>
<li>Within the contact tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Contact”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the first name of the contact in the “First Name” field</li>
<li>Enter the last name of the contact in the “Last Name” field</li>
<li>Select which company the contact is associated with in the “Company” drop-down menu or create a new “Company” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Add a contact method by clicking the star button. In the “Create Contact Method” window enter the following:</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Enter a “Type” from the drop down menu or by clicking on the star button to create a new “Type” record. (see [[#Creating a Contact Method Type|Creating a Contact Method Type]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>Enter a phone number or email for the contact method in the “Value” field </li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information for the contact in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Contact Method Type==
A contact method type provides the means to reach the point of contact for an asset, typically for hardware. The contact method type refers to the email or phone number used to get in touch with the person. You will need to gather the following information when creating a contact method type:
*What mode of contact is preferred for reaching this person; email, SMS, mobile phone, etc.
[[File:Contact Method Type.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Contact Method Type” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Contact Method Types” this will open a new tab titled “Contact Method Types”</li>
<li>Within the contact method type tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Contact Method Type.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the contact method type in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the contact method type in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a CPU Type==
[[File:CPU Type.PNG]]
===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create CPU Type” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “CPU Types” this will open a new tab titled “CPU Types”</li>
<li>Within the CPU type tab, in the upper left-hand corner click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create CPU Type.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the CPU type in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Intel Xeon E5450</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the CPU type in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Enter the speed of the CPU type in the field “Speed in GHz”</li>
<li>Enter how many physical cores the CPU type has in the “Physical Cores” field</li>
<li>Enter how many virtual cores the CPU type has in the “Virtual Cores” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Discount Program==
A discount program is used when referring to the service of an asset, typically hardware. Creating a discount program record is valuable for tracking what service company your dollars are going to and what deal you are receiving from a discount standpoint. You will need to gather the following information before creating a discount program record:
*Name of the discount program, for tracking purposes
*Percentage of the discount program, to know what deal has been provided by the service company
[[File:Discount Program.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Discount Program” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Discount Program” this will open a new tab titled “Discount Programs”</li>
<li>Within the discount program tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Discount Program.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the discount program in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the discount program in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Enter a discount percent in the field called “Percent”</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Domain==
A domain record refers to a collection of devices within your network, similar to contoso.com, and helps delineate between internal devices and devices that reside in other domains. The LiveDC platform will track what domains are being utilized by which operating systems and provide ease of searching this information. You will need to gather the following information before creating a domain record:
*Name of the domain record you wish to create
[[File:Domain.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Domain” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Domains” this will open a new tab titled “Domains”</li>
<li>Within the domains tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Domain.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the domain in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: company_xyz.local</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the domain in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating an Influence==
An influence is the way to represent what is happening to a specific data series in the data center on a map. The influence is shown by using a color scale, known as a legend, to provide knowledge around the objects real-time state. The influence’s color is affected by the data series it is connected to. As the data in the data series changes, so does the color of the influence, based upon the legend associated with the map. You will need to gather the following information before creating an influence:
*Specific data series that you would like to attach to the influence (see [[Create a Data Series#Creating a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] for instructions)
*Map that you would like to place the influence on (see [[Create Map#Creating a Map|Creating a Map]] for instructions)
*Layer of the map you will be placing the influence on (see [[#Creating a Layer|Creating a Layer]] for instructions)
*Influence template that you will be using to give the influence boundaries, shape, and scale (see [[#Creating an Influence Template|Creating an Influence Template]] for instructions)
[[File:Influence.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Layers” this will open a new tab titled “Layers List”</li>
<li>Select the desired layer to place influences on from the layers list and click “Manage Influences.” This will open a new tab titled “Manage Influences.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Within the manage influence tab a list titled “Influence List,” where all of the influences for the desired layer will reside, will be open. Click “Create” to make a new influence.</li>
<li>A new window will open up titled “Create Influence”</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Select the data series you wish to correspond with the influence in the “Data Series” drop-down menu or create a new “Data Series” record by clicking the star button (see [[Create a Data Series#Creating a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select an influence template to define the parameters for the influence in the “Template” drop-down menu or create a new “Influence Template” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating an Influence Template|Creating an Influence Template]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Define the location of the influence horizontally in the “X Coordinate” field (this can be adjusted at a later time, default: 1)</li>
<li>Define the location of the influence vertically in the “Y Coordinate” field (this can be adjusted at a later time, default: 1)</li>
<li>Select the type of link for the influence in the “Link Type” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>If data series, select the corresponding data series or create a new “Data Series” record by clicking the star button (see [[Create a Data Series#Creating a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>If hardware visual, select the corresponding hardware or create a new “Hardware” record by clicking the star button (see [[Create a Site#Creating Hardware|Creating Hardware]] section for instructions)</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
<li>To edit the position of an influence, either edit the specific influence from the influence list or from the map (see [[#Editing a Map Influence|Editing a Map Influence]] for more information)</li>
</ol>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating an Influence Template==
An influence template provides the visual boundaries that are placed around an influence for a map. Basically, the template will tell the influence what shape to take, if the pixels are going to fade at the edges, and the algorithm to follow in reference to what you are trying to display (usually will be predefined “Power2”). You will need to gather the following information before you create an influence template:
*Name of the influence template you wish to create
*What shape you are intending your influence to have (See [[#Creating a Shape|Creating a Shape]] for instructions)
*Fade on the influence, basically if you want it to have hard edges or softer edges
[[File:Influence Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Influence Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Influence Templates” this will open a new tab titled “Influence Templates”</li>
<li>Within the influence templates tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Influence Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the influence template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Standard Humidity, Standard Temperature, Standard Power kW, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the influence template in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Select what shape you want to make the influence template in the drop-down menu called “Shapes” or create a new “Shape” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Shape|Creating a Shape]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>Select the “Algorithm” to be applied to the shape from the drop down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Default for temperature / humidity: Power2</li>
<li>Default for power: Constant</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter a value for the “Fade Pixels” of the shape if you want soft edges when two influences collide</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>The value is the number of pixels at the edge of the shape that will be softened</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Legend==
A legend is how to define the value boundaries for an influence to represent colors. The legend is seen at the bottom of a map to visually display the value range in a color scale. It all works as follows: First a data series produces a numerical value and pushes that number to the associated influence, next the influence template will give that numerical value a shape boundary, within the influence template boundary the numerical value will correspond with the legend to produce a certain color value for representation of the influence on the map. You will need to gather the following information to create a legend:
*Name of the legend you wish to create
*Number format template that corresponds with the numerical value you wish to display
*Define a low value for the legend
*Define a high value for the legend
*Define the number of hints you wish the legend to have (hints are the number of values displayed on the legend)
*Choose a gradient file to correspond with your legend
[[File:Legend.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Legend” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Legends” this will open a new tab titled “Legends”</li>
<li>Within the legend tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Legend.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the legend in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Data Center Power, Cost Per Cabinet, Data Center Temps, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the legend in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the number format template to be used with the legend in the “Number Format Template” drop-down menu or create a new “Number Format Template” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Number Format Template|Creating a Number Format Template]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>Enter value of lowest point in the “Low Value” field</li>
<li>Enter value of highest point in the “High Value” field</li>
<li>Enter a number of desired hints in the “# of Hints” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>If you want to represent 0-10, you would select 11 for number of hints</li>
</ol>
<li>Select a gradient file to use for the legend in the “New Gradient File” section</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Layer==
A layer is an aspect of the map that serves a very important purpose. The first layer is the solid background, which is the foundational piece for creating any map. The second layer is the layer on which the influences sit, which is usually placed in between the solid background and the floor plan layer. The third layer is a transparent floor plan layout of the data center; the top-down view of what infrastructure (cabinets, PDU’s, UPS, etc.) is located within the room. Lastly, you can add a link layer which allows you to click on the map and link out to either a URL, data series, graph, map, LiveTile, or a piece of hardware directly. This order of layering provides the capabilities to show a floor layout, 9-box model, risk assessment, etc. and the abilities to place influences on top to paint a clear picture of real-time metrics in your data center. You will need to gather the following information to create a layer:
*Name of the layer you wish to create
*What type of layer that is to be created; basic influence, image, link, or solid
*Legend you wish to correspond to the influences that will be placed on the map (see [[#Creating a Legend|Creating a Legend]] for instructions)
[[File:Create Layer.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Layer” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Layers” this will open a new tab titled “Layers”</li>
<li>Within the layers tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Layer.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the layer in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Floor Plan, Cost Per Cabinet, Humidity % 10 inch, Solid Background, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the layer in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the type of layer desired in the “Layer Type” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>If “Basic Influence," choose which legend to use in the “Legend” drop-down menu or create a new “Legend” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Legend|Creating a Legend]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>If “Image," select the appropriate image from the drop-down menu or create a new “Image” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Uploading an Image|Uploading an Image]] section for instructions. Select the placement of the image from the drop-down menu.</li>
<li>If “Link," no additional information is needed</li>
<li>If “Solid," define the desired color and percentage of transparency in the “Color” and “Transparency Percentage” fields</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create,” you can now view your layer in the Layers List</li>
<li>If you created a "Link Layer" see the next steps in section [[#Attaching a Link to a Link Layer|Attaching a Link to a Link Layer]]</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Attaching a Link to a Link Layer==

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Layers” this will open a new tab titled “Layers”</li>
<li>Select the desired link layer you want to add a link to from the “Layer List”. If the link layer is not created see [[#Creating a Layer|Creating a Layer]] section for instructions</li>
<li>On the bottom half of the screen, click "Manage Links"</li>
[[File:Manage-Links.png]]
<ol type="a">
<li>In the new tab,(in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Link”</li>
[[File:Create Link.JPG]]
<ol type="i">
<li>Enter the name of the link in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Example: Google, Facebook, Avg Cold Aisle Data Series, Executive Summary Map</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional details about the link in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the shape you want the link to have on the map from the drop down menu or create a new “Shape” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Shape|Creating a Shape]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Define the location of the Link horizontally in the “X Coordinate” field (this can be adjusted at a later time, default: 1) (see [[Create Map#Moving an Influence or Link Location on a Map|Moving an Influence or Link Location on a Map]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Define the location of the Link vertically in the “Y Coordinate” field (this can be adjusted at a later time, default: 1) (see [[Create Map#Moving an Influence or Link Location on a Map|Moving an Influence or Link Location on a Map]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select the type of link for the link layer in the “Link Type” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>If URL, enter URL into the text box</li>
<li>If data Series, select the corresponding data series from the drop-down menu or create a new data series record by clicking the star button (see [[Create a Data Series#Creating a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>If graph, select the corresponding graph from the drop-down menu or create a new graph record by clicking on the star button (see [[Create Graph#Creating a Graph|Creating a Graph]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>If hardware, select the corresponding hardware from the drop-down menu or create a new hardware record by clicking on the star button (see [[Create a Site#Creating Hardware|Creating Hardware]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>If LiveTile, select the corresponding LiveTile from the drop-down menu or create a new LiveTile record by clicking on the star button (see [[Create LiveTile#Creating a LiveTile|Creating a LiveTile]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>If Map, select the corresponding Map from the drop-down menu or create a new Map record by clicking on the star button (see [[Create Map#Creating a Map|Creating a Map]] section for instructions) </li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
<li>You have just successfully added a link to the specified layer.</li>
<li>To add your new layer to a map, see section [[Create Map#Applying a Layer to a Map|Applying a Layer to a Map]] for instructions </li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Number Format Template==
A number format template takes a raw number value and changes it into usable and contextual metrics. One would typically use this when formatting from Amps to kW or a whole number to a dollar amount or percentage, but it is not limited to that. You will need to gather the following information to create a number format template:
*Name of the number format template you wish to create
*Specified type of number format template; either simple, currency, or java decimal pattern
[[File:Number Format Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Number Format Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and select the button called “Number Format Templates” this will open a new tab titled “Number Format Templates”</li>
<li>Within the number format templates tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Number Format Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the number format template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Fahrenheit (rounded), Percent, kWh, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the number format template in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the type of number format template in the “Type” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>If “Simple” type, define Prefix and Suffix</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Prefix: $, etc.</li>
<li>Suffix: kW, Amps, Tons, Months</li>
</ol>
<li>If “Currency” type, choose “Locale” from the drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Default: en_US</li>
</ol>
<li>If “Java Decimal Pattern” type, enter the pattern in the “Pattern” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>To create a number with a single value after the decimal, you would enter: ##.#</li>
</ol>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Payment==
A payment record, referring to the payment for any asset, is a way to track a payment for a specific device and when/who the payment goes to through the LiveDC platform. You will need to gather the following information before you create a payment record:
*Date of the payment
*Amount to be paid
*How you will be paying the payment (see [[#Creating a Payment Type|Creating a Payment Type]] for instructions)
*Who the payment is paid by (see [[#Creating a Business Unit|Creating a Business Unit]] for instructions)
*Who the payment is paid to (see [[#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] for instructions)
[[File:Payment.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Enter the date of when the payment for the hardware is to be paid in the “Date” field</li>
<li>Enter the amount of the payment in the “Amount” field</li>
<li>Select the type of payment in the “Type” drop-down menu or create a new “Payment Type” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Payment Type|Creating a Payment Type]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select who will be making the payment in the “Paid By” drop-down menu or create a new “Paid By” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Business Unit|Creating a Business Unit]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select to whom the payment is going to in the “Paid To” drop-down menu or create a new “Paid To” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Add tags to the payment in the section titled “Tags” by selecting from the drop down menu and clicking the left-hand facing arrow or create a new “Tag” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating Tags|Creating Tags]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the payment in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Payment Type==
A payment type is defining the mode of how the payment is paid. Whether that be a check or automatic deposit, it’s the way to define how you are paying for an asset within the LiveDC platform.
[[File:Payment Type.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Payment Type” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Payment Types” this will open a new tab titled “Payment types”</li>
<li>Within the payment types tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Payment Type.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the payment type in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the payment type in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Physical Disk==
A physical disk is used to store all server data. LiveDC provides an avenue of tracking these disks for each piece of hardware. It is valuable to track each disk for the purposes of asset management.

[[File:Physical Disk.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Enter the amount of physical disks of the hardware in the “Quantity” field</li>
<li>Enter the amount of capacity the physical disk has in the “Capacity in GB” field</li>
<li>Select the physical disk RAID that is utilized by the hardware in the “RAID” drop-down menu or create a new “Physical Disk RAID” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Physical Disk RAID|Creating a Physical Disk RAID]] section for instructions) </li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the physical disk RAID in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: Disk Controller</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the physical disk RAID in the “Details” field</li>
</ol>
<li>Select the physical disk speed that is utilized by the hardware in the “Speed” drop-down menu or create a new “Physical Disk Speed” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Physical Disk Speed|Creating a Physical Disk Speed]] section for instructions)</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the physical disk speed in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the physical disk speed in the “Details” field</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug==
The LiveDC platform provides a means of tracking power plugs for each piece of hardware. This is valuable from the standpoint of tracking single and dual corded devices. You will need to gather the following information before creating a power plug:
*Number of power plugs for the specific piece of hardware
*Type of power plug
*Observed wattage
*Estimated wattage
*Amount of wattage displayed on the nameplate of the hardware
*Amount of ampere
*Backup source of the hardware
*What circuit the hardware is linked back to
*Amount of voltage for the hardware
[[File:Power Plug.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>In the window titled “Creating Hardware”, enter the amount of Power Plugs for the piece of hardware in the “Quantity” field</li>
<li>Select the type of power plug in the “Plug Type” drop-down menu or create a new “Plug Type” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Power Plug Type|Creating a Power Plug Type]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Enter the amount of watts observed in the “Observed Watts” field)</li>
<li>Enter the amount of watts estimated in the “Estimated Watts” field</li>
<li>Enter the amount of watts on the nameplate of the hardware in the “Nameplate Watts” field</li>
<li>Select an ampere for the power plug in the “Ampere” drop-down menu or create a new “Ampere” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Power Plug Ampere|Creating a Power Plug Ampere]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select a backup source for the power plug in the “Backup Source” drop-down menu or create a new “Backup Source” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Power Plug Backup Source|Creating a Power Plug Backup Source]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select a power circuit for the power plug in the “Circuit” drop-down menu or create a new “Circuit” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Power Plug Circuit|Creating a Power Plug Circuit]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select a voltage for the power plug in the “Voltage” drop-down menu or create a new “Voltage” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Power Plug Voltage|Creating a Power Plug Voltage]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug Ampere==
LiveDC tracks the amperage that is produced in each power plug. Tracking such information is useful for estimating power usage throughout your data center.

[[File:Power Plug Ampere.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Power Plug Ampere” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Power Plug Amperes” this will open a new tab titled “Power Plug Amperes”</li>
<li>Within the power plug amperes tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Power Plug Amperes.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the power plug ampere in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the power plug ampere in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug Backup Source==
Tracking the backup source related to each power plug for hardware is important information to have on hand in the case of a power failure or outage. LiveDC will track the backup power source for each piece of hardware located in your data center.
[[File:Power Plug Backup.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Power Plug Backup Source” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Power Plug Backup Sources” this will open a new tab titled “Power Plug Backup Sources”</li>
<li>Within the power plug backup sources tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Power Plug Backup Source.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the power plug backup source in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the power plug backup source in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug Circuit==
LiveDC can track which specific circuit breaker(s) a piece of hardware is connected to. This sort of information is valuable to know for proactively managing scheduled maintenance and powering down hardware.
[[File:Power Plug Circuit.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Power Plug Circuit” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Power Plug Circuits” this will open a new tab titled “Power Plug Circuits”</li>
<li>Within the power plug circuits tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Power Plug Circuits.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the power plug circuit in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the power plug circuit in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug Type==
In LiveDC, the type of power plug that is used can be tied back to a specific piece of hardware. We track this information to help identify how many plugs of each type are available in each rack and how many are used.
[[File:Power Plug Type.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Power Plug Type” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click called “Power Plug Types” this will open a new tab titled “Power Plug Types”</li>
<li>Within the power plug types tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Power Plug Type.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the power plug type in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the power plug type in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug Voltage==
Tracking voltage, utilizing the LiveDC platform, is a simple and valuable operation. By entering the voltage information about a specific piece of hardware, you are able to plan for power usage and estimate monthly costs surrounding a single device or many devices.

[[File:Power Plug Voltage.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Power Plug Voltage” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Power Plug Voltages” this will open a new tab titled “Power Plug Voltages”</li>
<li>In the power plug voltages tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Power Plug Voltage.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the power plug voltage in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the power plug voltage in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Product==
LiveDC utilizes a parent-child relationship for creating and tracking products. Products tie directly to assets in your data center and make the search function of LiveDC a valuable means of accessing and analyzing your information. You will need to gather the following information before creating a product:
*Manufacturer of the product
*Category of the product
*Model of the product
*Model number of the product
*Generation of the product
[[File:Create Product.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Product” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Products” this will open a new tab titled “Product”</li>
<li>Within the products tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Product” or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, basic tab in the “Product” section, click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the manufacturer name of the product in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Dell, Oracle, EMC, HP, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the manufacturer name of the product in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the products tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, basic tab, “Product” section, click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the category name of the product in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Server, Storage, Network, or Infrastructure</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the category name of the product in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the manufacturer in the “Parent Product” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Dell, Oracle, EMC, HP, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the products tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, basic tab, “Product” section, click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the model name of the product in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: ProLiant, PowerEdge, SunFire, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the model name of the product in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the “Manufacturer – Category” in the “Parent Product” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Dell-Server</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the products tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, basic tab, “Product” section, click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the model number name of the product in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: DL385, 2900, X4250, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the model number name of the product in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the “Manufacturer – Category – Model” in the “Parent Product” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Dell-Server-ProLiant</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the products tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, basic tab, “Product” section, click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the generation / version name of the product in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: G5, V2, 7.1, etc</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the qualifier name of the product in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the “Manufacturer – Category – Model – Model Number” in the “Parent Product” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: Dell-Server-Proliant-DL385</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>You can create as many levels of information as needed, but the 5 levels we have just described seem to cover almost all instances of product tracking</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a SAN Connection==
A SAN (Storage Area Network) connection can be tracked within the LiveDC platform. Tracking this information in LiveDC is valuable, for storage devices especially, to provide an understanding of which SAN fabrics a device is connected to and to determine if there is redundancy. You will need to gather the following information before creating a SAN connection record:
*Number of connections the hardware has
*Name of the SAN
*Amount of capacity in GB of the SAN connection
[[File:SAN Connection.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Enter the amount of SAN connections the hardware obtains in the “Number of Connections” field</li>
<li>Select the SAN in the “SAN” drop-down menu or create a new “SAN” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a SAN|Creating a SAN]] for instructions)</li>
<li>Enter the amount of capacity the SAN connection has in the “Capacity in GB” field</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a SAN==
The SAN (Storage Area Network) is used primarily with storage devices. Tracking this information in LiveDC is valuable, for storage devices especially, to provide an understanding of which SAN fabrics a device is connected to and to determine if there is redundancy between SANs.

[[File:Create SAN.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create SAN” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “SANs” this will open a new tab titled “SANs”</li>
<li>Within the SANs tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create SAN.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the SAN in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: SAN A, SAN B, Storage SAN, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the SAN in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating Service Infos==
LiveDC tracks what and who will perform service on each piece of hardware through the service infos section. This information is valuable to track for knowing who to contact in the case of scheduled maintenance, an outage, or failure. You will need to gather the following information before creating a service info record:
*Name of the provider (See [[#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] for instructions)
*Type of service that the provider performs
*Start date of the service for the hardware
*End date of the service for the hardware
*Discount program of the service (See [[#Creating a Discount Program|Creating a Discount Program]] for instructions)
*Amount of base monthly cost for the service
[[File:Service Info.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Select the company that does the service for the hardware in the “Provider” drop-down menu or create a new “Company” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select the type of service the company provides for that hardware in the “Service Type” drop-down menu</li>
<li>Select a beginning date of the service in the “Start Date” field</li>
<li>Select an ending date of the service in the “Stop Date” field</li>
<li>Select a discount program for the company in the “Discount Program” drop-down menu or create a new “Discount Program” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Discount Program|Creating a Discount Program]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Enter a monthly cost in the “Base Monthly Cost” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the service in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Service Tier==
In the LiveDC platform, you can track both the requested and actual service tier associated with each piece of hardware. This information is valuable to have when considering recovery times and planning for outages and failures.

[[File:Service Tier.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Service Tier” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Service Tiers” this will open a new tab titled “Service Tiers”</li>
<li>Within the service tiers tab, in the upper left-hand corner click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Service Tier.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the service tier in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Tier 1, Tier 2, Tier 3, Tier 4, etc. </li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the service tier in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Shape==
Shapes in LiveDC refer to the boundaries for an influence that are placed on maps. The shapes for an influence can be either a square or a circle, but can be manipulated to represent different sizes for cabinets, PDUs, UPS equipment, etc. A color will fill the shape when it is corresponded to a legend on the map. You will need to gather the following information before creating a shape:
*Name of the shape you wish to create
*Which basic shape you are wishing to create, circle or square
*Pixel height of the shape
*Scale width of the shape you are creating
*Degrees of rotation of the shape
*Disregard the last 4 items (fill color, fill transparency, border pixels, border color) as they have no impact on the shape at the current time, they are placeholders for future functionality

[[File:Shape.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Shape” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Shapes” this will open a new tab titled “Shapes”</li>
<li>Within the shapes tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Shape.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the shape in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Cabinet, Standard Humidity Return, Standard Temperature, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the shape in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select what kind of shape to create in the “Basic Shape” drop-down menu</li>
<li>Define the height of the shape in the “Pixel Height” field</li>
<li>Enter a value for the width in the “Scale Width” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>This value is in relation to the height, so if you wanted a square that was 10 high x 20 wide, you would enter 10 for height and 2 for scale width</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter a value of rotation for the shape in the “Rotation Degrees” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>This would be used if you wanted to represent a diamond, you would create a square and rotate it 90 degrees</li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a SNMP V1 Template==
An SNMP V1 template is a set of rules for Elicit to follow to collect data points from an asset. Utilizing a web address, read community string, and an OID, Elicit will gather information using these instructions and populate data series for use in maps, LiveTiles, and/or graphs. You will need to gather the following information to create an SNMP V1 template:
*Name of the SNMP V1 template you wish to create
*IP address or URL for Elicit to communicate with
*Specified read community string: default is public
*Specific OID for the piece of information you are trying to gather
*The regular expression to tell Elicit which data you are specifically looking for
*An adjustment expression for the data being returned to the LiveDC platform
*Specific invalid raw values that are typically returned, which can be excluded. Some sensors return a 0 when in error state.

[[File:SNMP V1 Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create SNMP V1 Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “SNMP V1 Templates” this will open a new tab titled “SNMP V1 Templates”</li>
<li>Within the SNMP V1 templates tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create SNMP V1 Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the SNMP V1 template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Chatsworth Humidity (Port 1), Chatsworth Power % 30A (Phase XY), etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the SNMP V1 template in the “Details” field</li>
<li>The parameter format can be left as is and provides a way for you to specify what values you need to enter and what the label should be in the pop-up screen</li>
<li>Enter the Internet Protocol Address in the “Address” field using the defined parameter format</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: { {Address} }</li>
<li>This will prompt the user to enter the specific IP address each time</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter the community string in the “Read Community String” field using the defined parameter format</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>If standard across the organization, you can enter it here and not have to enter it again when creating a data series</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter the object identification number in the “Object Identifier OID” field using the defined parameter format</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Usually very specific for a type of power strip and can be entered here once and used for all power strips of that type</li>
<li>Example: 1.3.6.1.4.1.319.1.2.1.0</li>
</ol>
<li>Define the regular expression in the “Regular Expression” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Leave blank as it is not really leveraged at this time</li>
</ol>
<li>Define the adjustment expression in the “Adjustment Expression” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>This will take the raw value received via SNMP and perform an adjustment on that before sending the database for data normalization</li>
<li>Example: Raw/100</li>
</ol>
<li>Add any raw values that are invalid in the “Invalid Raw Values” field and click the left-hand facing arrow, if applicable</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating Tags==
Tags are what connects almost everything together in LiveDC. Giving a record a tag is very valuable for tracking purposes. Objects with tags are easily found using LiveDC's robust search function. Tags can be used to define location, category of product, type of metric in a data series, client specific tags, or anything else for that matter.

[[File:Tag.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Tag” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Tags” this will open a new tab titled “Tags”</li>
<li>Within the Tags tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Tag.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the tag in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: A Side, Row 10, Server, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the Tag in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Timing Template==
Data series utilize timing templates to tell Elicit how often to collect data from a device. The templates can be configured from polling once every minute to once every month, depending on how important the data is to the end-user.

[[File:Timing Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Timing Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Timing Templates” this will open a new tab titled “Timing Templates”</li>
<li>Within the timing templates tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Timing Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the timing template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: 1 minute, 1 hour, 15 minute, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the timing template in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Define how often the desired poll will take place in the “Poll Period” field</li>
<li>Define how often the desired warning period will last in the “Warning Period” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>This warning period will provide alerts if a data series has not communicated within the specified interval</li>
</ol>
<li>Define when, if at all, the poll will expire in the “Expire Period” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>This expire period will provide alerts if a data series has not communicated within the specified interval and will expire the reading so that it does not show up on maps</li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Trend Template==
A trend template tells Elicit to create a data series based upon the data that is in a separate data series. The new data series is created by choosing either the average, maximum, median, minimum, or sum of the data series being polled.

[[File:Trend Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Trend Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Trend Templates” this will open a new tab titled “Trend Templates”</li>
<li>Within the trend templates tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Trend Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the trend template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Past 3 Months, Past Day, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the trend template in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select what “Operation” you would like to perform on the data from the drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Average, Count, Maximum, Minimum, Median, Sum</li>
</ol>
<li>Define time period in which you would like the data to trend in the “Time Period” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: 30 Days, 1 Month, 24 Hours</li>
</ol>
<li>Snap to Date</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Leave as red x if you do not want to “reset” after each time period (selected in step D)</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>For example if you set the time period to 1 month, this template would include values since the same day during the previous month</li>
<li>Using these options, calculating a trend on the 13th of this month would include values from the 13th of the previous month through the 13th of this month</li>
</ol>
<li>Change to a green check mark if you want to “reset” after each time period (selected in step D)</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>For example if you set the time period to 1 month, this template would “reset” after each month</li>
<li>A Data Series with a Derived Data Start Date of July 1st, 2014 that uses this Trend Template with a 1 Month period and Snap to Date would “reset” on the first of each following month</li>
<li>Using these options, calculating a trend on the 13th of this month would include values from the 1st of this month through the 13th of this month</li>
</ol>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Uploading an Image==
Uploading an image provides flexibility for the user to customize maps specific to one’s data center. Maps are not limited to just a floor plan though, you can upload virtually any image to construct a map that will depict your data.

[[File:Upload Image.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Uploaded Images” this will open a new tab titled “Upload Images”</li>
<li>Within the uploaded images tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Uploaded Image.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the uploaded image in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: DC Room 1, Storage, POD 2, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Choose the file that to upload in the “Image File” section</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the uploaded image in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a URL Scrape Template==
A URL scrape template provides an avenue for Elicit to collect data from a specific web page (a web page with no login requirements). This is valuable for collecting data off of the web for many different reasons. Typically the data series created are based upon intelligent assets in the data center that have a web server serving up an HTTP page. You will need to gather the following information prior to creating a URL scrape template:
*Name of the URL scrape template
*Specific URL you intend to collect the data from
*Regular expression to tell Elicit where to look within all the text on the web page
*Adjustment expression, if you want to format the data as it enters the LiveDC platform
*Any invalid raw values you do not wish to use in the data series

[[File:URL Scrape Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create URL Scrape Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “URL Scrape Templates” this will open a new tab titled “URL Scrape Templates”</li>
<li>Within the URL Scrape Templates tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create URL Scrape Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the URL scrape template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: C:\ Drive, Configuration File Collection, CPU, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the URL scrape template in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Define the format for the parameters of the URL scrape template in the “Parameter Format” fields</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: {{ }}</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter the URL that will be used to gather the data in the “URL Scrape Template” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: File:///c|public/{ {hostname} }{ {counter} }.txt</li>
</ol>
<li>Define the regular expression in the “Regular Expression” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: =(\d*)</li>
</ol>
<li>Define the adjustment expression in the “Adjustment Expression” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: 100-raw</li>
</ol>
<li>Add any raw values that are invalid in the “Invalid Raw Values” field and click the left-hand facing arrow, if applicable</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Virtual Machine Datacenter==
Since there is no physical location to put a virtual machine, creating a virtual machine datacenter is the solution. This is the place for virtual machines to reside. It ties the virtual machine to a logical location for tracking purposes.

[[File:Virtual Machine Data Center.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Virtual Machine” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Virtual Machine Datacenters” this will open a new tab titled “Virtual Machine Datacenters”</li>
<li>Within the Virtual Machine Datacenters tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Virtual Machine Datacenter.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the virtual machine datacenter in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: Virtual Room 1</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the virtual machine datacenter in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Importing from a File==
Importing from a file is the mode of entering large amounts of data records into LiveDC at one time. There is a learning curve to this process, but once this skill is acquired it becomes very useful. Essentially, the user is inputting all of their data records in at the same time and letting LiveDC do the heavy lifting and analysis. Importing from a file is used all across the LiveDC platform, where mostly everything in the software can be imported in a bulk format. You will need to gather the following information prior to importing a file:
*Asset specific information
*Location and physical dimension information regarding the asset
*Data series specific information
*Visual specific information

[[File:Import from File.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and select the button called “Import from File…” this will open a new window titled “Import from File”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Click the “Browse” button to select the document to import into LiveDC</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Once the file is selected, you will have the option to perform analysis on the imported data before committing that information to the database</li>
<li>This helps prevent errors and will give you the results back to ensure all values are correct before actually importing the data</li>
</ol>
<li>To perform an analysis on the document, check the box titled “Perform Analysis Only” to green check mark</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Once you have validated that there are no errors and the data looks correct (denoted by performing analysis and getting all green highlighted columns back in the results spreadsheet)</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Green means you are good to go, there are no errors found</li>
<li>Yellow means warning, something has been updated but you are still ok to upload</li>
<li>Red means error, this item will not be imported into LiveDC</li>
<li>No color or white means that that item is already in the software and there are no changes to it</li>
</ol>
<li>To actually import the file and commit the data into LiveDC, check the box titled “Perform Analysis Only” to change it to the red X</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Import”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Graph Line==
[[File:Graph Line.PNG]]
===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Enter the following information in the “Create Graph Line” window </li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the line in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Physical Servers, Average Temperature, Historical Power, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter a name for the legend of this line in the “Legend Label” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Historical, Max Temp, Physical Servers, etc.</li>
<li>This will appear in the bottom of the graph window</li>
</ol>
<li>Select a color for the graph line in the “Color” section</li>
<li>Select the data series that will provide the data for the graph line in the drop-down menu or create a new data series record by clicking the star button (See [[Create a Data Series#Creating a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Add a futures line to show how the graph line could change in the future by clicking the star button to create a new “Futures” record </li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Enter the name of the graph line future in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Example: 2.5%</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter a label for the legend in the “Legend Label” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Example: 2.5%</li>
</ol>
<li>Define the period of time the graph will extend into the future in the “Time Period” section</li>
<li>Enter the amount of future graph lines to come from the historical data in the “Number Per Period” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Example: 1 Month</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter a formula for the future graph line in the “Formula” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Example: prev*1.05</li>
</ol>
<li>Define a color for the future graph line in the “Color” field</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Add” on the “Create Graph Line” window</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Physical Disk RAID==
A physical disk RAID is a redundant array of independent disks. LiveDC provides an avenue for tracking these disks for each piece of hardware. It is valuable to track each disk for the purposes of asset management.

[[File:Physical Disk RAID.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>In the “Create Physical Disk RAID” window enter the following:</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the physical disk RAID in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: Disk Controller</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the physical disk RAID in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Physical Disk Speed==
LiveDC provides an avenue for tracking these disks for each piece of hardware. It is valuable to track each disk speed for the purposes of asset management.

[[File:Physical Disk Speed.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>In the “Create Physical Disk Speed” window enter the following:</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the physical disk speed in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the physical disk speed in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Exporting a File==
[[File:Export.PNG]]
===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left side), click the desired tab to export records from. To find specific records, utilize LiveDC's robust Search feature (See [[Using LiveDC Search#How to Use Search|How to Use Search]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Once the desired records are in a list format on the screen, click “Export” in the top right corner of the screen</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>A small window titled “Confirm Export” will appear</li>
<li>Click "Export"</li>
<li>LiveDC will compile an Excel spreadsheet of the desired records (these records can be used for the mass import format as a template for what data needs to be entered before importing)</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>To import new records (See [[#Importing from a File|Importing from a File]] section for instructions)</li>
</ol>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Adding a Floor Plan to a Map==
===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>First you need to upload a PNG floor plan into LiveDC (See [[#Uploading an Image|Uploading an Image]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>Once the floor plan is uploaded into LiveDC, On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Layers” this will open a new tab titled “Layers”</li>
<li>Within the layers tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Layer.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the layer in the "Name" Field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Server Room Floor Plan, Data Center Floor Plan</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter additional information about the layer in the "Details" field</li>
<li>For a floor plan layer, we will select "Image" in the "Layer Type" drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>In the drop-down list find the floor plan image you uploaded in step 1</li>
<li>Select "center" from the "Placement" drop-down menu</li>
[[File:Image Layer.JPG]]
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
<li>Next we need to create a Solid Background layer for the map</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Again, in the upper left-hand corner click "Create"</li>
<li>Enter the name of the layer in the "Name" Field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Solid Background</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter additional information about the layer in the "Details" field</li>
<li>For a solid background layer, we will select "Solid" in the "Layer Type" drop-down menu</li>
<li>Select the color you want the background to be</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>We like to use #808080</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter the Transparency Percent</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>We usually do 0%</li>
[[File:Solid Layer.JPG]]
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Visuals” and click “Maps” this will open a new tab titled “Maps”</li>
<li>Within the maps tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Map.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the map in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Operational Model – Cooling, Power %, Operational Cost per Cabinet, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the map in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Define a horizontal size in pixels for the map in the “Width” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>A good rule of thumb is to look at the properties of the image and use those predefined dimensions (usually no more than 1650 pixels)</li>
</ol>
<li>Define a vertical size in pixels for the map in the “Height” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>A good rule of thumb is to look at the properties of the image and use those predefined dimensions (usually no more than 1300 pixels)</li>
</ol>
<li>Add a legend to the map in the section titled “Legends” by selecting from the drop down menu and clicking the left-hand facing arrow or create a new “Legend” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Legend|Creating a Legend]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>In the Map Layers section, click the star button</li>
<li>Select the "Solid Background" layer from the drop-down list</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Change the red x to a green check mark for "Show Dots" and "Show Values"</li>
<li>Do not change line color, text color, background color or background transparency percent</li>
[[File:Solid Map Layer.JPG]]
<li>Click "Add"</li>
</ol>
<li>Again, click the star button in the Map Layers section</li>
<li>Select the floor plan layer you created above from the drop-down list</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Change the red x to a green check mark for "Show Dots"</li>
<li>Do not change line color, text color, background color or background transparency percent</li>
[[File:Floor plan map layer.JPG]]
<li>Click "Add"</li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
<li>You have now created a Map with a floor plan. You will need to add additional layers to the map to see data. (See [[Map#Creating a Map|Creating a Map]] section for instructions)</li>
</ol>
</ol>

File:Export.PNG

2015-03-25T17:55:31Z

Khackenmiller: Khackenmiller uploaded a new version of "File:Export.PNG"

File:Manage-Links.png

2015-03-25T17:50:06Z

Khackenmiller: Khackenmiller uploaded a new version of "File:Manage-Links.png"

Forgot Password

2015-03-25T17:38:32Z

Khackenmiller:

<ol>
<li>Go to: [https://livedc.ncompass-inc.com livedc.ncompass-inc.com]</li>
<li>In pop-up Login window click "Click here if you forgot your password"</li>
[[File:Forgot-Password.PNG]]
<li>Enter your email address and click "Request New Password"</li>
<li>An email will be sent to the email address you entered above that will ask you to click on a link to verify you own the email address and to generate a new password</li>
<li>Once you click the link, another email will be sent with a new password</li>
<li>You can now log-in with the new password</li>
<li>To change your password see the [[Change Password]] section</li>
</ol>

File:Change Password.png

2015-03-25T17:35:36Z

Khackenmiller: Khackenmiller uploaded a new version of "File:Change Password.png"

File:Vitrual Machine.png

2015-03-25T17:33:20Z

Khackenmiller: Khackenmiller uploaded a new version of "File:Vitrual Machine.png"

Create a Site

2015-03-25T17:30:36Z

Khackenmiller: /* Instructions */

__TOC__

==Creating a Site==
A site is the building or location in which the data center(s) resides. We keep record of the site for purposes of having multiple rooms at a site or multiple sites for an account.

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Site” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Assets” and then “Site.” This will open a new tab titled “Sites.”</li>
<li>Within the site tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Site.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the site where the data center room resides in the “Name” line</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>

==Creating a Container (Room)==
A room is the data center or server / network closet or any other room that you want to visualize. The reason that we call it a container is based on the mentality of the asset. Whether it is a cabinet or a piece of hardware, it is contained by a certain set of boundaries. A cabinet is contained by a room; a server is contained by a cabinet; and a server blade is contained by its blade chassis. To make a container, one must define its dimensions prior to adding an asset into it.Before creating a container, you should know the following information:
*Name of the container (room name or cabinet name)
*Left to right dimensions of the container (user defined, but usually in inches)
*Front to back dimensions of the container (user defined, but usually in inches)
*Bottom to top dimensions of the container (user defined, but usually in inches)
*What default view you would like of the container when it is visualized (usually front)
*What scale, left to right, you would like to see when visualizing the container
*What scale, front to back, you would like to see when visualizing the container
*What scale, bottom to top, you would like to see when visualizing the container
*Would you like to see the dimensions when visualizing the container

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Assets” and click on “Room” this will open a new tab titled “Rooms”</li>
<li>Within the room tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Room.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the room in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: DC Room 1, POD 3, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the room in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the “Site” the room is located in from the drop down menu or create a new “Site” record by clicking on the star button (see [[#Creating a Site|Creating a Site]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select the “Container Dimensions” from the drop down menu or create a new “Container Dimension” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Container Dimension|Creating a Container Dimension]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>

==Creating a Container Dimension==
A container in LiveDC is considered a room, a cabinet, or a blade-server. A container is the boundary that contains the hardware. In this case, the container is the room (the white box). A cabinet is contained by a room; a piece of hardware is contained by a cabinet; a blade of a server is contained by a blade chassis. Creating a container in LiveDC is the initial step into being able to visualize your data center and what assets reside in it through the LiveDC platform.
[[File:Container.png]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Container Dimension” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click on “Container Dimensions” this will open a new tab titled “Container Dimensions”</li>
<li>In the container dimensions tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Container Dimensions.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the container in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information in the “Details” section</li>
<li>In the “Left to Right” section, click the star button to create “Container Dimension Item.” In the window titled “Create a Container Dimension Item,” enter the following:</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Enter the first dimension in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Example: 01</li>
<li>If your room is 10 feet “Left to Right,” you would have 10 entries in the white box: 01, 02, 03, etc.</li>
[[File:Left to Right.png]]
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the individual dimension in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
<li>Click the star button again to add the next container dimension item</li>
</ol>
<li>In the “Front to Back” section, click the star button to create “Container Dimension Item.” In the window titled “Create a Container Dimension Item” enter the following:</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Enter the first dimension in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Example: 01</li>
<li>If your room is 8 feet “Front to Back,” you would have 8 entries in the white box: 01, 02, 03, etc.</li>
[[File:Front to Back.png ]]
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the individual dimension in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
<li>Click the star button again to add the next container dimension item</li>
</ol>
<li>In the “Bottom to Top” section, click the star button to create “Container Dimension Item.” In the window titled “Create a Container Dimension Item” enter the following:</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Enter the first dimension in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Example: 01</li>
<li>If your room is 7 feet “Bottom to Top,” you would have 7 entries in the white box: 01, 02, 03, etc.</li>
[[File:Bottom to Top.png]]
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the individual dimension in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
<li>Click the star button again to add the next container dimension item</li>
</ol>
<li>Select the “Default Viewed From” option from the drop-down menu to choose how you would like to view the container (default is Front)</li>
<li>Enter the scale from left to right in the “Left to Right Scale” field to choose how you would like to view the container (as seen in the example above, this value would be 10 if your room was 10 feet wide)</li>
<li>Enter the scale from front to back in the “Front to Back Scale” field to choose how you would like to view the container (as seen in the example above, this value would be 8 if your room was 8 feet deep)</li>
<li>Enter the scale from bottom to top in the “Bottom to Top Scale” field to choose how you would like to view the container (as seen in the example above, this value would be 7 if your room was 7 feet high)</li>
<li>Select if you would like to see left to right units when the image is generated by checking the “Show Left to Right Units” box</li>
<li>Select if you would like to see front to back units when the image is generated by checking the “Show Front to Back Units” box</li>
<li>Select if you would like to see bottom to top units when the image is generated by checking the “Show Bottom to Top Units” box</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>

==Creating Hardware==
Hardware refers to the infrastructure that resides in your data center. The purpose of creating a hardware record is for more than just mapping out what’s there, it’s for lifecycle management, asset tracking, license tracking, space planning, relocations, etc. The information fields to fill in cover a vast array of topics to cover all areas of the hardware. With all of this data kept for one hardware record, you are able to fully utilize the search function for greater knowledge of what resides in your data center through the LiveDC platform.

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Hardware” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Assets” and click “Hardware” this will open a new tab titled “Hardware”</li>
<li>Within the hardware tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Hardware.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter basic information about the hardware in the “Basics” tab</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Enter the name of the hardware in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Examples: Name tag given by Data Center Manager</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the individual hardware in the “Details” field </li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Examples: PID #, Future Migration Date, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter the serial number of the hardware in the “Serial Number” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information or comments about the serial number in the “Serial Number Comment” field </li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Examples: Location of Serial #, damage to Serial #, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter the hardware identification number in the “Asset ID” field</li>
<li>Enter the hardware barcode identification number in the “Barcode ID” field</li>
<li>Select what kind of hardware you are creating in the “Product” drop-down menu or create a new “Product” record using a parent-child relationship by clicking the star button (see [[Extras#Creating a Product|Creating a Product]] section for instructions)</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Examples: HP – Server – ProLiant – DL385 – G6</li>
</ol>
<li>Add tags to the hardware in the “Tags” section from the drop down menu or create a new “Tag” record by clicking the star button (see [[Extras#Creating Tags|Creating Tags]] section for instructions))</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Example: Row 1, Cabinet 2, Network, Business Unit #1, etc.</li>
</ol>
</ol>
<li>Enter information about the position of the hardware in the “Position” tab</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Select how the hardware is contained in the “Contained by Type” drop-down menu using the following options:</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Site - A room would be within a site</li>
<li>Room - A cabinet, PDU, UPS, or CRCU would be within a room</li>
<li>Hardware - A server would be within a rack and a blade server within a blade chassis</li>
</ol>
<li>Select the hardware container that is containing the hardware in the “Hardware” drop-down menu or create a new “Hardware Container” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Container Dimension|Creating a Container Dimension]] section for instructions)</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>If the record I was creating was a server, I would select the containing rack and position the server within the rack appropriately</li>
</ol>
<li>Select the position of the left of the hardware in the “Left” drop-down menu</li>
<li>Select the position of the right of the hardware in the “Right” drop-down menu</li>
<li>Select the position of the front of the hardware in the “Front” drop-down menu</li>
<li>Select the position of the back of the hardware in the “Back” drop-down menu</li>
<li>Select the position of the bottom of the hardware in the “Bottom” drop-down menu</li>
<li>Select the position of the top of the hardware in the “Top” drop-down menu</li>
<li>Select the container dimensions from the drop down menu or click the star button to create a new “Container Dimension” record (see [[#Creating a Container Dimension|Creating a Container Dimension]] section for instructions)</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>In this example, you would select the container dimension associated with the rack that the server is being placed in</li>
</ol>
</ol>
<li>Enter information about the components of the hardware in the “Components” tab</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Enter how much memory the hardware has in the “Memory in GB” field</li>
<li>Enter how many logical disk volumes the hardware has in the “Number of Logical Disk Volumes” field</li>
<li>Enter how many network interfaces the hardware has in the “Number of Network Interfaces” field</li>
<li>Enter how many management interfaces the hardware has in the “Number of Management Interfaces” field</li>
<li>Enter how many CPUs the hardware has in the “Number of CPUs” field</li>
<li>Select the type of CPU for the hardware in the “CPU Type” drop-down menu or create a new “CPU Type” record by clicking the star button (see [[Extras#Creating a CPU Type|Creating a CPU Type]] section for instructions)</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Examples: 32 bit or 64 bit</li>
</ol>
<li>Select the components of the hardware in the “Components” by selecting from the drop down menu and click the left-hand facing arrow or create a new “Component” record by clicking the star button (see [[Extras#Creating a Component|Creating a Component]] section for instructions)</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Examples: CPU, Hard drive, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Add physical disk information in the “Physical Disk” section by clicking on the star button to create a new “Physical Disk” record. In the “Create Physical Disk” window enter the following:</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Enter the amount of physical disks of the hardware in the “Quantity” field</li>
<li>Enter the amount of capacity the physical disk obtains in the “Capacity in GB” field</li>
<li>Select the physical disk RAID that is utilized by the hardware in the “RAID” drop-down menu or create a new “Physical Disk RAID” record by clicking the star button (see [[Extras#Creating a Physical Disk RAID|Creating a Physical Disk RAID]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>Select the physical disk speed that is utilized by the hardware in the “Speed” drop-down menu or create a new “Physical Disk Speed” record by clicking the star button (see [[Extras#Creating a Physical Disk Speed|Creating a Physical Disk Speed]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
<li>Add SAN connections information in the “SAN Connections” section by clicking on the star button to create a new “SAN Connection” record. In the “Create SAN Connection” window enter the following: </li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Enter the amount of SAN connections the hardware obtains in the “Number of Connections” field</li>
<li>Select the SAN in the “SAN” drop-down menu or create a new “SAN” record by clicking the star button (see [[Extras#Creating a SAN|Creating a SAN]] for instructions)</li>
<li>Enter the amount of capacity the SAN connection has in the “Capacity in GB” field</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
<li>Add power plug information in the “Power Plug” section by clicking the star button to create a new “Power Plug” record. In the “Create Power Plug” window enter the following: </li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Enter the amount of power plugs for the hardware in the “Quantity” field</li>
<li>Select the type of power plug in the “Plug Type” drop-down menu or create a new “Plug Type” record by clicking the star button (see [[Extras#Creating a Power Plug Type|Creating a Power Plug Type]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Enter the amount of watts observed in the “Observed Watts” field</li>
<li>Enter the amount of watts estimated in the “Estimated Watts” field</li>
<li>Enter the amount of watts on the nameplate of the hardware in the “Nameplate Watts” field</li>
<li>Select an ampere for the power plug in the “Ampere” drop-down menu or create a new “Ampere” record by clicking the star button (see [[Extras#Creating a Power Plug Ampere|Creating a Power Plug Ampere]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select a backup source for the power plug in the “Backup Source” drop-down menu or create a new “Backup Source” record by clicking the star button (see [[Extras#Creating a Power Plug Backup Source|Creating a Power Plug Backup Source]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select a circuit for the power plug in the “Circuit” drop-down menu or create a new “Circuit” record by clicking the star button (see [[Extras#Creating a Power Plug Circuit|Creating a Power Plug Circuit]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select a voltage for the power plug in the “Voltage” drop-down menu or create a new “Voltage” record by clicking the star button (see [[Extras#Creating a Power Plug Voltage|Creating a Power Plug Voltage]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
<li>Enter financial information about the hardware in the “Financial” tab</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Add information about accounting shares for the hardware in the “Accounting Shares” section by clicking on the star button to create a new “Accounting Share” record. In the “Create Accounting Share” window enter the following:</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Select a business unit from the “Business Unit” drop-down menu or create a new “Business Unit” record by clicking the star button (see [[Extras#Creating a Business Unit|Creating a Business Unit]] section for instructions)</li>
<ol type="1">
<li>Examples: Accounting, Production, Marketing, IT, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter in the desired amount of shares into the “Shares” field</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
<li>Select the type of ownership in the “Ownership Type” drop-down menu</li>
<li>Select the start date of the ownership of the hardware in the “Ownership Start” field</li>
<li>Select the stop date of the ownership for the hardware in the “Ownership Stop” field</li>
<li>Select where the hardware was procured from in the “Procured From” drop-down menu or create a new “Procured From” record by clicking the star button (see [[Extras#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Add payment information about the hardware in the “Payments” section by clicking on the star button to create a new “Payments” record. In the “Create Payment” window enter the following: </li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Enter the date of when the payment for the hardware is to be paid in the “Date” field)</li>
<li>Enter the amount of the payment in the “Amount” field</li>
<li>Select the type of payment in the “Type” drop-down menu or create a new “Payment Type” record by clicking the star button (see [[Extras#Creating a Payment Type|Creating a Payment Type]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select who is making the payment in the “Paid By” drop-down menu or create a “Paid By” record by click the star button (see [[Extras#Creating a Business Unit|Creating a Business Unit]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select to whom the payment is going to in the “Paid To” drop-down menu or create a “Paid To” record by clicking the star button (see [[Extras#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Add tags to the payment in the section titled “Tags” by selecting from the drop down menu and click the left-hand facing arrow or create a new “Tag” record by clicking the star button (see [[Extras#Creating Tags|Creating Tags]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the payment in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
<li>Enter service information about the hardware in the “Service” tab</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Select the requested service tier for the hardware in the “Requested Service Tier” drop-down menu or create a new “Requested Service Tier” record by clicking the star button (see [[Extras#Creating a Service Tier|Creating a Service Tier]] section for instructions)</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Examples: Tier 1, Tier 2, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Select the actual service tier for the hardware in the “Actual Service Tier” drop-down menu or create a new “Actual Service Tier” record by clicking the star button (see [[Extras#Creating a Service Tier|Creating a Service Tier]] section for instructions)</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Examples: Tier 3, Tier 4, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Add information regarding the service for the hardware in the “Service Infos” by clicking on the star button to create a new “Service Info” record. In the “Create Service Info” window enter the following: </li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Select the company that does the service for the hardware in the “Provider” drop-down menu or create a new “Company” record by clicking the star button (see [[Extras#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select the type of service the company provides for that hardware in the “Service Type” drop-down menu</li>
<li>Select a beginning date of the service in the “Start Date” field</li>
<li>Select an ending date of the service in the “Stop Date” field</li>
<li>Select a discount program for the company in the “Discount Program” drop-down menu or create a new “Discount Program” record by clicking the star button (see [[Extras#Creating a Discount Program|Creating a Discount Program]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Enter a monthly cost in the “Base Monthly Cost” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the service in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
<li>Select information about business units for the hardware service in the “Business Units” drop-down menu and click the left-hand facing arrow or create a new “Business Unit” record by clicking the star button (see [[Extras#Creating a Business Unit|Creating a Business Unit]] section for instructions)</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Examples: Accounting, Marketing, Production, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Add contact information for the hardware in the “Contact” section by clicking on the star button to create a new contact record. In the “Create Contact Entry” window enter the following:</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Enter a “Type” by selecting from the drop down menu or by clicking on the star button (see [[Extras#Creating a Contact Method Type|Creating a Contact Method Type]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>Enter a “Contact” by selecting from the drop down menu or by clicking on the star button (see [[Extras#Creating a Contact|Creating a Contact]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
<li>Enter information about the operating system that is running on your hardware in the “Operating System” tab</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>If the hardware does not have an operating system, leave the box with the “Red X” and click “Create”</li>
<li>If the hardware has an operating system, click the check box to green and open the OS field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Enter the name of the operating system in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="1">
<li>Examples: Microsoft Windows Server, Linux, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information of the operating system in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the operating system’s software in the “Operating System Software” drop-down menu or create a new “Operating System Software” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating Software|Creating Software]] section for instructions)</li>
<ol type="1">
<li>Examples: Exchange, Web Services, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter the license code information for the operating system in the “Operating System License Code” field</li>
<li>Add alias information of the operating system in the “Aliases” section by entering the aliases information in the blank field and clicking the left-hand facing arrow</li>
<ol type="1">
<li>Examples: Test Server, Exchange-Corp, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Add any additional software that is used with the operating system in the “Other Software” section by clicking on the star button to create a new “Operating System Instance Software” record. In the “Create Operating System Instance Software” window enter the following:</li>
<ol type="1">
<li>Enter the “Software” from the drop down menu or by clicking the star button to create a new “Software” record (see [[#Creating Software|Creating Software]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Enter the software license code</li>
<li>Enter the number of licenses consumed</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
<li>Select which domains the operating system utilizes in the “Domains” drop-down menu and click the left-hand facing arrow or create a new “Domain” record by clicking the star button (see [[Extras#Creating a Domain|Creating a Domain]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Add information for what IP addresses the operating system uses in the “Addresses” section by clicking on the star button to create a new addresses record. In the “Create Operating System Instance Address” enter the following:</li>
<ol type="1">
<li>Enter the “Address Type” from the drop down menu or by clicking the star button to create a new “Address Type” record (see [[Extras#Creating Address Type|Creating Address Type]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Enter the address of the operating system in the “Address” field</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Examples: IP Address, Location Specific IP Address, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter the install date of the operating system in the “Install Date” field</li>
</ol>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create” </li>
<li>You now have a fully populated hardware record with all the detailed information surrounding that asset</li>
</ol>
</ol>

==Creating Software==
Software records are used to help ensure the business stays up-to-date with payments and licensing with all vendors. The information that LiveDC tracks is focused on the software version, recurring payments for that software, software licensing, etc. The purpose behind software tracking is to streamline the information gathering process to provide an understanding of what the company owns and/or when payments are due with up-to-date data. Information you will need to fill out this section:
*Software name
*Operating system information
*Software version
*Contacts for the specific software
*The company that the software is owned by
*The company where the software was obtained from
*Any reoccurring costs for the software
*The number of licenses the software has
*The beginning and end date of that license
*Any payments that were made to obtain the software
[[File:Software.png]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Software” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Assets” and click “Software” this will open a new tab titled “Software”</li>
<li>Within the software tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Software.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the software in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Adobe, Microsoft, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the software in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Choose whether the software is an operating system or not. If yes, check the box to see the green check mark. If no, leave the box with the red x</li>
<li>Enter information regarding the version of the software in the “Version” field</li>
<li>Add contact information for the software in the “Contact” section by clicking on the star button to create a new contact record. In the “Create Contact Entry” window enter the following: </li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Enter a “Type” by selecting from the drop down menu or by clicking on the star button to create a new “Contact Method Type” record (see [[Extras#Creating a Contact Method Type|Creating a Contact Method Type]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>Enter a “Contact” by selecting from the drop down menu or by clicking on the star button to create a new “Contact” record (see [[Extras#Creating a Contact|Creating a Contact]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
<li>Select the company that is associated with the software in the “Software Company” drop-down menu or create a new “Software Company” record by clicking the star button (see [[Extras#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select the company that is associated with the software procurement in the “Procurement Company” drop-down menu or create a new “Procurement Company” record by clicking the star button (see [[Extras#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select the time period for the recurring cost for the software in the “Recurring Cost Interval” drop-down menu</li>
<li>Enter the estimated cost of the recurring payment for the software in the “Recurring Cost Estimate” field</li>
<li>Enter the number of licenses for the software in the “Number of Licenses” field</li>
<li>Select the start date of the license for the software in the “License Begin Date” field</li>
<li>Select the stop date of the license for the software in the “License End Date” field</li>
<li>Add tags to the software in the “Tags” section by selecting from the drop down menu and clicking the left-hand facing arrow or create a new “Tag” record by clicking on the star button (see [[Extras#Creating Tags|Creating Tags]] section for instructions)</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: AIX, Linux, Windows, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Add payment information for the software in the “Payments” section by clicking the star button to create a new payment record. In the “Create Payment” window enter the following:</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Enter the date of when the payment for the software is to be paid in the “Date” field</li>
<li>Enter the amount of the payment in the “Amount” field</li>
<li>Select the type of payment in the “Type” drop-down menu or create a new “Payment Type” record by clicking the star button (see [[Extras#Creating a Payment Type|Creating a Payment Type]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select who is making the payment in the “Paid By” drop-down menu or create a new “Paid By” record by click the star button (see [[Extras#Creating a Business Unit|Creating a Business Unit]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select to whom the payment is going to in the “Paid To” drop-down menu or create a new “Paid To” record by clicking the star button (see [[Extras#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Add tags to the payment in the section titled “Tags” by selecting from the drop down menu and clicking the left-hand facing arrow or create a new “Tag” record by clicking the star button (see [[Extras#Creating Tags|Creating Tags]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the payment in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>

==Creating a Virtual Machine Asset==
A virtual machine record in LiveDC refers to the virtual servers that reside in your data center. Tracking these virtual machines is a valuable reference when trying to determine how virtual workload is dispersed amongst the physical hosts that house the clusters. You will need to gather the following information before you are able to create a virtual machine in LiveDC:
*The name of the virtual machine
*Allocated CPU in MHz
*Maximum and allocated memory for the virtual machine
*If the virtual machine is dedicated to a data center, and if so, which one
*What type of host is the virtual machine utilizing, either in a cluster or to a specific piece of hardware, and the name of the cluster or hardware
[[File:Vitrual Machine.png]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Assets” and click “Virtual Machines” this will open a new tab titled “Virtual Machines”</li>
<li>Within the virtual machines tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Virtual Machine.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter basic information about the virtual machine in the “Basics” tab</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Enter the name of the virtual machine in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the virtual machine in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Enter the number of CPUs allocated to the virtual machine in the “Allocated CPU in MHz” field</li>
<li>Enter the capacity of memory that is available for the virtual machine in the “Maximum Memory in MB” field</li>
<li>Enter the MB of memory that has been allocated to the virtual machine in the “Allocated Memory in MB”</li>
<li>Select the data center that the virtual machine is tied to in the “Datacenter” drop-down menu or create a new “Datacenter” record by clicking the star button (see [[Extras#Creating a Virtual Machine Datacenter|Creating a Virtual Machine Datacenter]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select the type of host in the “Host Type” drop-down menu/li>
<ol type="A">
<li>If you choose “Dedicated”, select the hardware that is dedicated to that virtual machine in the “Dedicated Hardware” drop-down menu or create a new “Dedicated Hardware” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating Hardware|Creating Hardware]] section for instructions) </li>
<ol type="1">
<li>Examples: Data Center 1, North Campus, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>If you choose cluster, select the tag for the cluster in the “Cluster Tag” drop-down menu or create a new “Cluster Tag” record by clicking the star button (see [[Extras#Creating Tags|Creating Tags]] section for instructions) </li>
<ol type="1">
<li>Examples: Prod SQL CL, Prod VM CL, etc.</li>
</ol>
</ol>
<li>Add tags to the virtual machine in the “Tags” section by selecting from the drop down menu and clicking the left-hand facing arrow or create a new “Tag” record by clicking on the star button (see [[Extras#Creating Tags|Creating Tags]] section for instructions)</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Examples: Cluster, Virtual Machine Datacenter, Blade Server, etc.</li>
</ol>
</ol>
<li>Enter operating system information about the virtual machine in the “Operating System” tab</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Enter the name of the operating system in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Examples: Microsoft Windows Server, Linux, Unix, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information of the operating system in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the operating system’s software in the “Operating System Software” drop-down menu or create a new “Operating System Software” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating Software|Creating Software]] section for instructions)</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Examples: Exchange, Web Services, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter the license code information for the operating system in the “Operating System License Code” field</li>
<li>Add alias information of the operating system in the “Aliases” section by entering the aliases information in the blank field and clicking the left-hand facing arrow</li>
<li>Add any additional software that is used with the operating system in the “Other Software” section by clicking on the star button to create a new “Operating System Instance Software” record. In the “Create Operating System Instance Software” window enter the following:</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Enter the “Software” from the drop down menu or by clicking the star button to create a new “Software” record (see [[#Creating Software|Creating Software]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Enter the software license code</li>
<li>Enter the number of licenses consumed</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
<li>Select which domains the operating system utilizes in the “Domains” drop-down menu and clicking the left-hand facing arrow or create a new “Domain” record by clicking the star button (see [[Extras#Creating a Domain|Creating a Domain]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Add information for what addresses the operating system uses in the “Addresses” section by clicking the star button to create a new “Address” record. In the “Create Operating System Instance Address” enter the following: </li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Enter the “Address Type” from the drop down menu or by clicking the star button to create a new “Address Type” record (see [[Extras#Creating Address Type|Creating Address Type]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Enter the address of the operating system in the “Address” field</li>
<ol type="1">
<li>Examples: IP Address, Location Specific IP Address, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
<ol type="1">
<li>Examples: IP Address, Location specific IP Address, etc.</li>
</ol>
</ol>
<li>Enter the install data of the operating system in the “Install Date” field</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>

File:LiveView-Plus.png

2015-03-25T17:29:13Z

Khackenmiller: Khackenmiller uploaded a new version of "File:LiveView-Plus.png"

File:LiveView.png

2015-03-25T17:27:38Z

Khackenmiller: Khackenmiller uploaded a new version of "File:LiveView.png"

File:LiveControl.PNG

2015-03-25T17:22:20Z

Khackenmiller: Khackenmiller uploaded a new version of "File:LiveControl.PNG"

File:LiveControl.PNG

2015-03-25T17:20:56Z

Khackenmiller: Khackenmiller uploaded a new version of "File:LiveControl.PNG"

File:LiveControl.PNG

2015-03-25T17:20:05Z

Khackenmiller: Khackenmiller uploaded a new version of "File:LiveControl.PNG"

File:Map-Layers.png

2015-03-25T17:17:37Z

Khackenmiller: Khackenmiller uploaded a new version of "File:Map-Layers.png"

File:Edit-Map.png

2015-03-25T17:14:52Z

Khackenmiller: Khackenmiller uploaded a new version of "File:Edit-Map.png"

File:Map-Generate.PNG

2015-03-25T17:10:39Z

Khackenmiller: Khackenmiller uploaded a new version of "File:Map-Generate.PNG"

File:Legend.png

2015-03-25T17:07:50Z

Khackenmiller: Khackenmiller uploaded a new version of "File:Legend.png"

File:Layer.png

2015-03-25T17:04:39Z

Khackenmiller: Khackenmiller uploaded a new version of "File:Layer.png"

File:Notification.png

2015-03-25T16:51:53Z

Khackenmiller: Khackenmiller uploaded a new version of "File:Notification.png"

Map

2015-02-24T16:59:30Z

Khackenmiller:

Extras

2015-02-10T19:02:54Z

Khackenmiller: /* Instructions */

__TOC__

==Creating Accounting Shares==
An accounting share is a way to track what department or function of the business owns or is making payments for a piece of hardware. You will need to know the following information to create an accounting share:
*Business unit or business department having ownership of the device
*Number of shares that business unit owns
[[File:Accounting Share.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Select a business unit from the “Business Unit” drop-down menu or create a new “Business Unit” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Business Unit|Creating a Business Unit]] section for instructions)</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Examples: Accounting, Production, Marketing, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter the desired amount of shares into the “Shares” field</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating Address Type==
Creating an address type is required for each operating system, usually defined as IPv4 or IPv6. The address type is not considered the actual address.You will need to know the following information before creating an address type:
*Whether the address type is an IP-V4 or IP-V6
[[File:Address Type.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Address Type” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Address Types” this will open a new tab titled “Address Types”</li>
<li>In the address types tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Address Type”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the address type in the field titled “Name”</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: IP Address, IP Address (location-based), etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the address type in the “Details” field</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Business Unit==
A business unit or business department is a great way to track ownership or affected areas of the organization that touch a specific piece of hardware, software, or virtual machine. A business unit uses the parent-child relationship like a hardware product. This can be utilized for accounting and tracking purposes of the asset. You will need to gather the following information when creating a business unit:
*Name of the business unit or function you wish to create
*A parent business unit, if any
[[File:Business Unit.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Business Unit” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Business Unit” this will open a new tab titled “Business units”</li>
<li>Within the business unit tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Business Unit” or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, service tab in the business unit section click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the company name in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Target, Best Buy, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the name of the company in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the business unit tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, service tab in the business unit section click the star button</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the department in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Marketing, Accounting, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the department name in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the company name in the “Parent Business Unit” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Target, Best Buy, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Company==
Creating a company is a way to distinguish the physical history and payment history of an asset in the event of a merger and acquisition or any other event which would involve transfer of ownership. You will need to know the following information before creating a company:
*Name of the company you wish to create
[[File:Company.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Company” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Companies” this will open a new tab titled “Companies”</li>
<li>Within the companies tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Company.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the company name in the field titled “Name”</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the company in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Component==
Components tracking is a great way to record what is contained within a specific piece of hardware you are creating. The component information can give you insight into how much of a resource you are utilizing and consuming in your data center. It tracks everything from power to memory to peripheral cards inserted into the back of your servers. You will need to gather the following information to create a component record for your hardware:
*Memory in GB for the hardware
*Number of logical disk volumes
*Number of network interfaces for the hardware
*Number of management interfaces for the hardware
*Number of CPU’s in the hardware
*Other components, utilizing the parent-child relationship, located within the hardware
*Physical disks
*SAN connections
*Number and type of power plugs
[[File:Component.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Component” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Components” this will open a new tab titled “Components”</li>
<li>In the components tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Component.” If you are in the “Create Hardware” window, component tab in the component section click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the peripheral name of the components in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Network Card, PCIE Card, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the peripheral in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the components tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, component tab in the component section click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the ports in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: port numbers</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the ports in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the peripheral in the “Parent Component” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Network Card, PCIE Card, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Contact==
A contact is utilized when referring to an asset, specifically a piece of hardware. This is the organization and person you would contact if the asset has a disruption of service or experiences a failure or outage. You will need to gather the following information when creating a contact:
*Type of contact; electrician, service provider, maintenance, etc.
*Name of the contact; first and last name, company the contact works for, and contact method (see [[#Creating a Contact Method Type|Creating a Contact Method Type]] for instructions)
[[File:Contact.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Contact” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Contacts” this will open a new tab titled “Contacts”</li>
<li>Within the contact tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Contact”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the first name of the contact in the “First Name” field</li>
<li>Enter the last name of the contact in the “Last Name” field</li>
<li>Select which company the contact is associated with in the “Company” drop-down menu or create a new “Company” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Add a contact method by clicking the star button. In the “Create Contact Method” window enter the following:</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Enter a “Type” from the drop down menu or by clicking on the star button to create a new “Type” record. (see [[#Creating a Contact Method Type|Creating a Contact Method Type]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>Enter a phone number or email for the contact method in the “Value” field </li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information for the contact in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Contact Method Type==
A contact method type provides the means to reach the point of contact for an asset, typically for hardware. The contact method type refers to the email or phone number used to get in touch with the person. You will need to gather the following information when creating a contact method type:
*What mode of contact is preferred for reaching this person; email, SMS, mobile phone, etc.
[[File:Contact Method Type.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Contact Method Type” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Contact Method Types” this will open a new tab titled “Contact Method Types”</li>
<li>Within the contact method type tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Contact Method Type.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the contact method type in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the contact method type in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a CPU Type==
[[File:CPU Type.PNG]]
===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create CPU Type” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “CPU Types” this will open a new tab titled “CPU Types”</li>
<li>Within the CPU type tab, in the upper left-hand corner click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create CPU Type.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the CPU type in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Intel Xeon E5450</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the CPU type in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Enter the speed of the CPU type in the field “Speed in GHz”</li>
<li>Enter how many physical cores the CPU type has in the “Physical Cores” field</li>
<li>Enter how many virtual cores the CPU type has in the “Virtual Cores” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Discount Program==
A discount program is used when referring to the service of an asset, typically hardware. Creating a discount program record is valuable for tracking what service company your dollars are going to and what deal you are receiving from a discount standpoint. You will need to gather the following information before creating a discount program record:
*Name of the discount program, for tracking purposes
*Percentage of the discount program, to know what deal has been provided by the service company
[[File:Discount Program.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Discount Program” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Discount Program” this will open a new tab titled “Discount Programs”</li>
<li>Within the discount program tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Discount Program.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the discount program in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the discount program in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Enter a discount percent in the field called “Percent”</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Domain==
A domain record refers to a collection of devices within your network, similar to contoso.com, and helps delineate between internal devices and devices that reside in other domains. The LiveDC platform will track what domains are being utilized by which operating systems and provide ease of searching this information. You will need to gather the following information before creating a domain record:
*Name of the domain record you wish to create
[[File:Domain.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Domain” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Domains” this will open a new tab titled “Domains”</li>
<li>Within the domains tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Domain.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the domain in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: company_xyz.local</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the domain in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating an Influence==
An influence is the way to represent what is happening to a specific data series in the data center on a map. The influence is shown by using a color scale, known as a legend, to provide knowledge around the objects real-time state. The influence’s color is affected by the data series it is connected to. As the data in the data series changes, so does the color of the influence, based upon the legend associated with the map. You will need to gather the following information before creating an influence:
*Specific data series that you would like to attach to the influence (see [[Create a Data Series#Creating a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] for instructions)
*Map that you would like to place the influence on (see [[Create Map#Creating a Map|Creating a Map]] for instructions)
*Layer of the map you will be placing the influence on (see [[#Creating a Layer|Creating a Layer]] for instructions)
*Influence template that you will be using to give the influence boundaries, shape, and scale (see [[#Creating an Influence Template|Creating an Influence Template]] for instructions)
[[File:Influence.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Layers” this will open a new tab titled “Layers List”</li>
<li>Select the desired layer to place influences on from the layers list and click “Manage Influences.” This will open a new tab titled “Manage Influences.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Within the manage influence tab a list titled “Influence List,” where all of the influences for the desired layer will reside, will be open. Click “Create” to make a new influence.</li>
<li>A new window will open up titled “Create Influence”</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Select the data series you wish to correspond with the influence in the “Data Series” drop-down menu or create a new “Data Series” record by clicking the star button (see [[Create a Data Series#Creating a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select an influence template to define the parameters for the influence in the “Template” drop-down menu or create a new “Influence Template” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating an Influence Template|Creating an Influence Template]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Define the location of the influence horizontally in the “X Coordinate” field (this can be adjusted at a later time, default: 1)</li>
<li>Define the location of the influence vertically in the “Y Coordinate” field (this can be adjusted at a later time, default: 1)</li>
<li>Select the type of link for the influence in the “Link Type” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>If data series, select the corresponding data series or create a new “Data Series” record by clicking the star button (see [[Create a Data Series#Creating a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>If hardware visual, select the corresponding hardware or create a new “Hardware” record by clicking the star button (see [[Create a Site#Creating Hardware|Creating Hardware]] section for instructions)</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
<li>To edit the position of an influence, either edit the specific influence from the influence list or from the map (see [[#Editing a Map Influence|Editing a Map Influence]] for more information)</li>
</ol>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating an Influence Template==
An influence template provides the visual boundaries that are placed around an influence for a map. Basically, the template will tell the influence what shape to take, if the pixels are going to fade at the edges, and the algorithm to follow in reference to what you are trying to display (usually will be predefined “Power2”). You will need to gather the following information before you create an influence template:
*Name of the influence template you wish to create
*What shape you are intending your influence to have (See [[#Creating a Shape|Creating a Shape]] for instructions)
*Fade on the influence, basically if you want it to have hard edges or softer edges
[[File:Influence Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Influence Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Influence Templates” this will open a new tab titled “Influence Templates”</li>
<li>Within the influence templates tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Influence Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the influence template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Standard Humidity, Standard Temperature, Standard Power kW, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the influence template in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Select what shape you want to make the influence template in the drop-down menu called “Shapes” or create a new “Shape” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Shape|Creating a Shape]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>Select the “Algorithm” to be applied to the shape from the drop down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Default for temperature / humidity: Power2</li>
<li>Default for power: Constant</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter a value for the “Fade Pixels” of the shape if you want soft edges when two influences collide</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>The value is the number of pixels at the edge of the shape that will be softened</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Legend==
A legend is how to define the value boundaries for an influence to represent colors. The legend is seen at the bottom of a map to visually display the value range in a color scale. It all works as follows: First a data series produces a numerical value and pushes that number to the associated influence, next the influence template will give that numerical value a shape boundary, within the influence template boundary the numerical value will correspond with the legend to produce a certain color value for representation of the influence on the map. You will need to gather the following information to create a legend:
*Name of the legend you wish to create
*Number format template that corresponds with the numerical value you wish to display
*Define a low value for the legend
*Define a high value for the legend
*Define the number of hints you wish the legend to have (hints are the number of values displayed on the legend)
*Choose a gradient file to correspond with your legend
[[File:Legend.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Legend” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Legends” this will open a new tab titled “Legends”</li>
<li>Within the legend tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Legend.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the legend in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Data Center Power, Cost Per Cabinet, Data Center Temps, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the legend in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the number format template to be used with the legend in the “Number Format Template” drop-down menu or create a new “Number Format Template” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Number Format Template|Creating a Number Format Template]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>Enter value of lowest point in the “Low Value” field</li>
<li>Enter value of highest point in the “High Value” field</li>
<li>Enter a number of desired hints in the “# of Hints” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>If you want to represent 0-10, you would select 11 for number of hints</li>
</ol>
<li>Select a gradient file to use for the legend in the “New Gradient File” section</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Layer==
A layer is an aspect of the map that serves a very important purpose. The first layer is the solid background, which is the foundational piece for creating any map. The second layer is the layer on which the influences sit, which is usually placed in between the solid background and the floor plan layer. The third layer is a transparent floor plan layout of the data center; the top-down view of what infrastructure (cabinets, PDU’s, UPS, etc.) is located within the room. Lastly, you can add a link layer which allows you to click on the map and link out to either a URL, data series, graph, map, LiveTile, or a piece of hardware directly. This order of layering provides the capabilities to show a floor layout, 9-box model, risk assessment, etc. and the abilities to place influences on top to paint a clear picture of real-time metrics in your data center. You will need to gather the following information to create a layer:
*Name of the layer you wish to create
*What type of layer that is to be created; basic influence, image, link, or solid
*Legend you wish to correspond to the influences that will be placed on the map (see [[#Creating a Legend|Creating a Legend]] for instructions)
[[File:Create Layer.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Layer” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Layers” this will open a new tab titled “Layers”</li>
<li>Within the layers tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Layer.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the layer in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Floor Plan, Cost Per Cabinet, Humidity % 10 inch, Solid Background, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the layer in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the type of layer desired in the “Layer Type” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>If “Basic Influence," choose which legend to use in the “Legend” drop-down menu or create a new “Legend” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Legend|Creating a Legend]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>If “Image," select the appropriate image from the drop-down menu or create a new “Image” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Uploading an Image|Uploading an Image]] section for instructions. Select the placement of the image from the drop-down menu.</li>
<li>If “Link," no additional information is needed</li>
<li>If “Solid," define the desired color and percentage of transparency in the “Color” and “Transparency Percentage” fields</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create,” you can now view your layer in the Layers List</li>
<li>If you created a "Link Layer" see the next steps in section [[#Attaching a Link to a Link Layer|Attaching a Link to a Link Layer]]</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Attaching a Link to a Link Layer==

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Layers” this will open a new tab titled “Layers”</li>
<li>Select the desired link layer you want to add a link to from the “Layer List”. If the link layer is not created see [[#Creating a Layer|Creating a Layer]] section for instructions</li>
<li>On the bottom half of the screen, click "Manage Links"</li>
[[File:Manage-Links.png]]
<ol type="a">
<li>In the new tab,(in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Link”</li>
[[File:Create Link.JPG]]
<ol type="i">
<li>Enter the name of the link in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Example: Google, Facebook, Avg Cold Aisle Data Series, Executive Summary Map</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional details about the link in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the shape you want the link to have on the map from the drop down menu or create a new “Shape” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Shape|Creating a Shape]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Define the location of the Link horizontally in the “X Coordinate” field (this can be adjusted at a later time, default: 1) (see [[Create Map#Moving an Influence or Link Location on a Map|Moving an Influence or Link Location on a Map]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Define the location of the Link vertically in the “Y Coordinate” field (this can be adjusted at a later time, default: 1) (see [[Create Map#Moving an Influence or Link Location on a Map|Moving an Influence or Link Location on a Map]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select the type of link for the link layer in the “Link Type” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>If URL, enter URL into the text box</li>
<li>If data Series, select the corresponding data series from the drop-down menu or create a new data series record by clicking the star button (see [[Create a Data Series#Creating a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>If graph, select the corresponding graph from the drop-down menu or create a new graph record by clicking on the star button (see [[Create Graph#Creating a Graph|Creating a Graph]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>If hardware, select the corresponding hardware from the drop-down menu or create a new hardware record by clicking on the star button (see [[Create a Site#Creating Hardware|Creating Hardware]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>If LiveTile, select the corresponding LiveTile from the drop-down menu or create a new LiveTile record by clicking on the star button (see [[Create LiveTile#Creating a LiveTile|Creating a LiveTile]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>If Map, select the corresponding Map from the drop-down menu or create a new Map record by clicking on the star button (see [[Create Map#Creating a Map|Creating a Map]] section for instructions) </li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
<li>You have just successfully added a link to the specified layer.</li>
<li>To add your new layer to a map, see section [[Create Map#Applying a Layer to a Map|Applying a Layer to a Map]] for instructions </li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Number Format Template==
A number format template takes a raw number value and changes it into usable and contextual metrics. One would typically use this when formatting from Amps to kW or a whole number to a dollar amount or percentage, but it is not limited to that. You will need to gather the following information to create a number format template:
*Name of the number format template you wish to create
*Specified type of number format template; either simple, currency, or java decimal pattern
[[File:Number Format Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Number Format Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and select the button called “Number Format Templates” this will open a new tab titled “Number Format Templates”</li>
<li>Within the number format templates tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Number Format Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the number format template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Fahrenheit (rounded), Percent, kWh, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the number format template in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the type of number format template in the “Type” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>If “Simple” type, define Prefix and Suffix</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Prefix: $, etc.</li>
<li>Suffix: kW, Amps, Tons, Months</li>
</ol>
<li>If “Currency” type, choose “Locale” from the drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Default: en_US</li>
</ol>
<li>If “Java Decimal Pattern” type, enter the pattern in the “Pattern” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>To create a number with a single value after the decimal, you would enter: ##.#</li>
</ol>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Payment==
A payment record, referring to the payment for any asset, is a way to track a payment for a specific device and when/who the payment goes to through the LiveDC platform. You will need to gather the following information before you create a payment record:
*Date of the payment
*Amount to be paid
*How you will be paying the payment (see [[#Creating a Payment Type|Creating a Payment Type]] for instructions)
*Who the payment is paid by (see [[#Creating a Business Unit|Creating a Business Unit]] for instructions)
*Who the payment is paid to (see [[#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] for instructions)
[[File:Payment.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Enter the date of when the payment for the hardware is to be paid in the “Date” field</li>
<li>Enter the amount of the payment in the “Amount” field</li>
<li>Select the type of payment in the “Type” drop-down menu or create a new “Payment Type” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Payment Type|Creating a Payment Type]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select who will be making the payment in the “Paid By” drop-down menu or create a new “Paid By” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Business Unit|Creating a Business Unit]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select to whom the payment is going to in the “Paid To” drop-down menu or create a new “Paid To” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Add tags to the payment in the section titled “Tags” by selecting from the drop down menu and clicking the left-hand facing arrow or create a new “Tag” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating Tags|Creating Tags]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the payment in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Payment Type==
A payment type is defining the mode of how the payment is paid. Whether that be a check or automatic deposit, it’s the way to define how you are paying for an asset within the LiveDC platform.
[[File:Payment Type.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Payment Type” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Payment Types” this will open a new tab titled “Payment types”</li>
<li>Within the payment types tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Payment Type.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the payment type in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the payment type in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Physical Disk==
A physical disk is used to store all server data. LiveDC provides an avenue of tracking these disks for each piece of hardware. It is valuable to track each disk for the purposes of asset management.

[[File:Physical Disk.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Enter the amount of physical disks of the hardware in the “Quantity” field</li>
<li>Enter the amount of capacity the physical disk has in the “Capacity in GB” field</li>
<li>Select the physical disk RAID that is utilized by the hardware in the “RAID” drop-down menu or create a new “Physical Disk RAID” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Physical Disk RAID|Creating a Physical Disk RAID]] section for instructions) </li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the physical disk RAID in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: Disk Controller</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the physical disk RAID in the “Details” field</li>
</ol>
<li>Select the physical disk speed that is utilized by the hardware in the “Speed” drop-down menu or create a new “Physical Disk Speed” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Physical Disk Speed|Creating a Physical Disk Speed]] section for instructions)</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the physical disk speed in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the physical disk speed in the “Details” field</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug==
The LiveDC platform provides a means of tracking power plugs for each piece of hardware. This is valuable from the standpoint of tracking single and dual corded devices. You will need to gather the following information before creating a power plug:
*Number of power plugs for the specific piece of hardware
*Type of power plug
*Observed wattage
*Estimated wattage
*Amount of wattage displayed on the nameplate of the hardware
*Amount of ampere
*Backup source of the hardware
*What circuit the hardware is linked back to
*Amount of voltage for the hardware
[[File:Power Plug.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>In the window titled “Creating Hardware”, enter the amount of Power Plugs for the piece of hardware in the “Quantity” field</li>
<li>Select the type of power plug in the “Plug Type” drop-down menu or create a new “Plug Type” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Power Plug Type|Creating a Power Plug Type]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Enter the amount of watts observed in the “Observed Watts” field)</li>
<li>Enter the amount of watts estimated in the “Estimated Watts” field</li>
<li>Enter the amount of watts on the nameplate of the hardware in the “Nameplate Watts” field</li>
<li>Select an ampere for the power plug in the “Ampere” drop-down menu or create a new “Ampere” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Power Plug Ampere|Creating a Power Plug Ampere]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select a backup source for the power plug in the “Backup Source” drop-down menu or create a new “Backup Source” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Power Plug Backup Source|Creating a Power Plug Backup Source]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select a power circuit for the power plug in the “Circuit” drop-down menu or create a new “Circuit” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Power Plug Circuit|Creating a Power Plug Circuit]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select a voltage for the power plug in the “Voltage” drop-down menu or create a new “Voltage” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Power Plug Voltage|Creating a Power Plug Voltage]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug Ampere==
LiveDC tracks the amperage that is produced in each power plug. Tracking such information is useful for estimating power usage throughout your data center.

[[File:Power Plug Ampere.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Power Plug Ampere” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Power Plug Amperes” this will open a new tab titled “Power Plug Amperes”</li>
<li>Within the power plug amperes tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Power Plug Amperes.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the power plug ampere in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the power plug ampere in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug Backup Source==
Tracking the backup source related to each power plug for hardware is important information to have on hand in the case of a power failure or outage. LiveDC will track the backup power source for each piece of hardware located in your data center.
[[File:Power Plug Backup.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Power Plug Backup Source” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Power Plug Backup Sources” this will open a new tab titled “Power Plug Backup Sources”</li>
<li>Within the power plug backup sources tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Power Plug Backup Source.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the power plug backup source in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the power plug backup source in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug Circuit==
LiveDC can track which specific circuit breaker(s) a piece of hardware is connected to. This sort of information is valuable to know for proactively managing scheduled maintenance and powering down hardware.
[[File:Power Plug Circuit.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Power Plug Circuit” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Power Plug Circuits” this will open a new tab titled “Power Plug Circuits”</li>
<li>Within the power plug circuits tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Power Plug Circuits.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the power plug circuit in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the power plug circuit in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug Type==
In LiveDC, the type of power plug that is used can be tied back to a specific piece of hardware. We track this information to help identify how many plugs of each type are available in each rack and how many are used.
[[File:Power Plug Type.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Power Plug Type” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click called “Power Plug Types” this will open a new tab titled “Power Plug Types”</li>
<li>Within the power plug types tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Power Plug Type.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the power plug type in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the power plug type in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug Voltage==
Tracking voltage, utilizing the LiveDC platform, is a simple and valuable operation. By entering the voltage information about a specific piece of hardware, you are able to plan for power usage and estimate monthly costs surrounding a single device or many devices.
[[File:Power Plug Voltage.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Power Plug Voltage” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Power Plug Voltages” this will open a new tab titled “Power Plug Voltages”</li>
<li>In the power plug voltages tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Power Plug Voltage.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the power plug voltage in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the power plug voltage in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Product==
LiveDC utilizes a parent-child relationship for creating and tracking products. Products tie directly to assets in your data center and make the search function of LiveDC a valuable means of accessing and analyzing your information. You will need to gather the following information before creating a product:
*Manufacturer of the product
*Category of the product
*Model of the product
*Model number of the product
*Generation of the product
[[File:Create Product.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Product” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Products” this will open a new tab titled “Product”</li>
<li>Within the products tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Product” or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, basic tab in the “Product” section, click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the manufacturer name of the product in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Dell, Oracle, EMC, HP, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the manufacturer name of the product in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the products tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, basic tab, “Product” section, click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the category name of the product in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Server, Storage, Network, or Infrastructure</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the category name of the product in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the manufacturer in the “Parent Product” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Dell, Oracle, EMC, HP, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the products tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, basic tab, “Product” section, click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the model name of the product in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: ProLiant, PowerEdge, SunFire, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the model name of the product in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the “Manufacturer – Category” in the “Parent Product” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Dell-Server</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the products tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, basic tab, “Product” section, click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the model number name of the product in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: DL385, 2900, X4250, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the model number name of the product in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the “Manufacturer – Category – Model” in the “Parent Product” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Dell-Server-ProLiant</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the products tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, basic tab, “Product” section, click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the generation / version name of the product in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: G5, V2, 7.1, etc</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the qualifier name of the product in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the “Manufacturer – Category – Model – Model Number” in the “Parent Product” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: Dell-Server-Proliant-DL385</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>You can create as many levels of information as needed, but the 5 levels we have just described seem to cover almost all instances of product tracking</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a SAN Connection==
A SAN (Storage Area Network) connection can be tracked within the LiveDC platform. Tracking this information in LiveDC is valuable, for storage devices especially, to provide an understanding of which SAN fabrics a device is connected to and to determine if there is redundancy. You will need to gather the following information before creating a SAN connection record:
*Number of connections the hardware has
*Name of the SAN
*Amount of capacity in GB of the SAN connection
[[File:SAN Connection.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Enter the amount of SAN connections the hardware obtains in the “Number of Connections” field</li>
<li>Select the SAN in the “SAN” drop-down menu or create a new “SAN” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a SAN|Creating a SAN]] for instructions)</li>
<li>Enter the amount of capacity the SAN connection has in the “Capacity in GB” field</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a SAN==
The SAN (Storage Area Network) is used primarily with storage devices. Tracking this information in LiveDC is valuable, for storage devices especially, to provide an understanding of which SAN fabrics a device is connected to and to determine if there is redundancy between SANs.

[[File:Create SAN.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create SAN” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “SANs” this will open a new tab titled “SANs”</li>
<li>Within the SANs tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create SAN.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the SAN in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: SAN A, SAN B, Storage SAN, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the SAN in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating Service Infos==
LiveDC tracks what and who will perform service on each piece of hardware through the service infos section. This information is valuable to track for knowing who to contact in the case of scheduled maintenance, an outage, or failure. You will need to gather the following information before creating a service info record:
*Name of the provider (See [[#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] for instructions)
*Type of service that the provider performs
*Start date of the service for the hardware
*End date of the service for the hardware
*Discount program of the service (See [[#Creating a Discount Program|Creating a Discount Program]] for instructions)
*Amount of base monthly cost for the service
[[File:Service Info.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Select the company that does the service for the hardware in the “Provider” drop-down menu or create a new “Company” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select the type of service the company provides for that hardware in the “Service Type” drop-down menu</li>
<li>Select a beginning date of the service in the “Start Date” field</li>
<li>Select an ending date of the service in the “Stop Date” field</li>
<li>Select a discount program for the company in the “Discount Program” drop-down menu or create a new “Discount Program” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Discount Program|Creating a Discount Program]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Enter a monthly cost in the “Base Monthly Cost” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the service in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Service Tier==
In the LiveDC platform, you can track both the requested and actual service tier associated with each piece of hardware. This information is valuable to have when considering recovery times and planning for outages and failures.

[[File:Service Tier.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Service Tier” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Service Tiers” this will open a new tab titled “Service Tiers”</li>
<li>Within the service tiers tab, in the upper left-hand corner click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Service Tier.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the service tier in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Tier 1, Tier 2, Tier 3, Tier 4, etc. </li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the service tier in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Shape==
Shapes in LiveDC refer to the boundaries for an influence that are placed on maps. The shapes for an influence can be either a square or a circle, but can be manipulated to represent different sizes for cabinets, PDUs, UPS equipment, etc. A color will fill the shape when it is corresponded to a legend on the map. You will need to gather the following information before creating a shape:
*Name of the shape you wish to create
*Which basic shape you are wishing to create, circle or square
*Pixel height of the shape
*Scale width of the shape you are creating
*Degrees of rotation of the shape
*Disregard the last 4 items (fill color, fill transparency, border pixels, border color) as they have no impact on the shape at the current time, they are placeholders for future functionality

[[File:Shape.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Shape” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Shapes” this will open a new tab titled “Shapes”</li>
<li>Within the shapes tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Shape.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the shape in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Cabinet, Standard Humidity Return, Standard Temperature, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the shape in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select what kind of shape to create in the “Basic Shape” drop-down menu</li>
<li>Define the height of the shape in the “Pixel Height” field</li>
<li>Enter a value for the width in the “Scale Width” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>This value is in relation to the height, so if you wanted a square that was 10 high x 20 wide, you would enter 10 for height and 2 for scale width</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter a value of rotation for the shape in the “Rotation Degrees” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>This would be used if you wanted to represent a diamond, you would create a square and rotate it 90 degrees</li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a SNMP V1 Template==
An SNMP V1 template is a set of rules for Elicit to follow to collect data points from an asset. Utilizing a web address, read community string, and an OID, Elicit will gather information using these instructions and populate data series for use in maps, LiveTiles, and/or graphs. You will need to gather the following information to create an SNMP V1 template:
*Name of the SNMP V1 template you wish to create
*IP address or URL for Elicit to communicate with
*Specified read community string: default is public
*Specific OID for the piece of information you are trying to gather
*The regular expression to tell Elicit which data you are specifically looking for
*An adjustment expression for the data being returned to the LiveDC platform
*Specific invalid raw values that are typically returned, which can be excluded. Some sensors return a 0 when in error state.

[[File:SNMP V1 Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create SNMP V1 Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “SNMP V1 Templates” this will open a new tab titled “SNMP V1 Templates”</li>
<li>Within the SNMP V1 templates tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create SNMP V1 Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the SNMP V1 template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Chatsworth Humidity (Port 1), Chatsworth Power % 30A (Phase XY), etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the SNMP V1 template in the “Details” field</li>
<li>The parameter format can be left as is and provides a way for you to specify what values you need to enter and what the label should be in the pop-up screen</li>
<li>Enter the Internet Protocol Address in the “Address” field using the defined parameter format</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: { {Address} }</li>
<li>This will prompt the user to enter the specific IP address each time</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter the community string in the “Read Community String” field using the defined parameter format</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>If standard across the organization, you can enter it here and not have to enter it again when creating a data series</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter the object identification number in the “Object Identifier OID” field using the defined parameter format</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Usually very specific for a type of power strip and can be entered here once and used for all power strips of that type</li>
<li>Example: 1.3.6.1.4.1.319.1.2.1.0</li>
</ol>
<li>Define the regular expression in the “Regular Expression” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Leave blank as it is not really leveraged at this time</li>
</ol>
<li>Define the adjustment expression in the “Adjustment Expression” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>This will take the raw value received via SNMP and perform an adjustment on that before sending the database for data normalization</li>
<li>Example: Raw/100</li>
</ol>
<li>Add any raw values that are invalid in the “Invalid Raw Values” field and click the left-hand facing arrow, if applicable</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating Tags==
Tags are what connects almost everything together in LiveDC. Giving a record a tag is very valuable for tracking purposes. Objects with tags are easily found using LiveDC's robust search function. Tags can be used to define location, category of product, type of metric in a data series, client specific tags, or anything else for that matter.

[[File:Tag.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Tag” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Tags” this will open a new tab titled “Tags”</li>
<li>Within the Tags tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Tag.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the tag in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: A Side, Row 10, Server, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the Tag in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Timing Template==
Data series utilize timing templates to tell Elicit how often to collect data from a device. The templates can be configured from polling once every minute to once every month, depending on how important the data is to the end-user.

[[File:Timing Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Timing Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Timing Templates” this will open a new tab titled “Timing Templates”</li>
<li>Within the timing templates tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Timing Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the timing template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: 1 minute, 1 hour, 15 minute, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the timing template in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Define how often the desired poll will take place in the “Poll Period” field</li>
<li>Define how often the desired warning period will last in the “Warning Period” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>This warning period will provide alerts if a data series has not communicated within the specified interval</li>
</ol>
<li>Define when, if at all, the poll will expire in the “Expire Period” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>This expire period will provide alerts if a data series has not communicated within the specified interval and will expire the reading so that it does not show up on maps</li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Trend Template==
A trend template tells Elicit to create a data series based upon the data that is in a separate data series. The new data series is created by choosing either the average, maximum, median, minimum, or sum of the data series being polled.

[[File:Trend Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Trend Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Trend Templates” this will open a new tab titled “Trend Templates”</li>
<li>Within the trend templates tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Trend Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the trend template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Past 3 Months, Past Day, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the trend template in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select what “Operation” you would like to perform on the data from the drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Average, Count, Maximum, Minimum, Median, Sum</li>
</ol>
<li>Define time period in which you would like the data to trend in the “Time Period” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: 30 Days, 1 Month, 24 Hours</li>
</ol>
<li>Snap to Date</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Leave as red x if you do not want to “reset” after each time period (selected in step D)</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>For example if you set the time period to 1 month, this template would include values since the same day during the previous month</li>
<li>Using these options, calculating a trend on the 13th of this month would include values from the 13th of the previous month through the 13th of this month</li>
</ol>
<li>Change to a green check mark if you want to “reset” after each time period (selected in step D)</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>For example if you set the time period to 1 month, this template would “reset” after each month</li>
<li>A Data Series with a Derived Data Start Date of July 1st, 2014 that uses this Trend Template with a 1 Month period and Snap to Date would “reset” on the first of each following month</li>
<li>Using these options, calculating a trend on the 13th of this month would include values from the 1st of this month through the 13th of this month</li>
</ol>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Uploading an Image==
Uploading an image provides flexibility for the user to customize maps specific to one’s data center. Maps are not limited to just a floor plan though, you can upload virtually any image to construct a map that will depict your data.

[[File:Upload Image.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Uploaded Images” this will open a new tab titled “Upload Images”</li>
<li>Within the uploaded images tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Uploaded Image.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the uploaded image in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: DC Room 1, Storage, POD 2, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Choose the file that to upload in the “Image File” section</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the uploaded image in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a URL Scrape Template==
A URL scrape template provides an avenue for Elicit to collect data from a specific web page (a web page with no login requirements). This is valuable for collecting data off of the web for many different reasons. Typically the data series created are based upon intelligent assets in the data center that have a web server serving up an HTTP page. You will need to gather the following information prior to creating a URL scrape template:
*Name of the URL scrape template
*Specific URL you intend to collect the data from
*Regular expression to tell Elicit where to look within all the text on the web page
*Adjustment expression, if you want to format the data as it enters the LiveDC platform
*Any invalid raw values you do not wish to use in the data series

[[File:URL Scrape Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create URL Scrape Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “URL Scrape Templates” this will open a new tab titled “URL Scrape Templates”</li>
<li>Within the URL Scrape Templates tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create URL Scrape Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the URL scrape template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: C:\ Drive, Configuration File Collection, CPU, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the URL scrape template in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Define the format for the parameters of the URL scrape template in the “Parameter Format” fields</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: {{ }}</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter the URL that will be used to gather the data in the “URL Scrape Template” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: File:///c|public/{ {hostname} }{ {counter} }.txt</li>
</ol>
<li>Define the regular expression in the “Regular Expression” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: =(\d*)</li>
</ol>
<li>Define the adjustment expression in the “Adjustment Expression” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: 100-raw</li>
</ol>
<li>Add any raw values that are invalid in the “Invalid Raw Values” field and click the left-hand facing arrow, if applicable</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Virtual Machine Datacenter==
Since there is no physical location to put a virtual machine, creating a virtual machine datacenter is the solution. This is the place for virtual machines to reside. It ties the virtual machine to a logical location for tracking purposes.

[[File:Virtual Machine Data Center.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Virtual Machine” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Virtual Machine Datacenters” this will open a new tab titled “Virtual Machine Datacenters”</li>
<li>Within the Virtual Machine Datacenters tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Virtual Machine Datacenter.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the virtual machine datacenter in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: Virtual Room 1</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the virtual machine datacenter in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Importing from a File==
Importing from a file is the mode of entering large amounts of data records into LiveDC at one time. There is a learning curve to this process, but once this skill is acquired it becomes very useful. Essentially, the user is inputting all of their data records in at the same time and letting LiveDC do the heavy lifting and analysis. Importing from a file is used all across the LiveDC platform, where mostly everything in the software can be imported in a bulk format. You will need to gather the following information prior to importing a file:
*Asset specific information
*Location and physical dimension information regarding the asset
*Data series specific information
*Visual specific information

[[File:Import from File.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and select the button called “Import from File…” this will open a new window titled “Import from File”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Click the “Browse” button to select the document to import into LiveDC</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Once the file is selected, you will have the option to perform analysis on the imported data before committing that information to the database</li>
<li>This helps prevent errors and will give you the results back to ensure all values are correct before actually importing the data</li>
</ol>
<li>To perform an analysis on the document, check the box titled “Perform Analysis Only” to green check mark</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Once you have validated that there are no errors and the data looks correct (denoted by performing analysis and getting all green highlighted columns back in the results spreadsheet)</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Green means you are good to go, there are no errors found</li>
<li>Yellow means warning, something has been updated but you are still ok to upload</li>
<li>Red means error, this item will not be imported into LiveDC</li>
<li>No color or white means that that item is already in the software and there are no changes to it</li>
</ol>
<li>To actually import the file and commit the data into LiveDC, check the box titled “Perform Analysis Only” to change it to the red X</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Import”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Graph Line==
[[File:Graph Line.PNG]]
===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Enter the following information in the “Create Graph Line” window </li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the line in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Physical Servers, Average Temperature, Historical Power, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter a name for the legend of this line in the “Legend Label” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Historical, Max Temp, Physical Servers, etc.</li>
<li>This will appear in the bottom of the graph window</li>
</ol>
<li>Select a color for the graph line in the “Color” section</li>
<li>Select the data series that will provide the data for the graph line in the drop-down menu or create a new data series record by clicking the star button (See [[Create a Data Series#Creating a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Add a futures line to show how the graph line could change in the future by clicking the star button to create a new “Futures” record </li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Enter the name of the graph line future in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Example: 2.5%</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter a label for the legend in the “Legend Label” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Example: 2.5%</li>
</ol>
<li>Define the period of time the graph will extend into the future in the “Time Period” section</li>
<li>Enter the amount of future graph lines to come from the historical data in the “Number Per Period” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Example: 1 Month</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter a formula for the future graph line in the “Formula” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Example: prev*1.05</li>
</ol>
<li>Define a color for the future graph line in the “Color” field</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Add” on the “Create Graph Line” window</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Physical Disk RAID==
A physical disk RAID is a redundant array of independent disks. LiveDC provides an avenue for tracking these disks for each piece of hardware. It is valuable to track each disk for the purposes of asset management.

[[File:Physical Disk RAID.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>In the “Create Physical Disk RAID” window enter the following:</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the physical disk RAID in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: Disk Controller</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the physical disk RAID in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Physical Disk Speed==
LiveDC provides an avenue for tracking these disks for each piece of hardware. It is valuable to track each disk speed for the purposes of asset management.

[[File:Physical Disk Speed.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>In the “Create Physical Disk Speed” window enter the following:</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the physical disk speed in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the physical disk speed in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Exporting a File==
[[File:Export.PNG]]
===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left side), click the desired tab to export records from. To find specific records, utilize LiveDC's robust Search feature (See [[Using LiveDC Search#How to Use Search|How to Use Search]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Once the desired records are in a list format on the screen, click “Export” in the top right corner of the screen</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>A small window titled “Confirm Export” will appear</li>
<li>Click "Export"</li>
<li>LiveDC will compile an Excel spreadsheet of the desired records (these records can be used for the mass import format as a template for what data needs to be entered before importing)</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>To import new records (See [[#Importing from a File|Importing from a File]] section for instructions)</li>
</ol>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Adding a Floor Plan to a Map==
===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>First you need to upload a PNG floor plan into LiveDC (See [[#Uploading an Image|Uploading an Image]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>Once the floor plan is uploaded into LiveDC, On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Layers” this will open a new tab titled “Layers”</li>
<li>Within the layers tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Layer.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the layer in the "Name" Field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Server Room Floor Plan, Data Center Floor Plan</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter additional information about the layer in the "Details" field</li>
<li>For a floor plan layer, we will select "Image" in the "Layer Type" drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>In the drop-down list find the floor plan image you uploaded in step 1</li>
<li>Select "center" from the "Placement" drop-down menu</li>
[[File:Image Layer.JPG]]
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
<li>Next we need to create a Solid Background layer for the map</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Again, in the upper left-hand corner click "Create"</li>
<li>Enter the name of the layer in the "Name" Field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Solid Background</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter additional information about the layer in the "Details" field</li>
<li>For a solid background layer, we will select "Solid" in the "Layer Type" drop-down menu</li>
<li>Select the color you want the background to be</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>We like to use #808080</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter the Transparency Percent</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>We usually do 0%</li>
[[File:Solid Layer.JPG]]
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Visuals” and click “Maps” this will open a new tab titled “Maps”</li>
<li>Within the maps tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Map.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the map in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Operational Model – Cooling, Power %, Operational Cost per Cabinet, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the map in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Define a horizontal size in pixels for the map in the “Width” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>A good rule of thumb is to look at the properties of the image and use those predefined dimensions (usually no more than 1650 pixels)</li>
</ol>
<li>Define a vertical size in pixels for the map in the “Height” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>A good rule of thumb is to look at the properties of the image and use those predefined dimensions (usually no more than 1300 pixels)</li>
</ol>
<li>Add a legend to the map in the section titled “Legends” by selecting from the drop down menu and clicking the left-hand facing arrow or create a new “Legend” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Legend|Creating a Legend]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>In the Map Layers section, click the star button</li>
<li>Select the "Solid Background" layer from the drop-down list</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Change the red x to a green check mark for "Show Dots" and "Show Values"</li>
<li>Do not change line color, text color, background color or background transparency percent</li>
[[File:Solid Map Layer.JPG]]
<li>Click "Add"</li>
</ol>
<li>Again, click the star button in the Map Layers section</li>
<li>Select the floor plan layer you created above from the drop-down list</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Change the red x to a green check mark for "Show Dots"</li>
<li>Do not change line color, text color, background color or background transparency percent</li>
[[File:Floor plan map layer.JPG]]
<li>Click "Add"</li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
<li>You have now created a Map with a floor plan. You will need to add additional layers to the map to see data. (See [[Map#Creating a Map|Creating a Map]] section for instructions)</li>
</ol>
</ol>

Data Series

2015-02-10T18:57:09Z

Khackenmiller: /* Instructions */

__TOC__

==Creating a Data Series==
Data series are the foundation of LiveDC. The data gathered in each data series can be pushed to LiveTiles, graphs, maps, executive reports, operational cost reports, etc. Data series can gather data in many different ways. The LiveDC platform can collect data by leveraging common protocols such as SNMPv1, HTTP URL scrapes, dynamic sets, trends, formulas, record counts, and by manually inputting the data. In a nutshell, data series are the foundational component of LiveDC and tie everything together throughout the LiveDC platform. Information you need to know before setting up a data series:
*Name of the data series - usually contains cabinet location, row, etc.
*Whether the data is a number or text - most often we utilize numbers
*What format you would like the number to return as - Amps, kW, Fahrenheit, $, etc.
*How often you would like to collect the data - 5mins, 15 mins, 1 hour, 1 day, etc.
*How you would like to collect the data - SNMP, HTTP, manual

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Data Series” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window, continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Data” and click “Data Series.” This will open a new tab titled “Data Series.”</li>
<li>Within the Data Series tab (upper left-hand corner) click “Create.” A new window will open titled “Create Data Series.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>In the “Name” field enter the title of the data series</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Average Temperature Front 10 inch, CO2 Average, POD 3 – Row 5 – Cabinet 6, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Add additional information about the data series in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the tags that best describe your data series from the drop down menu and click the left-hand facing arrow or create a new “Tag” record by clicking on the star button (See [[Extras#Creating Tags|Creating Tags]] section for instructions)</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>To remove a tag from a data series select the tag and click the right-hand facing arrow</li>
[[File:Data-Series.png]]
</ol>
<li>Select the type of data you want to collect from the drop down list in the “Data Type” field (Date, Number or Text - number is the most commonly used)</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>If you select data type “Number,” you will need to select a number format template you want to apply to your data. Pick a template from the drop down menu or create a new “Number Format Template” record by clicking the star button (see [[Extras#Creating a Number Format Template|Creating a Number Format Template]] section for instructions).</li>
</ol>
<li>Select the “Timing Template” from the drop down menu or create a new “Timing Template” record by clicking the star button (see [[Extras#Creating a Timing Template|Creating a Timing Template]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select the appropriate poll type based on how your data will be collected. If you select "Manual" you can proceed to step g.</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>If you select “Dynamic Set” you will need to fill in additional information. A dynamic set allows you to perform a function on a set of data which is categorized by tags. For example, average cold aisle temperature would take all data series with the tag "cold aisle" and average them out to give you one data point. The additional information needed is:</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Data points start date</li>
<li>Inclusion - All, Any</li>
<li>Tags: Select from the drop down menu and click the left-hand facing arrow or create a new “Tag” record by clicking the star button (See [[Extras#Creating Tags|Creating Tags]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Operation - Average, Count, Maximum, Median, Minimum, Sum</li>
<li>Enter minimum and maximum values if you want to apply restrictions to the calculations. Leave them blank for no restrictions. You can change the red x to green check marks if you want to include the exact values entered for minimum or maximum values.</li>
<ol>
<li>Example: If you wanted to only include non-freezing temperature values you would set the minimum to be 32 and change the red x to a green check mark – now you can track just the temperatures above freezing (32 degrees or higher)</li>
</ol>
<li>Adjustment Expression</li>
</ol>
<li>If you select “Formula” you will need to fill in additional information. A formula data series allows you to apply logic to a number of data series. For example, difference of power in cabinet 1 and cabinet 2 would take these two data series and subtract them from each other to give you one data point. The additional information needed is:</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Data points start date</li>
<li>Formula- what you want to do with the data points outlined in number 3 below, example syntax: v0 - v1, where v0 = Power in cabinet 1 and v1 = Power in cabinet or additional variables can be used in the formula and would be referenced as v3, v4, etc.</li>
<li>Values: Select from the drop down menu and click the left-hand facing arrow or create a new “Value” record by clicking the star button (See [[Create a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Adjustment Expression</li>
</ol>
<li>If you select “Record Count” you will need to fill in additional information. A record count data series allows you to get a count of how many data series contain a specific tag or set of tags. The record count data series leverages the search capability built in to LiveDC. The additional information needed is:</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Data points start date</li>
<li>Search Criteria: Select from the drop down menu or create a new “Search Criteria” record by clicking the star button (See [[Using LiveDC Search#Creating a Saved Search Criteria|Creating a Saved Search Criteria]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Adjustment Expression</li>
</ol>
<li>If you select “SNMPv1” you will need to fill in additional information. An SNMPv1 data series polls intelligent devices that talk SNMP and you specify the interval at which you want to request this data. The additional information needed is:</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Collector Assignment - usually use Automatic</li>
<li>SNMPV1 Template: Select from the drop down menu or create a new “SNMPv1 Template” by clicking the star button (See [[Extras#Creating a SNMP V1 Template|Creating a SNMP V1 Template]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Address - IP Address</li>
<li>Read Community String - usually by default this is "Public"</li>
<li>Regular Expression - usually left blank</li>
<li>SNMP OID</li>
</ol>
<li>If you select “Trend” you will need to fill in additional information. A trend data series allows you to look at a standard data series over a period of time. For example, if you had the power of a cabinet over the last year you could set up a trend data series to use the power data series and look at a trend over the last 3 months. The additional information needed is:</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Data points start date</li>
<li>Data series to trend. Select from the drop down menu or create a new “Data Series to Trend” record by clicking the star button (See [[Create a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Trend template: Select from the drop down menu or create a new “Trend Template” record by clicking the star button (See [[Extras#Creating a Trend Template|Creating a Trend Template]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Enter minimum and maximum values if you want to apply restrictions to the calculations. Leave them blank for no restrictions. You can change the red x to green check marks if you want to include the exact values entered for minimum or maximum values.</li>
<ol>
<li>Example: If you wanted to only include non-freezing temperature values you would set the minimum to be 32 and change the red x to a green check mark – now you can track just the temperatures above freezing (32 degrees or higher)</li>
</ol>
<li>Adjustment Expression</li>
</ol>
<li>If you select “URL Scrape” you will need to fill in additional information. A URL Scrape data series allows you to pull information from an unsecured web page using regex to determine the location of the information on the webpage. </li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Collector Assignment - usually use Automatic</li>
<li>URL Scrape Template: Select from the drop down menu or create a new “URL Scrape Template” record by clicking the star button (See [[Extras#Creating a URL Scrape Template|Creating a URL Scrape Template]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Regular Expression</li>
<li>URL - website to find the information</li>
</ol>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
<li>You now have a data series that will be collecting data on the interval you specified and the data series will be able to be used in Maps, Graphs and LiveTiles.</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Cloning a Data Series==
Cloning a data series will save time when creating the same type of data series for multiple locations. When cloning a data series, the only information needed is essentially the name and details. Selecting different poll types will provide different “cloned” items, each will return specific information pertaining to the poll type.

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Data Series” window skip to step 4. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Data” and click “Data Series,” this will open a new tab titled “Data Series”</li>
<li>Highlight the desired data series that is associated with the new data series desired to clone. Within the data series tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Clone” button. A new window will open titled “Edit Data Series.” The following line items will be auto-filled in the data series window:</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Tags</li>
<li>Data Type</li>
<li>Number Format</li>
<li>Timing Template</li>
<li>Poll Type</li>
[[File:Cloning-Data-Series.png]]
</ol>
<li>In the “Name” field enter the title / name of the data series</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Examples: Average Temperature Front 10 inch, CO2 Average, POD 3 – Row 5 – Cabinet 6, etc. </li>
</ol>
<li>Add additional information about the data series in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
<li>You will now have a data series with a very similar structure to the data series you used for cloning.</li>

Data Series

2015-02-10T18:50:40Z

Khackenmiller: /* Instructions */

__TOC__

==Creating a Data Series==
Data series are the foundation of LiveDC. The data gathered in each data series can be pushed to LiveTiles, graphs, maps, executive reports, operational cost reports, etc. Data series can gather data in many different ways. The LiveDC platform can collect data by leveraging common protocols such as SNMPv1, HTTP URL scrapes, dynamic sets, trends, formulas, record counts, and by manually inputting the data. In a nutshell, data series are the foundational component of LiveDC and tie everything together throughout the LiveDC platform. Information you need to know before setting up a data series:
*Name of the data series - usually contains cabinet location, row, etc.
*Whether the data is a number or text - most often we utilize numbers
*What format you would like the number to return as - Amps, kW, Fahrenheit, $, etc.
*How often you would like to collect the data - 5mins, 15 mins, 1 hour, 1 day, etc.
*How you would like to collect the data - SNMP, HTTP, manual

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Data Series” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window, continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Data” and click “Data Series.” This will open a new tab titled “Data Series.”</li>
<li>Within the Data Series tab (upper left-hand corner) click “Create.” A new window will open titled “Create Data Series.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>In the “Name” field enter the title of the data series</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Average Temperature Front 10 inch, CO2 Average, POD 3 – Row 5 – Cabinet 6, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Add additional information about the data series in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the tags that best describe your data series from the drop down menu and click the left-hand facing arrow or create a new “Tag” record by clicking on the star button (See [[Extras#Creating Tags|Creating Tags]] section for instructions)</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>To remove a tag from a data series select the tag and click the right-hand facing arrow</li>
[[File:Data-Series.png]]
</ol>
<li>Select the type of data you want to collect from the drop down list in the “Data Type” field (Date, Number or Text - number is the most commonly used)</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>If you select data type “Number,” you will need to select a number format template you want to apply to your data. Pick a template from the drop down menu or create a new “Number Format Template” record by clicking the star button (see [[Extras#Creating a Number Format Template|Creating a Number Format Template]] section for instructions).</li>
</ol>
<li>Select the “Timing Template” from the drop down menu or create a new “Timing Template” record by clicking the star button (see [[Extras#Creating a Timing Template|Creating a Timing Template]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select the appropriate poll type based on how your data will be collected. If you select "Manual" you can proceed to step g.</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>If you select “Dynamic Set” you will need to fill in additional information. A dynamic set allows you to perform a function on a set of data which is categorized by tags. For example, average cold aisle temperature would take all data series with the tag "cold aisle" and average them out to give you one data point. The additional information needed is:</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Data points start date</li>
<li>Inclusion - All, Any</li>
<li>Tags: Select from the drop down menu and click the left-hand facing arrow or create a new “Tag” record by clicking the star button (See [[Extras#Creating Tags|Creating Tags]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Operation - Average, Count, Maximum, Median, Minimum, Sum</li>
<li>Enter minimum and maximum values if you want to apply restrictions to the calculations. Leave them blank for no restrictions. You can change the red x to green check marks if you want to include the exact values entered for minimum or maximum values.</li>
<li>Adjustment Expression</li>
</ol>
<li>If you select “Formula” you will need to fill in additional information. A formula data series allows you to apply logic to a number of data series. For example, difference of power in cabinet 1 and cabinet 2 would take these two data series and subtract them from each other to give you one data point. The additional information needed is:</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Data points start date</li>
<li>Formula- what you want to do with the data points outlined in number 3 below, example syntax: v0 - v1, where v0 = Power in cabinet 1 and v1 = Power in cabinet or additional variables can be used in the formula and would be referenced as v3, v4, etc.</li>
<li>Values: Select from the drop down menu and click the left-hand facing arrow or create a new “Value” record by clicking the star button (See [[Create a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Adjustment Expression</li>
</ol>
<li>If you select “Record Count” you will need to fill in additional information. A record count data series allows you to get a count of how many data series contain a specific tag or set of tags. The record count data series leverages the search capability built in to LiveDC. The additional information needed is:</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Data points start date</li>
<li>Search Criteria: Select from the drop down menu or create a new “Search Criteria” record by clicking the star button (See [[Using LiveDC Search#Creating a Saved Search Criteria|Creating a Saved Search Criteria]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Adjustment Expression</li>
</ol>
<li>If you select “SNMPv1” you will need to fill in additional information. An SNMPv1 data series polls intelligent devices that talk SNMP and you specify the interval at which you want to request this data. The additional information needed is:</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Collector Assignment - usually use Automatic</li>
<li>SNMPV1 Template: Select from the drop down menu or create a new “SNMPv1 Template” by clicking the star button (See [[Extras#Creating a SNMP V1 Template|Creating a SNMP V1 Template]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Address - IP Address</li>
<li>Read Community String - usually by default this is "Public"</li>
<li>Regular Expression - usually left blank</li>
<li>SNMP OID</li>
</ol>
<li>If you select “Trend” you will need to fill in additional information. A trend data series allows you to look at a standard data series over a period of time. For example, if you had the power of a cabinet over the last year you could set up a trend data series to use the power data series and look at a trend over the last 3 months. The additional information needed is:</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Data points start date</li>
<li>Data series to trend. Select from the drop down menu or create a new “Data Series to Trend” record by clicking the star button (See [[Create a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Trend template: Select from the drop down menu or create a new “Trend Template” record by clicking the star button (See [[Extras#Creating a Trend Template|Creating a Trend Template]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Adjustment Expression</li>
</ol>
<li>If you select “URL Scrape” you will need to fill in additional information. A URL Scrape data series allows you to pull information from an unsecured web page using regex to determine the location of the information on the webpage. </li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Collector Assignment - usually use Automatic</li>
<li>URL Scrape Template: Select from the drop down menu or create a new “URL Scrape Template” record by clicking the star button (See [[Extras#Creating a URL Scrape Template|Creating a URL Scrape Template]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Regular Expression</li>
<li>URL - website to find the information</li>
</ol>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
<li>You now have a data series that will be collecting data on the interval you specified and the data series will be able to be used in Maps, Graphs and LiveTiles.</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Cloning a Data Series==
Cloning a data series will save time when creating the same type of data series for multiple locations. When cloning a data series, the only information needed is essentially the name and details. Selecting different poll types will provide different “cloned” items, each will return specific information pertaining to the poll type.

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Data Series” window skip to step 4. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Data” and click “Data Series,” this will open a new tab titled “Data Series”</li>
<li>Highlight the desired data series that is associated with the new data series desired to clone. Within the data series tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Clone” button. A new window will open titled “Edit Data Series.” The following line items will be auto-filled in the data series window:</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Tags</li>
<li>Data Type</li>
<li>Number Format</li>
<li>Timing Template</li>
<li>Poll Type</li>
[[File:Cloning-Data-Series.png]]
</ol>
<li>In the “Name” field enter the title / name of the data series</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Examples: Average Temperature Front 10 inch, CO2 Average, POD 3 – Row 5 – Cabinet 6, etc. </li>
</ol>
<li>Add additional information about the data series in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
<li>You will now have a data series with a very similar structure to the data series you used for cloning.</li>

Configure Elicit

2015-02-04T17:18:57Z

Khackenmiller:

As you will see, LiveDC utilizes data from all types of sources. Since LiveDC is a platform hosted in the cloud, it requires an onsite data collector. Elicit is LiveDC's local JavaScript application that collects data on an ongoing basis and securely pushes the data up to the LiveDC platform. Elicit comes in two forms: 1) application that resides on a virtual server (Windows or Linux); 2) small appliance to be plugged into the network.

'''Prerequisite'''
<ul>
<li>Java 32-bit must be installed. To download and install visit here: http://www.java.com/en/download/</li>
</ul>
 
Below is the configuration instructions for the application version of Elicit.

==Downloading Elicit==
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click "Data" and click "Elicit," this will open a new tab titled "Elicit"</li>
<li>Within the Elicit tab (upper left-hand corner), click "Download" to create a new Elicit collector. This will open up a new window titled "Download Elicit Install File."</li>
[[File:Elicit-Download.PNG]]
<ol type="a">
<li>Click "Download"</li>
<li>Extract the zip file</li>
[[File:Collector Zip.png]]
<li>Navigate to the folder that the file was extracted to.</li>
<li>Open the file titled "GeniusEngineCollectorInstaller.exe", this will open a setup window called "Genius Engine Collector Setup"</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Choose the destination to install the Elicit collector and click "Next"</li>
<li>Account ID and Service URL will be populated automatically (don't change)</li>
<li>Click "Install" and let the installation complete</li>
[[File:Elicit_Setup.png]]
<li>Click "Close" once done</li>
</ol>
<li>Go back to the LiveDC platform, click the "Refresh" button (upper right-hand corner) for the new Elicit collector to appear in the Elicit list</li>
<li>Highlight the new Elicit and click "Edit" to authorize</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>This will open a window titled “Edit Elicit”</li>
<li>Check the box titled “Authorized” to change the red x to a green check mark to authorize the Elicit</li>
[[File:Elicit_Authorize.png]]
<li>Click "Save"</li>
</ol>
<li>The Elicit collector should now be fully configured and will begin to send data to LiveDC once you have configured data series to collect data.</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Upgrading Elicit on Linux OS==
<ol>
<li>Copy the three (3) new *.jar files to home directory on Elicit</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Utilize WinSCP to copy these files to the host</li>
<li>Open WinSCP connection to the IP address of the Elicit (i.e. 10.10.10.10)</li>
</ol>
<li>Open putty to the IP address of the Elicit (i.e. 10.10.10.10)</li>
<li>Run the following command to ensure the collector is currently running</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>ps –ef |grep pyramid</li>
</ol>
<li>Run the following command to stop the collector service and release the files</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>sudo service collector stop</li>
</ol>
<li>Check in the following directory to ensure the current .jar files are there</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>ls /usr/local/bin/collector</li>
</ol>
<li>Move the three (3) new .jar files from the home directory to the collector directory</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>sudo mv *.jar /usr/local/bin/collector</li>
</ol>
<li>Change directory to ensure the new files are there and have the appropriate time stamp (file names will be red at this point)</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>cd /usr/local/bin/collector</li>
<li>ls -la</li>
</ol>
<li>Change the ownership on the files from pi to root</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>sudo chown root.root *.jar</li>
</ol>
<li>Change the permissions on the three (3) *.jar files to enable execution</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>sudo chmod +x PyramidCo*</li>
</ol>
<li>This shows the files in this directory and the three (3) .jar files should be green and have a "x" in the permissions on the left-hand side</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>ls –la</li>
</ol>
<li>Reboot the Elicit to ensure that the system is reset and when it comes back up it will now use the new .jar files</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>sudo reboot</li>
</ol>
<li>Check LiveDC and make sure the version has updated to the date, which was associated with the .jar files</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>You may need to authorize it as a new collector on LiveDC</li>
</ol>
</ol>

Configure Elicit

2015-02-04T17:15:09Z

Khackenmiller:

As you will see, LiveDC utilizes data from all types of sources. Since LiveDC is a platform hosted in the cloud, it requires an onsite data collector. Elicit is LiveDC's local JavaScript application that collects data on an ongoing basis and securely pushes the data up to the LiveDC platform. Elicit comes in two forms: 1) application that resides on a virtual server (Windows or Linux); 2) small appliance to be plugged into the network.

Prerequisites
<ol>
<li>Java 32-bit installed from http://www.java.com/en/download/, install as instructed</li>

Below is the configuration instructions for the application version of Elicit.

==Downloading Elicit==
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click "Data" and click "Elicit," this will open a new tab titled "Elicit"</li>
<li>Within the Elicit tab (upper left-hand corner), click "Download" to create a new Elicit collector. This will open up a new window titled "Download Elicit Install File."</li>
[[File:Elicit-Download.PNG]]
<ol type="a">
<li>Click "Download"</li>
<li>Extract the zip file</li>
[[File:Collector Zip.png]]
<li>Navigate to the folder that the file was extracted to.</li>
<li>Open the file titled "GeniusEngineCollectorInstaller.exe", this will open a setup window called "Genius Engine Collector Setup"</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Choose the destination to install the Elicit collector and click "Next"</li>
<li>Account ID and Service URL will be populated automatically (don't change)</li>
<li>Click "Install" and let the installation complete</li>
[[File:Elicit_Setup.png]]
<li>Click "Close" once done</li>
</ol>
<li>Go back to the LiveDC platform, click the "Refresh" button (upper right-hand corner) for the new Elicit collector to appear in the Elicit list</li>
<li>Highlight the new Elicit and click "Edit" to authorize</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>This will open a window titled “Edit Elicit”</li>
<li>Check the box titled “Authorized” to change the red x to a green check mark to authorize the Elicit</li>
[[File:Elicit_Authorize.png]]
<li>Click "Save"</li>
</ol>
<li>The Elicit collector should now be fully configured and will begin to send data to LiveDC once you have configured data series to collect data.</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Upgrading Elicit on Linux OS==
<ol>
<li>Copy the three (3) new *.jar files to home directory on Elicit</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Utilize WinSCP to copy these files to the host</li>
<li>Open WinSCP connection to the IP address of the Elicit (i.e. 10.10.10.10)</li>
</ol>
<li>Open putty to the IP address of the Elicit (i.e. 10.10.10.10)</li>
<li>Run the following command to ensure the collector is currently running</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>ps –ef |grep pyramid</li>
</ol>
<li>Run the following command to stop the collector service and release the files</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>sudo service collector stop</li>
</ol>
<li>Check in the following directory to ensure the current .jar files are there</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>ls /usr/local/bin/collector</li>
</ol>
<li>Move the three (3) new .jar files from the home directory to the collector directory</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>sudo mv *.jar /usr/local/bin/collector</li>
</ol>
<li>Change directory to ensure the new files are there and have the appropriate time stamp (file names will be red at this point)</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>cd /usr/local/bin/collector</li>
<li>ls -la</li>
</ol>
<li>Change the ownership on the files from pi to root</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>sudo chown root.root *.jar</li>
</ol>
<li>Change the permissions on the three (3) *.jar files to enable execution</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>sudo chmod +x PyramidCo*</li>
</ol>
<li>This shows the files in this directory and the three (3) .jar files should be green and have a "x" in the permissions on the left-hand side</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>ls –la</li>
</ol>
<li>Reboot the Elicit to ensure that the system is reset and when it comes back up it will now use the new .jar files</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>sudo reboot</li>
</ol>
<li>Check LiveDC and make sure the version has updated to the date, which was associated with the .jar files</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>You may need to authorize it as a new collector on LiveDC</li>
</ol>
</ol>

Configure Elicit

2015-02-04T17:14:59Z

Khackenmiller:

As you will see, LiveDC utilizes data from all types of sources. Since LiveDC is a platform hosted in the cloud, it requires an onsite data collector. Elicit is LiveDC's local JavaScript application that collects data on an ongoing basis and securely pushes the data up to the LiveDC platform. Elicit comes in two forms: 1) application that resides on a virtual server (Windows or Linux); 2) small appliance to be plugged into the network.

**Prerequisites**
<ol>
<li>Java 32-bit installed from http://www.java.com/en/download/, install as instructed</li>

Below is the configuration instructions for the application version of Elicit.

==Downloading Elicit==
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click "Data" and click "Elicit," this will open a new tab titled "Elicit"</li>
<li>Within the Elicit tab (upper left-hand corner), click "Download" to create a new Elicit collector. This will open up a new window titled "Download Elicit Install File."</li>
[[File:Elicit-Download.PNG]]
<ol type="a">
<li>Click "Download"</li>
<li>Extract the zip file</li>
[[File:Collector Zip.png]]
<li>Navigate to the folder that the file was extracted to.</li>
<li>Open the file titled "GeniusEngineCollectorInstaller.exe", this will open a setup window called "Genius Engine Collector Setup"</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Choose the destination to install the Elicit collector and click "Next"</li>
<li>Account ID and Service URL will be populated automatically (don't change)</li>
<li>Click "Install" and let the installation complete</li>
[[File:Elicit_Setup.png]]
<li>Click "Close" once done</li>
</ol>
<li>Go back to the LiveDC platform, click the "Refresh" button (upper right-hand corner) for the new Elicit collector to appear in the Elicit list</li>
<li>Highlight the new Elicit and click "Edit" to authorize</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>This will open a window titled “Edit Elicit”</li>
<li>Check the box titled “Authorized” to change the red x to a green check mark to authorize the Elicit</li>
[[File:Elicit_Authorize.png]]
<li>Click "Save"</li>
</ol>
<li>The Elicit collector should now be fully configured and will begin to send data to LiveDC once you have configured data series to collect data.</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Upgrading Elicit on Linux OS==
<ol>
<li>Copy the three (3) new *.jar files to home directory on Elicit</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Utilize WinSCP to copy these files to the host</li>
<li>Open WinSCP connection to the IP address of the Elicit (i.e. 10.10.10.10)</li>
</ol>
<li>Open putty to the IP address of the Elicit (i.e. 10.10.10.10)</li>
<li>Run the following command to ensure the collector is currently running</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>ps –ef |grep pyramid</li>
</ol>
<li>Run the following command to stop the collector service and release the files</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>sudo service collector stop</li>
</ol>
<li>Check in the following directory to ensure the current .jar files are there</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>ls /usr/local/bin/collector</li>
</ol>
<li>Move the three (3) new .jar files from the home directory to the collector directory</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>sudo mv *.jar /usr/local/bin/collector</li>
</ol>
<li>Change directory to ensure the new files are there and have the appropriate time stamp (file names will be red at this point)</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>cd /usr/local/bin/collector</li>
<li>ls -la</li>
</ol>
<li>Change the ownership on the files from pi to root</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>sudo chown root.root *.jar</li>
</ol>
<li>Change the permissions on the three (3) *.jar files to enable execution</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>sudo chmod +x PyramidCo*</li>
</ol>
<li>This shows the files in this directory and the three (3) .jar files should be green and have a "x" in the permissions on the left-hand side</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>ls –la</li>
</ol>
<li>Reboot the Elicit to ensure that the system is reset and when it comes back up it will now use the new .jar files</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>sudo reboot</li>
</ol>
<li>Check LiveDC and make sure the version has updated to the date, which was associated with the .jar files</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>You may need to authorize it as a new collector on LiveDC</li>
</ol>
</ol>

Extras

2015-01-27T16:56:37Z

Khackenmiller: /* Instructions */

__TOC__

==Creating Accounting Shares==
An accounting share is a way to track what department or function of the business owns or is making payments for a piece of hardware. You will need to know the following information to create an accounting share:
*Business unit or business department having ownership of the device
*Number of shares that business unit owns
[[File:Accounting Share.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Select a business unit from the “Business Unit” drop-down menu or create a new “Business Unit” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Business Unit|Creating a Business Unit]] section for instructions)</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Examples: Accounting, Production, Marketing, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter the desired amount of shares into the “Shares” field</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating Address Type==
Creating an address type is required for each operating system, usually defined as IPv4 or IPv6. The address type is not considered the actual address.You will need to know the following information before creating an address type:
*Whether the address type is an IP-V4 or IP-V6
[[File:Address Type.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Address Type” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Address Types” this will open a new tab titled “Address Types”</li>
<li>In the address types tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Address Type”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the address type in the field titled “Name”</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: IP Address, IP Address (location-based), etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the address type in the “Details” field</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Business Unit==
A business unit or business department is a great way to track ownership or affected areas of the organization that touch a specific piece of hardware, software, or virtual machine. A business unit uses the parent-child relationship like a hardware product. This can be utilized for accounting and tracking purposes of the asset. You will need to gather the following information when creating a business unit:
*Name of the business unit or function you wish to create
*A parent business unit, if any
[[File:Business Unit.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Business Unit” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Business Unit” this will open a new tab titled “Business units”</li>
<li>Within the business unit tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Business Unit” or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, service tab in the business unit section click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the company name in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Target, Best Buy, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the name of the company in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the business unit tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, service tab in the business unit section click the star button</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the department in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Marketing, Accounting, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the department name in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the company name in the “Parent Business Unit” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Target, Best Buy, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Company==
Creating a company is a way to distinguish the physical history and payment history of an asset in the event of a merger and acquisition or any other event which would involve transfer of ownership. You will need to know the following information before creating a company:
*Name of the company you wish to create
[[File:Company.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Company” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Companies” this will open a new tab titled “Companies”</li>
<li>Within the companies tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Company.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the company name in the field titled “Name”</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the company in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Component==
Components tracking is a great way to record what is contained within a specific piece of hardware you are creating. The component information can give you insight into how much of a resource you are utilizing and consuming in your data center. It tracks everything from power to memory to peripheral cards inserted into the back of your servers. You will need to gather the following information to create a component record for your hardware:
*Memory in GB for the hardware
*Number of logical disk volumes
*Number of network interfaces for the hardware
*Number of management interfaces for the hardware
*Number of CPU’s in the hardware
*Other components, utilizing the parent-child relationship, located within the hardware
*Physical disks
*SAN connections
*Number and type of power plugs
[[File:Component.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Component” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Components” this will open a new tab titled “Components”</li>
<li>In the components tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Component.” If you are in the “Create Hardware” window, component tab in the component section click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the peripheral name of the components in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Network Card, PCIE Card, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the peripheral in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the components tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, component tab in the component section click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the ports in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: port numbers</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the ports in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the peripheral in the “Parent Component” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Network Card, PCIE Card, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Contact==
A contact is utilized when referring to an asset, specifically a piece of hardware. This is the organization and person you would contact if the asset has a disruption of service or experiences a failure or outage. You will need to gather the following information when creating a contact:
*Type of contact; electrician, service provider, maintenance, etc.
*Name of the contact; first and last name, company the contact works for, and contact method (see [[#Creating a Contact Method Type|Creating a Contact Method Type]] for instructions)
[[File:Contact.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Contact” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Contacts” this will open a new tab titled “Contacts”</li>
<li>Within the contact tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Contact”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the first name of the contact in the “First Name” field</li>
<li>Enter the last name of the contact in the “Last Name” field</li>
<li>Select which company the contact is associated with in the “Company” drop-down menu or create a new “Company” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Add a contact method by clicking the star button. In the “Create Contact Method” window enter the following:</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Enter a “Type” from the drop down menu or by clicking on the star button to create a new “Type” record. (see [[#Creating a Contact Method Type|Creating a Contact Method Type]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>Enter a phone number or email for the contact method in the “Value” field </li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information for the contact in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Contact Method Type==
A contact method type provides the means to reach the point of contact for an asset, typically for hardware. The contact method type refers to the email or phone number used to get in touch with the person. You will need to gather the following information when creating a contact method type:
*What mode of contact is preferred for reaching this person; email, SMS, mobile phone, etc.
[[File:Contact Method Type.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Contact Method Type” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Contact Method Types” this will open a new tab titled “Contact Method Types”</li>
<li>Within the contact method type tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Contact Method Type.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the contact method type in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the contact method type in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a CPU Type==
[[File:CPU Type.PNG]]
===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create CPU Type” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “CPU Types” this will open a new tab titled “CPU Types”</li>
<li>Within the CPU type tab, in the upper left-hand corner click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create CPU Type.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the CPU type in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Intel Xeon E5450</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the CPU type in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Enter the speed of the CPU type in the field “Speed in GHz”</li>
<li>Enter how many physical cores the CPU type has in the “Physical Cores” field</li>
<li>Enter how many virtual cores the CPU type has in the “Virtual Cores” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Discount Program==
A discount program is used when referring to the service of an asset, typically hardware. Creating a discount program record is valuable for tracking what service company your dollars are going to and what deal you are receiving from a discount standpoint. You will need to gather the following information before creating a discount program record:
*Name of the discount program, for tracking purposes
*Percentage of the discount program, to know what deal has been provided by the service company
[[File:Discount Program.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Discount Program” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Discount Program” this will open a new tab titled “Discount Programs”</li>
<li>Within the discount program tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Discount Program.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the discount program in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the discount program in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Enter a discount percent in the field called “Percent”</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Domain==
A domain record refers to a collection of devices within your network, similar to contoso.com, and helps delineate between internal devices and devices that reside in other domains. The LiveDC platform will track what domains are being utilized by which operating systems and provide ease of searching this information. You will need to gather the following information before creating a domain record:
*Name of the domain record you wish to create
[[File:Domain.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Domain” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Domains” this will open a new tab titled “Domains”</li>
<li>Within the domains tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Domain.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the domain in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: company_xyz.local</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the domain in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating an Influence==
An influence is the way to represent what is happening to a specific data series in the data center on a map. The influence is shown by using a color scale, known as a legend, to provide knowledge around the objects real-time state. The influence’s color is affected by the data series it is connected to. As the data in the data series changes, so does the color of the influence, based upon the legend associated with the map. You will need to gather the following information before creating an influence:
*Specific data series that you would like to attach to the influence (see [[Create a Data Series#Creating a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] for instructions)
*Map that you would like to place the influence on (see [[Create Map#Creating a Map|Creating a Map]] for instructions)
*Layer of the map you will be placing the influence on (see [[#Creating a Layer|Creating a Layer]] for instructions)
*Influence template that you will be using to give the influence boundaries, shape, and scale (see [[#Creating an Influence Template|Creating an Influence Template]] for instructions)
[[File:Influence.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Layers” this will open a new tab titled “Layers List”</li>
<li>Select the desired layer to place influences on from the layers list and click “Manage Influences.” This will open a new tab titled “Manage Influences.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Within the manage influence tab a list titled “Influence List,” where all of the influences for the desired layer will reside, will be open. Click “Create” to make a new influence.</li>
<li>A new window will open up titled “Create Influence”</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Select the data series you wish to correspond with the influence in the “Data Series” drop-down menu or create a new “Data Series” record by clicking the star button (see [[Create a Data Series#Creating a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select an influence template to define the parameters for the influence in the “Template” drop-down menu or create a new “Influence Template” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating an Influence Template|Creating an Influence Template]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Define the location of the influence horizontally in the “X Coordinate” field (this can be adjusted at a later time, default: 1)</li>
<li>Define the location of the influence vertically in the “Y Coordinate” field (this can be adjusted at a later time, default: 1)</li>
<li>Select the type of link for the influence in the “Link Type” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>If data series, select the corresponding data series or create a new “Data Series” record by clicking the star button (see [[Create a Data Series#Creating a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>If hardware visual, select the corresponding hardware or create a new “Hardware” record by clicking the star button (see [[Create a Site#Creating Hardware|Creating Hardware]] section for instructions)</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
<li>To edit the position of an influence, either edit the specific influence from the influence list or from the map (see [[#Editing a Map Influence|Editing a Map Influence]] for more information)</li>
</ol>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating an Influence Template==
An influence template provides the visual boundaries that are placed around an influence for a map. Basically, the template will tell the influence what shape to take, if the pixels are going to fade at the edges, and the algorithm to follow in reference to what you are trying to display (usually will be predefined “Power2”). You will need to gather the following information before you create an influence template:
*Name of the influence template you wish to create
*What shape you are intending your influence to have (See [[#Creating a Shape|Creating a Shape]] for instructions)
*Fade on the influence, basically if you want it to have hard edges or softer edges
[[File:Influence Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Influence Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Influence Templates” this will open a new tab titled “Influence Templates”</li>
<li>Within the influence templates tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Influence Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the influence template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Standard Humidity, Standard Temperature, Standard Power kW, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the influence template in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Select what shape you want to make the influence template in the drop-down menu called “Shapes” or create a new “Shape” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Shape|Creating a Shape]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>Select the “Algorithm” to be applied to the shape from the drop down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Default for temperature / humidity: Power2</li>
<li>Default for power: Constant</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter a value for the “Fade Pixels” of the shape if you want soft edges when two influences collide</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>The value is the number of pixels at the edge of the shape that will be softened</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Legend==
A legend is how to define the value boundaries for an influence to represent colors. The legend is seen at the bottom of a map to visually display the value range in a color scale. It all works as follows: First a data series produces a numerical value and pushes that number to the associated influence, next the influence template will give that numerical value a shape boundary, within the influence template boundary the numerical value will correspond with the legend to produce a certain color value for representation of the influence on the map. You will need to gather the following information to create a legend:
*Name of the legend you wish to create
*Number format template that corresponds with the numerical value you wish to display
*Define a low value for the legend
*Define a high value for the legend
*Define the number of hints you wish the legend to have (hints are the number of values displayed on the legend)
*Choose a gradient file to correspond with your legend
[[File:Legend.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Legend” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Legends” this will open a new tab titled “Legends”</li>
<li>Within the legend tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Legend.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the legend in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Data Center Power, Cost Per Cabinet, Data Center Temps, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the legend in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the number format template to be used with the legend in the “Number Format Template” drop-down menu or create a new “Number Format Template” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Number Format Template|Creating a Number Format Template]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>Enter value of lowest point in the “Low Value” field</li>
<li>Enter value of highest point in the “High Value” field</li>
<li>Enter a number of desired hints in the “# of Hints” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>If you want to represent 0-10, you would select 11 for number of hints</li>
</ol>
<li>Select a gradient file to use for the legend in the “New Gradient File” section</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Layer==
A layer is an aspect of the map that serves a very important purpose. The first layer is the solid background, which is the foundational piece for creating any map. The second layer is the layer on which the influences sit, which is usually placed in between the solid background and the floor plan layer. The third layer is a transparent floor plan layout of the data center; the top-down view of what infrastructure (cabinets, PDU’s, UPS, etc.) is located within the room. Lastly, you can add a link layer which allows you to click on the map and link out to either a URL, data series, graph, map, LiveTile, or a piece of hardware directly. This order of layering provides the capabilities to show a floor layout, 9-box model, risk assessment, etc. and the abilities to place influences on top to paint a clear picture of real-time metrics in your data center. You will need to gather the following information to create a layer:
*Name of the layer you wish to create
*What type of layer that is to be created; basic influence, image, link, or solid
*Legend you wish to correspond to the influences that will be placed on the map (see [[#Creating a Legend|Creating a Legend]] for instructions)
[[File:Create Layer.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Layer” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Layers” this will open a new tab titled “Layers”</li>
<li>Within the layers tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Layer.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the layer in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Floor Plan, Cost Per Cabinet, Humidity % 10 inch, Solid Background, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the layer in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the type of layer desired in the “Layer Type” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>If “Basic Influence," choose which legend to use in the “Legend” drop-down menu or create a new “Legend” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Legend|Creating a Legend]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>If “Image," select the appropriate image from the drop-down menu or create a new “Image” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Uploading an Image|Uploading an Image]] section for instructions. Select the placement of the image from the drop-down menu.</li>
<li>If “Link," no additional information is needed</li>
<li>If “Solid," define the desired color and percentage of transparency in the “Color” and “Transparency Percentage” fields</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create,” you can now view your layer in the Layers List</li>
<li>If you created a "Link Layer" see the next steps in section [[#Attaching a Link to a Link Layer|Attaching a Link to a Link Layer]]</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Attaching a Link to a Link Layer==

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Layers” this will open a new tab titled “Layers”</li>
<li>Select the desired link layer you want to add a link to from the “Layer List”. If the link layer is not created see [[#Creating a Layer|Creating a Layer]] section for instructions</li>
<li>On the bottom half of the screen, click "Manage Links"</li>
[[File:Manage-Links.png]]
<ol type="a">
<li>In the new tab,(in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Link”</li>
[[File:Create Link.JPG]]
<ol type="i">
<li>Enter the name of the link in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Example: Google, Facebook, Avg Cold Aisle Data Series, Executive Summary Map</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional details about the link in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the shape you want the link to have on the map from the drop down menu or create a new “Shape” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Shape|Creating a Shape]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Define the location of the Link horizontally in the “X Coordinate” field (this can be adjusted at a later time, default: 1) (see [[Create Map#Moving an Influence or Link Location on a Map|Moving an Influence or Link Location on a Map]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Define the location of the Link vertically in the “Y Coordinate” field (this can be adjusted at a later time, default: 1) (see [[Create Map#Moving an Influence or Link Location on a Map|Moving an Influence or Link Location on a Map]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select the type of link for the link layer in the “Link Type” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>If URL, enter URL into the text box</li>
<li>If data Series, select the corresponding data series from the drop-down menu or create a new data series record by clicking the star button (see [[Create a Data Series#Creating a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>If graph, select the corresponding graph from the drop-down menu or create a new graph record by clicking on the star button (see [[Create Graph#Creating a Graph|Creating a Graph]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>If hardware, select the corresponding hardware from the drop-down menu or create a new hardware record by clicking on the star button (see [[Create a Site#Creating Hardware|Creating Hardware]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>If LiveTile, select the corresponding LiveTile from the drop-down menu or create a new LiveTile record by clicking on the star button (see [[Create LiveTile#Creating a LiveTile|Creating a LiveTile]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>If Map, select the corresponding Map from the drop-down menu or create a new Map record by clicking on the star button (see [[Create Map#Creating a Map|Creating a Map]] section for instructions) </li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
<li>You have just successfully added a link to the specified layer.</li>
<li>To add your new layer to a map, see section [[Create Map#Applying a Layer to a Map|Applying a Layer to a Map]] for instructions </li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Number Format Template==
A number format template takes a raw number value and changes it into usable and contextual metrics. One would typically use this when formatting from Amps to kW or a whole number to a dollar amount or percentage, but it is not limited to that. You will need to gather the following information to create a number format template:
*Name of the number format template you wish to create
*Specified type of number format template; either simple, currency, or java decimal pattern
[[File:Number Format Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Number Format Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and select the button called “Number Format Templates” this will open a new tab titled “Number Format Templates”</li>
<li>Within the number format templates tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Number Format Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the number format template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Fahrenheit (rounded), Percent, kWh, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the number format template in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the type of number format template in the “Type” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>If “Simple” type, define Prefix and Suffix</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Prefix: $, etc.</li>
<li>Suffix: kW, Amps, Tons, Months</li>
</ol>
<li>If “Currency” type, choose “Locale” from the drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Default: en_US</li>
</ol>
<li>If “Java Decimal Pattern” type, enter the pattern in the “Pattern” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>To create a number with a single value after the decimal, you would enter: ##.#</li>
</ol>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Payment==
A payment record, referring to the payment for any asset, is a way to track a payment for a specific device and when/who the payment goes to through the LiveDC platform. You will need to gather the following information before you create a payment record:
*Date of the payment
*Amount to be paid
*How you will be paying the payment (see [[#Creating a Payment Type|Creating a Payment Type]] for instructions)
*Who the payment is paid by (see [[#Creating a Business Unit|Creating a Business Unit]] for instructions)
*Who the payment is paid to (see [[#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] for instructions)
[[File:Payment.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Enter the date of when the payment for the hardware is to be paid in the “Date” field</li>
<li>Enter the amount of the payment in the “Amount” field</li>
<li>Select the type of payment in the “Type” drop-down menu or create a new “Payment Type” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Payment Type|Creating a Payment Type]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select who will be making the payment in the “Paid By” drop-down menu or create a new “Paid By” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Business Unit|Creating a Business Unit]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select to whom the payment is going to in the “Paid To” drop-down menu or create a new “Paid To” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Add tags to the payment in the section titled “Tags” by selecting from the drop down menu and clicking the left-hand facing arrow or create a new “Tag” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating Tags|Creating Tags]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the payment in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Payment Type==
A payment type is defining the mode of how the payment is paid. Whether that be a check or automatic deposit, it’s the way to define how you are paying for an asset within the LiveDC platform.
[[File:Payment Type.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Payment Type” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Payment Types” this will open a new tab titled “Payment types”</li>
<li>Within the payment types tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Payment Type.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the payment type in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the payment type in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Physical Disk==
A physical disk is used to store all server data. LiveDC provides an avenue of tracking these disks for each piece of hardware. It is valuable to track each disk for the purposes of asset management.

[[File:Physical Disk.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Enter the amount of physical disks of the hardware in the “Quantity” field</li>
<li>Enter the amount of capacity the physical disk has in the “Capacity in GB” field</li>
<li>Select the physical disk RAID that is utilized by the hardware in the “RAID” drop-down menu or create a new “Physical Disk RAID” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Physical Disk RAID|Creating a Physical Disk RAID]] section for instructions) </li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the physical disk RAID in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: Disk Controller</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the physical disk RAID in the “Details” field</li>
</ol>
<li>Select the physical disk speed that is utilized by the hardware in the “Speed” drop-down menu or create a new “Physical Disk Speed” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Physical Disk Speed|Creating a Physical Disk Speed]] section for instructions)</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the physical disk speed in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the physical disk speed in the “Details” field</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug==
The LiveDC platform provides a means of tracking power plugs for each piece of hardware. This is valuable from the standpoint of tracking single and dual corded devices. You will need to gather the following information before creating a power plug:
*Number of power plugs for the specific piece of hardware
*Type of power plug
*Observed wattage
*Estimated wattage
*Amount of wattage displayed on the nameplate of the hardware
*Amount of ampere
*Backup source of the hardware
*What circuit the hardware is linked back to
*Amount of voltage for the hardware
[[File:Power Plug.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>In the window titled “Creating Hardware”, enter the amount of Power Plugs for the piece of hardware in the “Quantity” field</li>
<li>Select the type of power plug in the “Plug Type” drop-down menu or create a new “Plug Type” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Power Plug Type|Creating a Power Plug Type]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Enter the amount of watts observed in the “Observed Watts” field)</li>
<li>Enter the amount of watts estimated in the “Estimated Watts” field</li>
<li>Enter the amount of watts on the nameplate of the hardware in the “Nameplate Watts” field</li>
<li>Select an ampere for the power plug in the “Ampere” drop-down menu or create a new “Ampere” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Power Plug Ampere|Creating a Power Plug Ampere]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select a backup source for the power plug in the “Backup Source” drop-down menu or create a new “Backup Source” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Power Plug Backup Source|Creating a Power Plug Backup Source]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select a power circuit for the power plug in the “Circuit” drop-down menu or create a new “Circuit” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Power Plug Circuit|Creating a Power Plug Circuit]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select a voltage for the power plug in the “Voltage” drop-down menu or create a new “Voltage” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Power Plug Voltage|Creating a Power Plug Voltage]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug Ampere==
LiveDC tracks the amperage that is produced in each power plug. Tracking such information is useful for estimating power usage throughout your data center.

[[File:Power Plug Ampere.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Power Plug Ampere” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Power Plug Amperes” this will open a new tab titled “Power Plug Amperes”</li>
<li>Within the power plug amperes tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Power Plug Amperes.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the power plug ampere in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the power plug ampere in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug Backup Source==
Tracking the backup source related to each power plug for hardware is important information to have on hand in the case of a power failure or outage. LiveDC will track the backup power source for each piece of hardware located in your data center.
[[File:Power Plug Backup.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Power Plug Backup Source” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Power Plug Backup Sources” this will open a new tab titled “Power Plug Backup Sources”</li>
<li>Within the power plug backup sources tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Power Plug Backup Source.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the power plug backup source in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the power plug backup source in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug Circuit==
LiveDC can track which specific circuit breaker(s) a piece of hardware is connected to. This sort of information is valuable to know for proactively managing scheduled maintenance and powering down hardware.
[[File:Power Plug Circuit.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Power Plug Circuit” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Power Plug Circuits” this will open a new tab titled “Power Plug Circuits”</li>
<li>Within the power plug circuits tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Power Plug Circuits.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the power plug circuit in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the power plug circuit in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug Type==
In LiveDC, the type of power plug that is used can be tied back to a specific piece of hardware. We track this information to help identify how many plugs of each type are available in each rack and how many are used.
[[File:Power Plug Type.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Power Plug Type” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click called “Power Plug Types” this will open a new tab titled “Power Plug Types”</li>
<li>Within the power plug types tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Power Plug Type.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the power plug type in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the power plug type in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug Voltage==
Tracking voltage, utilizing the LiveDC platform, is a simple and valuable operation. By entering the voltage information about a specific piece of hardware, you are able to plan for power usage and estimate monthly costs surrounding a single device or many devices.
[[File:Power Plug Voltage.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Power Plug Voltage” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Power Plug Voltages” this will open a new tab titled “Power Plug Voltages”</li>
<li>In the power plug voltages tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Power Plug Voltage.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the power plug voltage in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the power plug voltage in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Product==
LiveDC utilizes a parent-child relationship for creating and tracking products. Products tie directly to assets in your data center and make the search function of LiveDC a valuable means of accessing and analyzing your information. You will need to gather the following information before creating a product:
*Manufacturer of the product
*Category of the product
*Model of the product
*Model number of the product
*Generation of the product
[[File:Create Product.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Product” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Products” this will open a new tab titled “Product”</li>
<li>Within the products tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Product” or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, basic tab in the “Product” section, click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the manufacturer name of the product in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Dell, Oracle, EMC, HP, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the manufacturer name of the product in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the products tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, basic tab, “Product” section, click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the category name of the product in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Server, Storage, Network, or Infrastructure</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the category name of the product in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the manufacturer in the “Parent Product” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Dell, Oracle, EMC, HP, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the products tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, basic tab, “Product” section, click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the model name of the product in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: ProLiant, PowerEdge, SunFire, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the model name of the product in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the “Manufacturer – Category” in the “Parent Product” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Dell-Server</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the products tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, basic tab, “Product” section, click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the model number name of the product in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: DL385, 2900, X4250, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the model number name of the product in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the “Manufacturer – Category – Model” in the “Parent Product” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Dell-Server-ProLiant</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the products tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, basic tab, “Product” section, click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the generation / version name of the product in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: G5, V2, 7.1, etc</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the qualifier name of the product in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the “Manufacturer – Category – Model – Model Number” in the “Parent Product” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: Dell-Server-Proliant-DL385</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>You can create as many levels of information as needed, but the 5 levels we have just described seem to cover almost all instances of product tracking</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a SAN Connection==
A SAN (Storage Area Network) connection can be tracked within the LiveDC platform. Tracking this information in LiveDC is valuable, for storage devices especially, to provide an understanding of which SAN fabrics a device is connected to and to determine if there is redundancy. You will need to gather the following information before creating a SAN connection record:
*Number of connections the hardware has
*Name of the SAN
*Amount of capacity in GB of the SAN connection
[[File:SAN Connection.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Enter the amount of SAN connections the hardware obtains in the “Number of Connections” field</li>
<li>Select the SAN in the “SAN” drop-down menu or create a new “SAN” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a SAN|Creating a SAN]] for instructions)</li>
<li>Enter the amount of capacity the SAN connection has in the “Capacity in GB” field</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a SAN==
The SAN (Storage Area Network) is used primarily with storage devices. Tracking this information in LiveDC is valuable, for storage devices especially, to provide an understanding of which SAN fabrics a device is connected to and to determine if there is redundancy between SANs.

[[File:Create SAN.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create SAN” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “SANs” this will open a new tab titled “SANs”</li>
<li>Within the SANs tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create SAN.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the SAN in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: SAN A, SAN B, Storage SAN, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the SAN in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating Service Infos==
LiveDC tracks what and who will perform service on each piece of hardware through the service infos section. This information is valuable to track for knowing who to contact in the case of scheduled maintenance, an outage, or failure. You will need to gather the following information before creating a service info record:
*Name of the provider (See [[#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] for instructions)
*Type of service that the provider performs
*Start date of the service for the hardware
*End date of the service for the hardware
*Discount program of the service (See [[#Creating a Discount Program|Creating a Discount Program]] for instructions)
*Amount of base monthly cost for the service
[[File:Service Info.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Select the company that does the service for the hardware in the “Provider” drop-down menu or create a new “Company” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select the type of service the company provides for that hardware in the “Service Type” drop-down menu</li>
<li>Select a beginning date of the service in the “Start Date” field</li>
<li>Select an ending date of the service in the “Stop Date” field</li>
<li>Select a discount program for the company in the “Discount Program” drop-down menu or create a new “Discount Program” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Discount Program|Creating a Discount Program]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Enter a monthly cost in the “Base Monthly Cost” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the service in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Service Tier==
In the LiveDC platform, you can track both the requested and actual service tier associated with each piece of hardware. This information is valuable to have when considering recovery times and planning for outages and failures.

[[File:Service Tier.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Service Tier” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Service Tiers” this will open a new tab titled “Service Tiers”</li>
<li>Within the service tiers tab, in the upper left-hand corner click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Service Tier.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the service tier in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Tier 1, Tier 2, Tier 3, Tier 4, etc. </li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the service tier in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Shape==
Shapes in LiveDC refer to the boundaries for an influence that are placed on maps. The shapes for an influence can be either a square or a circle, but can be manipulated to represent different sizes for cabinets, PDUs, UPS equipment, etc. A color will fill the shape when it is corresponded to a legend on the map. You will need to gather the following information before creating a shape:
*Name of the shape you wish to create
*Which basic shape you are wishing to create, circle or square
*Pixel height of the shape
*Scale width of the shape you are creating
*Degrees of rotation of the shape
*Disregard the last 4 items (fill color, fill transparency, border pixels, border color) as they have no impact on the shape at the current time, they are placeholders for future functionality

[[File:Shape.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Shape” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Shapes” this will open a new tab titled “Shapes”</li>
<li>Within the shapes tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Shape.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the shape in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Cabinet, Standard Humidity Return, Standard Temperature, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the shape in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select what kind of shape to create in the “Basic Shape” drop-down menu</li>
<li>Define the height of the shape in the “Pixel Height” field</li>
<li>Enter a value for the width in the “Scale Width” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>This value is in relation to the height, so if you wanted a square that was 10 high x 20 wide, you would enter 10 for height and 2 for scale width</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter a value of rotation for the shape in the “Rotation Degrees” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>This would be used if you wanted to represent a diamond, you would create a square and rotate it 90 degrees</li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a SNMP V1 Template==
An SNMP V1 template is a set of rules for Elicit to follow to collect data points from an asset. Utilizing a web address, read community string, and an OID, Elicit will gather information using these instructions and populate data series for use in maps, LiveTiles, and/or graphs. You will need to gather the following information to create an SNMP V1 template:
*Name of the SNMP V1 template you wish to create
*IP address or URL for Elicit to communicate with
*Specified read community string: default is public
*Specific OID for the piece of information you are trying to gather
*The regular expression to tell Elicit which data you are specifically looking for
*An adjustment expression for the data being returned to the LiveDC platform
*Specific invalid raw values that are typically returned, which can be excluded. Some sensors return a 0 when in error state.

[[File:SNMP V1 Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create SNMP V1 Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “SNMP V1 Templates” this will open a new tab titled “SNMP V1 Templates”</li>
<li>Within the SNMP V1 templates tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create SNMP V1 Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the SNMP V1 template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Chatsworth Humidity (Port 1), Chatsworth Power % 30A (Phase XY), etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the SNMP V1 template in the “Details” field</li>
<li>The parameter format can be left as is and provides a way for you to specify what values you need to enter and what the label should be in the pop-up screen</li>
<li>Enter the Internet Protocol Address in the “Address” field using the defined parameter format</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: { {Address} }</li>
<li>This will prompt the user to enter the specific IP address each time</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter the community string in the “Read Community String” field using the defined parameter format</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>If standard across the organization, you can enter it here and not have to enter it again when creating a data series</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter the object identification number in the “Object Identifier OID” field using the defined parameter format</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Usually very specific for a type of power strip and can be entered here once and used for all power strips of that type</li>
<li>Example: 1.3.6.1.4.1.319.1.2.1.0</li>
</ol>
<li>Define the regular expression in the “Regular Expression” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Leave blank as it is not really leveraged at this time</li>
</ol>
<li>Define the adjustment expression in the “Adjustment Expression” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>This will take the raw value received via SNMP and perform an adjustment on that before sending the database for data normalization</li>
<li>Example: Raw/100</li>
</ol>
<li>Add any raw values that are invalid in the “Invalid Raw Values” field and click the left-hand facing arrow, if applicable</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating Tags==
Tags are what connects almost everything together in LiveDC. Giving a record a tag is very valuable for tracking purposes. Objects with tags are easily found using LiveDC's robust search function. Tags can be used to define location, category of product, type of metric in a data series, client specific tags, or anything else for that matter.

[[File:Tag.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Tag” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Tags” this will open a new tab titled “Tags”</li>
<li>Within the Tags tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Tag.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the tag in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: A Side, Row 10, Server, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the Tag in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Timing Template==
Data series utilize timing templates to tell Elicit how often to collect data from a device. The templates can be configured from polling once every minute to once every month, depending on how important the data is to the end-user.

[[File:Timing Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Timing Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Timing Templates” this will open a new tab titled “Timing Templates”</li>
<li>Within the timing templates tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Timing Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the timing template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: 1 minute, 1 hour, 15 minute, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the timing template in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Define how often the desired poll will take place in the “Poll Period” field</li>
<li>Define how often the desired warning period will last in the “Warning Period” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>This warning period will provide alerts if a data series has not communicated within the specified interval</li>
</ol>
<li>Define when, if at all, the poll will expire in the “Expire Period” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>This expire period will provide alerts if a data series has not communicated within the specified interval and will expire the reading so that it does not show up on maps</li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Trend Template==
A trend template tells Elicit to create a data series based upon the data that is in a separate data series. The new data series is created by choosing either the average, maximum, median, minimum, or sum of the data series being polled.

[[File:Trend Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Trend Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Trend Templates” this will open a new tab titled “Trend Templates”</li>
<li>Within the trend templates tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Trend Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the trend template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Past 3 Months, Past Day, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the trend template in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select what “Operation” you would like to perform on the data from the drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Average, Maximum, Minimum, Median, Sum</li>
</ol>
<li>Define time period in which you would like the data to trend in the “Time Period” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: 30 Days, 1 Month, 24 Hours</li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Uploading an Image==
Uploading an image provides flexibility for the user to customize maps specific to one’s data center. Maps are not limited to just a floor plan though, you can upload virtually any image to construct a map that will depict your data.

[[File:Upload Image.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Uploaded Images” this will open a new tab titled “Upload Images”</li>
<li>Within the uploaded images tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Uploaded Image.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the uploaded image in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: DC Room 1, Storage, POD 2, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Choose the file that to upload in the “Image File” section</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the uploaded image in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a URL Scrape Template==
A URL scrape template provides an avenue for Elicit to collect data from a specific web page (a web page with no login requirements). This is valuable for collecting data off of the web for many different reasons. Typically the data series created are based upon intelligent assets in the data center that have a web server serving up an HTTP page. You will need to gather the following information prior to creating a URL scrape template:
*Name of the URL scrape template
*Specific URL you intend to collect the data from
*Regular expression to tell Elicit where to look within all the text on the web page
*Adjustment expression, if you want to format the data as it enters the LiveDC platform
*Any invalid raw values you do not wish to use in the data series

[[File:URL Scrape Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create URL Scrape Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “URL Scrape Templates” this will open a new tab titled “URL Scrape Templates”</li>
<li>Within the URL Scrape Templates tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create URL Scrape Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the URL scrape template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: C:\ Drive, Configuration File Collection, CPU, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the URL scrape template in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Define the format for the parameters of the URL scrape template in the “Parameter Format” fields</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: {{ }}</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter the URL that will be used to gather the data in the “URL Scrape Template” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: File:///c|public/{ {hostname} }{ {counter} }.txt</li>
</ol>
<li>Define the regular expression in the “Regular Expression” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: =(\d*)</li>
</ol>
<li>Define the adjustment expression in the “Adjustment Expression” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: 100-raw</li>
</ol>
<li>Add any raw values that are invalid in the “Invalid Raw Values” field and click the left-hand facing arrow, if applicable</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Virtual Machine Datacenter==
Since there is no physical location to put a virtual machine, creating a virtual machine datacenter is the solution. This is the place for virtual machines to reside. It ties the virtual machine to a logical location for tracking purposes.

[[File:Virtual Machine Data Center.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Virtual Machine” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Virtual Machine Datacenters” this will open a new tab titled “Virtual Machine Datacenters”</li>
<li>Within the Virtual Machine Datacenters tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Virtual Machine Datacenter.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the virtual machine datacenter in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: Virtual Room 1</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the virtual machine datacenter in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Importing from a File==
Importing from a file is the mode of entering large amounts of data records into LiveDC at one time. There is a learning curve to this process, but once this skill is acquired it becomes very useful. Essentially, the user is inputting all of their data records in at the same time and letting LiveDC do the heavy lifting and analysis. Importing from a file is used all across the LiveDC platform, where mostly everything in the software can be imported in a bulk format. You will need to gather the following information prior to importing a file:
*Asset specific information
*Location and physical dimension information regarding the asset
*Data series specific information
*Visual specific information

[[File:Import from File.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and select the button called “Import from File…” this will open a new window titled “Import from File”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Click the “Browse” button to select the document to import into LiveDC</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Once the file is selected, you will have the option to perform analysis on the imported data before committing that information to the database</li>
<li>This helps prevent errors and will give you the results back to ensure all values are correct before actually importing the data</li>
</ol>
<li>To perform an analysis on the document, check the box titled “Perform Analysis Only” to green check mark</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Once you have validated that there are no errors and the data looks correct (denoted by performing analysis and getting all green highlighted columns back in the results spreadsheet)</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Green means you are good to go, there are no errors found</li>
<li>Yellow means warning, something has been updated but you are still ok to upload</li>
<li>Red means error, this item will not be imported into LiveDC</li>
<li>No color or white means that that item is already in the software and there are no changes to it</li>
</ol>
<li>To actually import the file and commit the data into LiveDC, check the box titled “Perform Analysis Only” to change it to the red X</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Import”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Graph Line==
[[File:Graph Line.PNG]]
===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Enter the following information in the “Create Graph Line” window </li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the line in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Physical Servers, Average Temperature, Historical Power, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter a name for the legend of this line in the “Legend Label” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Historical, Max Temp, Physical Servers, etc.</li>
<li>This will appear in the bottom of the graph window</li>
</ol>
<li>Select a color for the graph line in the “Color” section</li>
<li>Select the data series that will provide the data for the graph line in the drop-down menu or create a new data series record by clicking the star button (See [[Create a Data Series#Creating a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Add a futures line to show how the graph line could change in the future by clicking the star button to create a new “Futures” record </li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Enter the name of the graph line future in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Example: 2.5%</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter a label for the legend in the “Legend Label” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Example: 2.5%</li>
</ol>
<li>Define the period of time the graph will extend into the future in the “Time Period” section</li>
<li>Enter the amount of future graph lines to come from the historical data in the “Number Per Period” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Example: 1 Month</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter a formula for the future graph line in the “Formula” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Example: prev*1.05</li>
</ol>
<li>Define a color for the future graph line in the “Color” field</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Add” on the “Create Graph Line” window</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Physical Disk RAID==
A physical disk RAID is a redundant array of independent disks. LiveDC provides an avenue for tracking these disks for each piece of hardware. It is valuable to track each disk for the purposes of asset management.

[[File:Physical Disk RAID.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>In the “Create Physical Disk RAID” window enter the following:</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the physical disk RAID in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: Disk Controller</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the physical disk RAID in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Physical Disk Speed==
LiveDC provides an avenue for tracking these disks for each piece of hardware. It is valuable to track each disk speed for the purposes of asset management.

[[File:Physical Disk Speed.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>In the “Create Physical Disk Speed” window enter the following:</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the physical disk speed in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the physical disk speed in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Exporting a File==
[[File:Export.PNG]]
===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left side), click the desired tab to export records from. To find specific records, utilize LiveDC's robust Search feature (See [[Using LiveDC Search#How to Use Search|How to Use Search]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Once the desired records are in a list format on the screen, click “Export” in the top right corner of the screen</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>A small window titled “Confirm Export” will appear</li>
<li>Click "Export"</li>
<li>LiveDC will compile an Excel spreadsheet of the desired records (these records can be used for the mass import format as a template for what data needs to be entered before importing)</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>To import new records (See [[#Importing from a File|Importing from a File]] section for instructions)</li>
</ol>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Adding a Floor Plan to a Map==
===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>First you need to upload a PNG floor plan into LiveDC (See [[#Uploading an Image|Uploading an Image]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>Once the floor plan is uploaded into LiveDC, On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Layers” this will open a new tab titled “Layers”</li>
<li>Within the layers tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Layer.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the layer in the "Name" Field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Server Room Floor Plan, Data Center Floor Plan</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter additional information about the layer in the "Details" field</li>
<li>For a floor plan layer, we will select "Image" in the "Layer Type" drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>In the drop-down list find the floor plan image you uploaded in step 1</li>
<li>Select "center" from the "Placement" drop-down menu</li>
[[File:Image Layer.JPG]]
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
<li>Next we need to create a Solid Background layer for the map</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Again, in the upper left-hand corner click "Create"</li>
<li>Enter the name of the layer in the "Name" Field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Solid Background</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter additional information about the layer in the "Details" field</li>
<li>For a solid background layer, we will select "Solid" in the "Layer Type" drop-down menu</li>
<li>Select the color you want the background to be</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>We like to use #808080</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter the Transparency Percent</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>We usually do 0%</li>
[[File:Solid Layer.JPG]]
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Visuals” and click “Maps” this will open a new tab titled “Maps”</li>
<li>Within the maps tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Map.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the map in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Operational Model – Cooling, Power %, Operational Cost per Cabinet, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the map in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Define a horizontal size in pixels for the map in the “Width” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>A good rule of thumb is to look at the properties of the image and use those predefined dimensions (usually no more than 1650 pixels)</li>
</ol>
<li>Define a vertical size in pixels for the map in the “Height” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>A good rule of thumb is to look at the properties of the image and use those predefined dimensions (usually no more than 1300 pixels)</li>
</ol>
<li>Add a legend to the map in the section titled “Legends” by selecting from the drop down menu and clicking the left-hand facing arrow or create a new “Legend” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Legend|Creating a Legend]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>In the Map Layers section, click the star button</li>
<li>Select the "Solid Background" layer from the drop-down list</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Change the red x to a green check mark for "Show Dots" and "Show Values"</li>
<li>Do not change line color, text color, background color or background transparency percent</li>
[[File:Solid Map Layer.JPG]]
<li>Click "Add"</li>
</ol>
<li>Again, click the star button in the Map Layers section</li>
<li>Select the floor plan layer you created above from the drop-down list</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Change the red x to a green check mark for "Show Dots"</li>
<li>Do not change line color, text color, background color or background transparency percent</li>
[[File:Floor plan map layer.JPG]]
<li>Click "Add"</li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
<li>You have now created a Map with a floor plan. You will need to add additional layers to the map to see data. (See [[Map#Creating a Map|Creating a Map]] section for instructions)</li>
</ol>
</ol>

File:Floor plan map layer.JPG

2015-01-27T16:55:52Z

Khackenmiller:

Extras

2015-01-27T16:55:39Z

Khackenmiller: /* Instructions */

__TOC__

==Creating Accounting Shares==
An accounting share is a way to track what department or function of the business owns or is making payments for a piece of hardware. You will need to know the following information to create an accounting share:
*Business unit or business department having ownership of the device
*Number of shares that business unit owns
[[File:Accounting Share.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Select a business unit from the “Business Unit” drop-down menu or create a new “Business Unit” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Business Unit|Creating a Business Unit]] section for instructions)</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Examples: Accounting, Production, Marketing, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter the desired amount of shares into the “Shares” field</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating Address Type==
Creating an address type is required for each operating system, usually defined as IPv4 or IPv6. The address type is not considered the actual address.You will need to know the following information before creating an address type:
*Whether the address type is an IP-V4 or IP-V6
[[File:Address Type.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Address Type” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Address Types” this will open a new tab titled “Address Types”</li>
<li>In the address types tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Address Type”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the address type in the field titled “Name”</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: IP Address, IP Address (location-based), etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the address type in the “Details” field</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Business Unit==
A business unit or business department is a great way to track ownership or affected areas of the organization that touch a specific piece of hardware, software, or virtual machine. A business unit uses the parent-child relationship like a hardware product. This can be utilized for accounting and tracking purposes of the asset. You will need to gather the following information when creating a business unit:
*Name of the business unit or function you wish to create
*A parent business unit, if any
[[File:Business Unit.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Business Unit” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Business Unit” this will open a new tab titled “Business units”</li>
<li>Within the business unit tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Business Unit” or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, service tab in the business unit section click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the company name in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Target, Best Buy, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the name of the company in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the business unit tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, service tab in the business unit section click the star button</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the department in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Marketing, Accounting, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the department name in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the company name in the “Parent Business Unit” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Target, Best Buy, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Company==
Creating a company is a way to distinguish the physical history and payment history of an asset in the event of a merger and acquisition or any other event which would involve transfer of ownership. You will need to know the following information before creating a company:
*Name of the company you wish to create
[[File:Company.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Company” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Companies” this will open a new tab titled “Companies”</li>
<li>Within the companies tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Company.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the company name in the field titled “Name”</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the company in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Component==
Components tracking is a great way to record what is contained within a specific piece of hardware you are creating. The component information can give you insight into how much of a resource you are utilizing and consuming in your data center. It tracks everything from power to memory to peripheral cards inserted into the back of your servers. You will need to gather the following information to create a component record for your hardware:
*Memory in GB for the hardware
*Number of logical disk volumes
*Number of network interfaces for the hardware
*Number of management interfaces for the hardware
*Number of CPU’s in the hardware
*Other components, utilizing the parent-child relationship, located within the hardware
*Physical disks
*SAN connections
*Number and type of power plugs
[[File:Component.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Component” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Components” this will open a new tab titled “Components”</li>
<li>In the components tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Component.” If you are in the “Create Hardware” window, component tab in the component section click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the peripheral name of the components in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Network Card, PCIE Card, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the peripheral in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the components tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, component tab in the component section click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the ports in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: port numbers</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the ports in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the peripheral in the “Parent Component” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Network Card, PCIE Card, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Contact==
A contact is utilized when referring to an asset, specifically a piece of hardware. This is the organization and person you would contact if the asset has a disruption of service or experiences a failure or outage. You will need to gather the following information when creating a contact:
*Type of contact; electrician, service provider, maintenance, etc.
*Name of the contact; first and last name, company the contact works for, and contact method (see [[#Creating a Contact Method Type|Creating a Contact Method Type]] for instructions)
[[File:Contact.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Contact” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Contacts” this will open a new tab titled “Contacts”</li>
<li>Within the contact tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Contact”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the first name of the contact in the “First Name” field</li>
<li>Enter the last name of the contact in the “Last Name” field</li>
<li>Select which company the contact is associated with in the “Company” drop-down menu or create a new “Company” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Add a contact method by clicking the star button. In the “Create Contact Method” window enter the following:</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Enter a “Type” from the drop down menu or by clicking on the star button to create a new “Type” record. (see [[#Creating a Contact Method Type|Creating a Contact Method Type]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>Enter a phone number or email for the contact method in the “Value” field </li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information for the contact in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Contact Method Type==
A contact method type provides the means to reach the point of contact for an asset, typically for hardware. The contact method type refers to the email or phone number used to get in touch with the person. You will need to gather the following information when creating a contact method type:
*What mode of contact is preferred for reaching this person; email, SMS, mobile phone, etc.
[[File:Contact Method Type.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Contact Method Type” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Contact Method Types” this will open a new tab titled “Contact Method Types”</li>
<li>Within the contact method type tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Contact Method Type.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the contact method type in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the contact method type in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a CPU Type==
[[File:CPU Type.PNG]]
===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create CPU Type” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “CPU Types” this will open a new tab titled “CPU Types”</li>
<li>Within the CPU type tab, in the upper left-hand corner click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create CPU Type.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the CPU type in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Intel Xeon E5450</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the CPU type in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Enter the speed of the CPU type in the field “Speed in GHz”</li>
<li>Enter how many physical cores the CPU type has in the “Physical Cores” field</li>
<li>Enter how many virtual cores the CPU type has in the “Virtual Cores” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Discount Program==
A discount program is used when referring to the service of an asset, typically hardware. Creating a discount program record is valuable for tracking what service company your dollars are going to and what deal you are receiving from a discount standpoint. You will need to gather the following information before creating a discount program record:
*Name of the discount program, for tracking purposes
*Percentage of the discount program, to know what deal has been provided by the service company
[[File:Discount Program.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Discount Program” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Discount Program” this will open a new tab titled “Discount Programs”</li>
<li>Within the discount program tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Discount Program.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the discount program in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the discount program in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Enter a discount percent in the field called “Percent”</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Domain==
A domain record refers to a collection of devices within your network, similar to contoso.com, and helps delineate between internal devices and devices that reside in other domains. The LiveDC platform will track what domains are being utilized by which operating systems and provide ease of searching this information. You will need to gather the following information before creating a domain record:
*Name of the domain record you wish to create
[[File:Domain.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Domain” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Domains” this will open a new tab titled “Domains”</li>
<li>Within the domains tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Domain.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the domain in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: company_xyz.local</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the domain in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating an Influence==
An influence is the way to represent what is happening to a specific data series in the data center on a map. The influence is shown by using a color scale, known as a legend, to provide knowledge around the objects real-time state. The influence’s color is affected by the data series it is connected to. As the data in the data series changes, so does the color of the influence, based upon the legend associated with the map. You will need to gather the following information before creating an influence:
*Specific data series that you would like to attach to the influence (see [[Create a Data Series#Creating a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] for instructions)
*Map that you would like to place the influence on (see [[Create Map#Creating a Map|Creating a Map]] for instructions)
*Layer of the map you will be placing the influence on (see [[#Creating a Layer|Creating a Layer]] for instructions)
*Influence template that you will be using to give the influence boundaries, shape, and scale (see [[#Creating an Influence Template|Creating an Influence Template]] for instructions)
[[File:Influence.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Layers” this will open a new tab titled “Layers List”</li>
<li>Select the desired layer to place influences on from the layers list and click “Manage Influences.” This will open a new tab titled “Manage Influences.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Within the manage influence tab a list titled “Influence List,” where all of the influences for the desired layer will reside, will be open. Click “Create” to make a new influence.</li>
<li>A new window will open up titled “Create Influence”</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Select the data series you wish to correspond with the influence in the “Data Series” drop-down menu or create a new “Data Series” record by clicking the star button (see [[Create a Data Series#Creating a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select an influence template to define the parameters for the influence in the “Template” drop-down menu or create a new “Influence Template” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating an Influence Template|Creating an Influence Template]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Define the location of the influence horizontally in the “X Coordinate” field (this can be adjusted at a later time, default: 1)</li>
<li>Define the location of the influence vertically in the “Y Coordinate” field (this can be adjusted at a later time, default: 1)</li>
<li>Select the type of link for the influence in the “Link Type” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>If data series, select the corresponding data series or create a new “Data Series” record by clicking the star button (see [[Create a Data Series#Creating a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>If hardware visual, select the corresponding hardware or create a new “Hardware” record by clicking the star button (see [[Create a Site#Creating Hardware|Creating Hardware]] section for instructions)</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
<li>To edit the position of an influence, either edit the specific influence from the influence list or from the map (see [[#Editing a Map Influence|Editing a Map Influence]] for more information)</li>
</ol>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating an Influence Template==
An influence template provides the visual boundaries that are placed around an influence for a map. Basically, the template will tell the influence what shape to take, if the pixels are going to fade at the edges, and the algorithm to follow in reference to what you are trying to display (usually will be predefined “Power2”). You will need to gather the following information before you create an influence template:
*Name of the influence template you wish to create
*What shape you are intending your influence to have (See [[#Creating a Shape|Creating a Shape]] for instructions)
*Fade on the influence, basically if you want it to have hard edges or softer edges
[[File:Influence Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Influence Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Influence Templates” this will open a new tab titled “Influence Templates”</li>
<li>Within the influence templates tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Influence Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the influence template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Standard Humidity, Standard Temperature, Standard Power kW, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the influence template in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Select what shape you want to make the influence template in the drop-down menu called “Shapes” or create a new “Shape” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Shape|Creating a Shape]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>Select the “Algorithm” to be applied to the shape from the drop down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Default for temperature / humidity: Power2</li>
<li>Default for power: Constant</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter a value for the “Fade Pixels” of the shape if you want soft edges when two influences collide</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>The value is the number of pixels at the edge of the shape that will be softened</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Legend==
A legend is how to define the value boundaries for an influence to represent colors. The legend is seen at the bottom of a map to visually display the value range in a color scale. It all works as follows: First a data series produces a numerical value and pushes that number to the associated influence, next the influence template will give that numerical value a shape boundary, within the influence template boundary the numerical value will correspond with the legend to produce a certain color value for representation of the influence on the map. You will need to gather the following information to create a legend:
*Name of the legend you wish to create
*Number format template that corresponds with the numerical value you wish to display
*Define a low value for the legend
*Define a high value for the legend
*Define the number of hints you wish the legend to have (hints are the number of values displayed on the legend)
*Choose a gradient file to correspond with your legend
[[File:Legend.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Legend” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Legends” this will open a new tab titled “Legends”</li>
<li>Within the legend tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Legend.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the legend in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Data Center Power, Cost Per Cabinet, Data Center Temps, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the legend in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the number format template to be used with the legend in the “Number Format Template” drop-down menu or create a new “Number Format Template” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Number Format Template|Creating a Number Format Template]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>Enter value of lowest point in the “Low Value” field</li>
<li>Enter value of highest point in the “High Value” field</li>
<li>Enter a number of desired hints in the “# of Hints” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>If you want to represent 0-10, you would select 11 for number of hints</li>
</ol>
<li>Select a gradient file to use for the legend in the “New Gradient File” section</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Layer==
A layer is an aspect of the map that serves a very important purpose. The first layer is the solid background, which is the foundational piece for creating any map. The second layer is the layer on which the influences sit, which is usually placed in between the solid background and the floor plan layer. The third layer is a transparent floor plan layout of the data center; the top-down view of what infrastructure (cabinets, PDU’s, UPS, etc.) is located within the room. Lastly, you can add a link layer which allows you to click on the map and link out to either a URL, data series, graph, map, LiveTile, or a piece of hardware directly. This order of layering provides the capabilities to show a floor layout, 9-box model, risk assessment, etc. and the abilities to place influences on top to paint a clear picture of real-time metrics in your data center. You will need to gather the following information to create a layer:
*Name of the layer you wish to create
*What type of layer that is to be created; basic influence, image, link, or solid
*Legend you wish to correspond to the influences that will be placed on the map (see [[#Creating a Legend|Creating a Legend]] for instructions)
[[File:Create Layer.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Layer” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Layers” this will open a new tab titled “Layers”</li>
<li>Within the layers tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Layer.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the layer in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Floor Plan, Cost Per Cabinet, Humidity % 10 inch, Solid Background, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the layer in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the type of layer desired in the “Layer Type” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>If “Basic Influence," choose which legend to use in the “Legend” drop-down menu or create a new “Legend” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Legend|Creating a Legend]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>If “Image," select the appropriate image from the drop-down menu or create a new “Image” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Uploading an Image|Uploading an Image]] section for instructions. Select the placement of the image from the drop-down menu.</li>
<li>If “Link," no additional information is needed</li>
<li>If “Solid," define the desired color and percentage of transparency in the “Color” and “Transparency Percentage” fields</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create,” you can now view your layer in the Layers List</li>
<li>If you created a "Link Layer" see the next steps in section [[#Attaching a Link to a Link Layer|Attaching a Link to a Link Layer]]</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Attaching a Link to a Link Layer==

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Layers” this will open a new tab titled “Layers”</li>
<li>Select the desired link layer you want to add a link to from the “Layer List”. If the link layer is not created see [[#Creating a Layer|Creating a Layer]] section for instructions</li>
<li>On the bottom half of the screen, click "Manage Links"</li>
[[File:Manage-Links.png]]
<ol type="a">
<li>In the new tab,(in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Link”</li>
[[File:Create Link.JPG]]
<ol type="i">
<li>Enter the name of the link in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Example: Google, Facebook, Avg Cold Aisle Data Series, Executive Summary Map</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional details about the link in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the shape you want the link to have on the map from the drop down menu or create a new “Shape” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Shape|Creating a Shape]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Define the location of the Link horizontally in the “X Coordinate” field (this can be adjusted at a later time, default: 1) (see [[Create Map#Moving an Influence or Link Location on a Map|Moving an Influence or Link Location on a Map]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Define the location of the Link vertically in the “Y Coordinate” field (this can be adjusted at a later time, default: 1) (see [[Create Map#Moving an Influence or Link Location on a Map|Moving an Influence or Link Location on a Map]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select the type of link for the link layer in the “Link Type” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>If URL, enter URL into the text box</li>
<li>If data Series, select the corresponding data series from the drop-down menu or create a new data series record by clicking the star button (see [[Create a Data Series#Creating a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>If graph, select the corresponding graph from the drop-down menu or create a new graph record by clicking on the star button (see [[Create Graph#Creating a Graph|Creating a Graph]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>If hardware, select the corresponding hardware from the drop-down menu or create a new hardware record by clicking on the star button (see [[Create a Site#Creating Hardware|Creating Hardware]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>If LiveTile, select the corresponding LiveTile from the drop-down menu or create a new LiveTile record by clicking on the star button (see [[Create LiveTile#Creating a LiveTile|Creating a LiveTile]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>If Map, select the corresponding Map from the drop-down menu or create a new Map record by clicking on the star button (see [[Create Map#Creating a Map|Creating a Map]] section for instructions) </li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
<li>You have just successfully added a link to the specified layer.</li>
<li>To add your new layer to a map, see section [[Create Map#Applying a Layer to a Map|Applying a Layer to a Map]] for instructions </li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Number Format Template==
A number format template takes a raw number value and changes it into usable and contextual metrics. One would typically use this when formatting from Amps to kW or a whole number to a dollar amount or percentage, but it is not limited to that. You will need to gather the following information to create a number format template:
*Name of the number format template you wish to create
*Specified type of number format template; either simple, currency, or java decimal pattern
[[File:Number Format Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Number Format Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and select the button called “Number Format Templates” this will open a new tab titled “Number Format Templates”</li>
<li>Within the number format templates tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Number Format Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the number format template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Fahrenheit (rounded), Percent, kWh, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the number format template in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the type of number format template in the “Type” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>If “Simple” type, define Prefix and Suffix</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Prefix: $, etc.</li>
<li>Suffix: kW, Amps, Tons, Months</li>
</ol>
<li>If “Currency” type, choose “Locale” from the drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Default: en_US</li>
</ol>
<li>If “Java Decimal Pattern” type, enter the pattern in the “Pattern” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>To create a number with a single value after the decimal, you would enter: ##.#</li>
</ol>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Payment==
A payment record, referring to the payment for any asset, is a way to track a payment for a specific device and when/who the payment goes to through the LiveDC platform. You will need to gather the following information before you create a payment record:
*Date of the payment
*Amount to be paid
*How you will be paying the payment (see [[#Creating a Payment Type|Creating a Payment Type]] for instructions)
*Who the payment is paid by (see [[#Creating a Business Unit|Creating a Business Unit]] for instructions)
*Who the payment is paid to (see [[#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] for instructions)
[[File:Payment.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Enter the date of when the payment for the hardware is to be paid in the “Date” field</li>
<li>Enter the amount of the payment in the “Amount” field</li>
<li>Select the type of payment in the “Type” drop-down menu or create a new “Payment Type” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Payment Type|Creating a Payment Type]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select who will be making the payment in the “Paid By” drop-down menu or create a new “Paid By” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Business Unit|Creating a Business Unit]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select to whom the payment is going to in the “Paid To” drop-down menu or create a new “Paid To” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Add tags to the payment in the section titled “Tags” by selecting from the drop down menu and clicking the left-hand facing arrow or create a new “Tag” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating Tags|Creating Tags]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the payment in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Payment Type==
A payment type is defining the mode of how the payment is paid. Whether that be a check or automatic deposit, it’s the way to define how you are paying for an asset within the LiveDC platform.
[[File:Payment Type.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Payment Type” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Payment Types” this will open a new tab titled “Payment types”</li>
<li>Within the payment types tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Payment Type.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the payment type in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the payment type in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Physical Disk==
A physical disk is used to store all server data. LiveDC provides an avenue of tracking these disks for each piece of hardware. It is valuable to track each disk for the purposes of asset management.

[[File:Physical Disk.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Enter the amount of physical disks of the hardware in the “Quantity” field</li>
<li>Enter the amount of capacity the physical disk has in the “Capacity in GB” field</li>
<li>Select the physical disk RAID that is utilized by the hardware in the “RAID” drop-down menu or create a new “Physical Disk RAID” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Physical Disk RAID|Creating a Physical Disk RAID]] section for instructions) </li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the physical disk RAID in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: Disk Controller</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the physical disk RAID in the “Details” field</li>
</ol>
<li>Select the physical disk speed that is utilized by the hardware in the “Speed” drop-down menu or create a new “Physical Disk Speed” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Physical Disk Speed|Creating a Physical Disk Speed]] section for instructions)</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the physical disk speed in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the physical disk speed in the “Details” field</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug==
The LiveDC platform provides a means of tracking power plugs for each piece of hardware. This is valuable from the standpoint of tracking single and dual corded devices. You will need to gather the following information before creating a power plug:
*Number of power plugs for the specific piece of hardware
*Type of power plug
*Observed wattage
*Estimated wattage
*Amount of wattage displayed on the nameplate of the hardware
*Amount of ampere
*Backup source of the hardware
*What circuit the hardware is linked back to
*Amount of voltage for the hardware
[[File:Power Plug.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>In the window titled “Creating Hardware”, enter the amount of Power Plugs for the piece of hardware in the “Quantity” field</li>
<li>Select the type of power plug in the “Plug Type” drop-down menu or create a new “Plug Type” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Power Plug Type|Creating a Power Plug Type]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Enter the amount of watts observed in the “Observed Watts” field)</li>
<li>Enter the amount of watts estimated in the “Estimated Watts” field</li>
<li>Enter the amount of watts on the nameplate of the hardware in the “Nameplate Watts” field</li>
<li>Select an ampere for the power plug in the “Ampere” drop-down menu or create a new “Ampere” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Power Plug Ampere|Creating a Power Plug Ampere]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select a backup source for the power plug in the “Backup Source” drop-down menu or create a new “Backup Source” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Power Plug Backup Source|Creating a Power Plug Backup Source]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select a power circuit for the power plug in the “Circuit” drop-down menu or create a new “Circuit” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Power Plug Circuit|Creating a Power Plug Circuit]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select a voltage for the power plug in the “Voltage” drop-down menu or create a new “Voltage” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Power Plug Voltage|Creating a Power Plug Voltage]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug Ampere==
LiveDC tracks the amperage that is produced in each power plug. Tracking such information is useful for estimating power usage throughout your data center.

[[File:Power Plug Ampere.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Power Plug Ampere” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Power Plug Amperes” this will open a new tab titled “Power Plug Amperes”</li>
<li>Within the power plug amperes tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Power Plug Amperes.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the power plug ampere in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the power plug ampere in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug Backup Source==
Tracking the backup source related to each power plug for hardware is important information to have on hand in the case of a power failure or outage. LiveDC will track the backup power source for each piece of hardware located in your data center.
[[File:Power Plug Backup.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Power Plug Backup Source” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Power Plug Backup Sources” this will open a new tab titled “Power Plug Backup Sources”</li>
<li>Within the power plug backup sources tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Power Plug Backup Source.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the power plug backup source in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the power plug backup source in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug Circuit==
LiveDC can track which specific circuit breaker(s) a piece of hardware is connected to. This sort of information is valuable to know for proactively managing scheduled maintenance and powering down hardware.
[[File:Power Plug Circuit.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Power Plug Circuit” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Power Plug Circuits” this will open a new tab titled “Power Plug Circuits”</li>
<li>Within the power plug circuits tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Power Plug Circuits.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the power plug circuit in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the power plug circuit in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug Type==
In LiveDC, the type of power plug that is used can be tied back to a specific piece of hardware. We track this information to help identify how many plugs of each type are available in each rack and how many are used.
[[File:Power Plug Type.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Power Plug Type” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click called “Power Plug Types” this will open a new tab titled “Power Plug Types”</li>
<li>Within the power plug types tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Power Plug Type.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the power plug type in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the power plug type in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug Voltage==
Tracking voltage, utilizing the LiveDC platform, is a simple and valuable operation. By entering the voltage information about a specific piece of hardware, you are able to plan for power usage and estimate monthly costs surrounding a single device or many devices.
[[File:Power Plug Voltage.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Power Plug Voltage” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Power Plug Voltages” this will open a new tab titled “Power Plug Voltages”</li>
<li>In the power plug voltages tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Power Plug Voltage.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the power plug voltage in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the power plug voltage in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Product==
LiveDC utilizes a parent-child relationship for creating and tracking products. Products tie directly to assets in your data center and make the search function of LiveDC a valuable means of accessing and analyzing your information. You will need to gather the following information before creating a product:
*Manufacturer of the product
*Category of the product
*Model of the product
*Model number of the product
*Generation of the product
[[File:Create Product.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Product” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Products” this will open a new tab titled “Product”</li>
<li>Within the products tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Product” or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, basic tab in the “Product” section, click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the manufacturer name of the product in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Dell, Oracle, EMC, HP, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the manufacturer name of the product in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the products tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, basic tab, “Product” section, click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the category name of the product in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Server, Storage, Network, or Infrastructure</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the category name of the product in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the manufacturer in the “Parent Product” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Dell, Oracle, EMC, HP, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the products tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, basic tab, “Product” section, click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the model name of the product in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: ProLiant, PowerEdge, SunFire, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the model name of the product in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the “Manufacturer – Category” in the “Parent Product” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Dell-Server</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the products tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, basic tab, “Product” section, click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the model number name of the product in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: DL385, 2900, X4250, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the model number name of the product in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the “Manufacturer – Category – Model” in the “Parent Product” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Dell-Server-ProLiant</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the products tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, basic tab, “Product” section, click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the generation / version name of the product in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: G5, V2, 7.1, etc</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the qualifier name of the product in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the “Manufacturer – Category – Model – Model Number” in the “Parent Product” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: Dell-Server-Proliant-DL385</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>You can create as many levels of information as needed, but the 5 levels we have just described seem to cover almost all instances of product tracking</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a SAN Connection==
A SAN (Storage Area Network) connection can be tracked within the LiveDC platform. Tracking this information in LiveDC is valuable, for storage devices especially, to provide an understanding of which SAN fabrics a device is connected to and to determine if there is redundancy. You will need to gather the following information before creating a SAN connection record:
*Number of connections the hardware has
*Name of the SAN
*Amount of capacity in GB of the SAN connection
[[File:SAN Connection.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Enter the amount of SAN connections the hardware obtains in the “Number of Connections” field</li>
<li>Select the SAN in the “SAN” drop-down menu or create a new “SAN” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a SAN|Creating a SAN]] for instructions)</li>
<li>Enter the amount of capacity the SAN connection has in the “Capacity in GB” field</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a SAN==
The SAN (Storage Area Network) is used primarily with storage devices. Tracking this information in LiveDC is valuable, for storage devices especially, to provide an understanding of which SAN fabrics a device is connected to and to determine if there is redundancy between SANs.

[[File:Create SAN.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create SAN” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “SANs” this will open a new tab titled “SANs”</li>
<li>Within the SANs tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create SAN.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the SAN in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: SAN A, SAN B, Storage SAN, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the SAN in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating Service Infos==
LiveDC tracks what and who will perform service on each piece of hardware through the service infos section. This information is valuable to track for knowing who to contact in the case of scheduled maintenance, an outage, or failure. You will need to gather the following information before creating a service info record:
*Name of the provider (See [[#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] for instructions)
*Type of service that the provider performs
*Start date of the service for the hardware
*End date of the service for the hardware
*Discount program of the service (See [[#Creating a Discount Program|Creating a Discount Program]] for instructions)
*Amount of base monthly cost for the service
[[File:Service Info.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Select the company that does the service for the hardware in the “Provider” drop-down menu or create a new “Company” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select the type of service the company provides for that hardware in the “Service Type” drop-down menu</li>
<li>Select a beginning date of the service in the “Start Date” field</li>
<li>Select an ending date of the service in the “Stop Date” field</li>
<li>Select a discount program for the company in the “Discount Program” drop-down menu or create a new “Discount Program” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Discount Program|Creating a Discount Program]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Enter a monthly cost in the “Base Monthly Cost” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the service in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Service Tier==
In the LiveDC platform, you can track both the requested and actual service tier associated with each piece of hardware. This information is valuable to have when considering recovery times and planning for outages and failures.

[[File:Service Tier.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Service Tier” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Service Tiers” this will open a new tab titled “Service Tiers”</li>
<li>Within the service tiers tab, in the upper left-hand corner click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Service Tier.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the service tier in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Tier 1, Tier 2, Tier 3, Tier 4, etc. </li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the service tier in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Shape==
Shapes in LiveDC refer to the boundaries for an influence that are placed on maps. The shapes for an influence can be either a square or a circle, but can be manipulated to represent different sizes for cabinets, PDUs, UPS equipment, etc. A color will fill the shape when it is corresponded to a legend on the map. You will need to gather the following information before creating a shape:
*Name of the shape you wish to create
*Which basic shape you are wishing to create, circle or square
*Pixel height of the shape
*Scale width of the shape you are creating
*Degrees of rotation of the shape
*Disregard the last 4 items (fill color, fill transparency, border pixels, border color) as they have no impact on the shape at the current time, they are placeholders for future functionality

[[File:Shape.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Shape” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Shapes” this will open a new tab titled “Shapes”</li>
<li>Within the shapes tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Shape.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the shape in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Cabinet, Standard Humidity Return, Standard Temperature, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the shape in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select what kind of shape to create in the “Basic Shape” drop-down menu</li>
<li>Define the height of the shape in the “Pixel Height” field</li>
<li>Enter a value for the width in the “Scale Width” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>This value is in relation to the height, so if you wanted a square that was 10 high x 20 wide, you would enter 10 for height and 2 for scale width</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter a value of rotation for the shape in the “Rotation Degrees” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>This would be used if you wanted to represent a diamond, you would create a square and rotate it 90 degrees</li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a SNMP V1 Template==
An SNMP V1 template is a set of rules for Elicit to follow to collect data points from an asset. Utilizing a web address, read community string, and an OID, Elicit will gather information using these instructions and populate data series for use in maps, LiveTiles, and/or graphs. You will need to gather the following information to create an SNMP V1 template:
*Name of the SNMP V1 template you wish to create
*IP address or URL for Elicit to communicate with
*Specified read community string: default is public
*Specific OID for the piece of information you are trying to gather
*The regular expression to tell Elicit which data you are specifically looking for
*An adjustment expression for the data being returned to the LiveDC platform
*Specific invalid raw values that are typically returned, which can be excluded. Some sensors return a 0 when in error state.

[[File:SNMP V1 Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create SNMP V1 Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “SNMP V1 Templates” this will open a new tab titled “SNMP V1 Templates”</li>
<li>Within the SNMP V1 templates tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create SNMP V1 Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the SNMP V1 template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Chatsworth Humidity (Port 1), Chatsworth Power % 30A (Phase XY), etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the SNMP V1 template in the “Details” field</li>
<li>The parameter format can be left as is and provides a way for you to specify what values you need to enter and what the label should be in the pop-up screen</li>
<li>Enter the Internet Protocol Address in the “Address” field using the defined parameter format</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: { {Address} }</li>
<li>This will prompt the user to enter the specific IP address each time</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter the community string in the “Read Community String” field using the defined parameter format</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>If standard across the organization, you can enter it here and not have to enter it again when creating a data series</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter the object identification number in the “Object Identifier OID” field using the defined parameter format</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Usually very specific for a type of power strip and can be entered here once and used for all power strips of that type</li>
<li>Example: 1.3.6.1.4.1.319.1.2.1.0</li>
</ol>
<li>Define the regular expression in the “Regular Expression” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Leave blank as it is not really leveraged at this time</li>
</ol>
<li>Define the adjustment expression in the “Adjustment Expression” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>This will take the raw value received via SNMP and perform an adjustment on that before sending the database for data normalization</li>
<li>Example: Raw/100</li>
</ol>
<li>Add any raw values that are invalid in the “Invalid Raw Values” field and click the left-hand facing arrow, if applicable</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating Tags==
Tags are what connects almost everything together in LiveDC. Giving a record a tag is very valuable for tracking purposes. Objects with tags are easily found using LiveDC's robust search function. Tags can be used to define location, category of product, type of metric in a data series, client specific tags, or anything else for that matter.

[[File:Tag.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Tag” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Tags” this will open a new tab titled “Tags”</li>
<li>Within the Tags tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Tag.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the tag in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: A Side, Row 10, Server, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the Tag in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Timing Template==
Data series utilize timing templates to tell Elicit how often to collect data from a device. The templates can be configured from polling once every minute to once every month, depending on how important the data is to the end-user.

[[File:Timing Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Timing Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Timing Templates” this will open a new tab titled “Timing Templates”</li>
<li>Within the timing templates tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Timing Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the timing template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: 1 minute, 1 hour, 15 minute, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the timing template in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Define how often the desired poll will take place in the “Poll Period” field</li>
<li>Define how often the desired warning period will last in the “Warning Period” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>This warning period will provide alerts if a data series has not communicated within the specified interval</li>
</ol>
<li>Define when, if at all, the poll will expire in the “Expire Period” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>This expire period will provide alerts if a data series has not communicated within the specified interval and will expire the reading so that it does not show up on maps</li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Trend Template==
A trend template tells Elicit to create a data series based upon the data that is in a separate data series. The new data series is created by choosing either the average, maximum, median, minimum, or sum of the data series being polled.

[[File:Trend Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Trend Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Trend Templates” this will open a new tab titled “Trend Templates”</li>
<li>Within the trend templates tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Trend Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the trend template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Past 3 Months, Past Day, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the trend template in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select what “Operation” you would like to perform on the data from the drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Average, Maximum, Minimum, Median, Sum</li>
</ol>
<li>Define time period in which you would like the data to trend in the “Time Period” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: 30 Days, 1 Month, 24 Hours</li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Uploading an Image==
Uploading an image provides flexibility for the user to customize maps specific to one’s data center. Maps are not limited to just a floor plan though, you can upload virtually any image to construct a map that will depict your data.

[[File:Upload Image.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Uploaded Images” this will open a new tab titled “Upload Images”</li>
<li>Within the uploaded images tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Uploaded Image.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the uploaded image in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: DC Room 1, Storage, POD 2, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Choose the file that to upload in the “Image File” section</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the uploaded image in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a URL Scrape Template==
A URL scrape template provides an avenue for Elicit to collect data from a specific web page (a web page with no login requirements). This is valuable for collecting data off of the web for many different reasons. Typically the data series created are based upon intelligent assets in the data center that have a web server serving up an HTTP page. You will need to gather the following information prior to creating a URL scrape template:
*Name of the URL scrape template
*Specific URL you intend to collect the data from
*Regular expression to tell Elicit where to look within all the text on the web page
*Adjustment expression, if you want to format the data as it enters the LiveDC platform
*Any invalid raw values you do not wish to use in the data series

[[File:URL Scrape Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create URL Scrape Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “URL Scrape Templates” this will open a new tab titled “URL Scrape Templates”</li>
<li>Within the URL Scrape Templates tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create URL Scrape Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the URL scrape template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: C:\ Drive, Configuration File Collection, CPU, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the URL scrape template in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Define the format for the parameters of the URL scrape template in the “Parameter Format” fields</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: {{ }}</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter the URL that will be used to gather the data in the “URL Scrape Template” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: File:///c|public/{ {hostname} }{ {counter} }.txt</li>
</ol>
<li>Define the regular expression in the “Regular Expression” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: =(\d*)</li>
</ol>
<li>Define the adjustment expression in the “Adjustment Expression” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: 100-raw</li>
</ol>
<li>Add any raw values that are invalid in the “Invalid Raw Values” field and click the left-hand facing arrow, if applicable</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Virtual Machine Datacenter==
Since there is no physical location to put a virtual machine, creating a virtual machine datacenter is the solution. This is the place for virtual machines to reside. It ties the virtual machine to a logical location for tracking purposes.

[[File:Virtual Machine Data Center.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Virtual Machine” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Virtual Machine Datacenters” this will open a new tab titled “Virtual Machine Datacenters”</li>
<li>Within the Virtual Machine Datacenters tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Virtual Machine Datacenter.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the virtual machine datacenter in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: Virtual Room 1</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the virtual machine datacenter in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Importing from a File==
Importing from a file is the mode of entering large amounts of data records into LiveDC at one time. There is a learning curve to this process, but once this skill is acquired it becomes very useful. Essentially, the user is inputting all of their data records in at the same time and letting LiveDC do the heavy lifting and analysis. Importing from a file is used all across the LiveDC platform, where mostly everything in the software can be imported in a bulk format. You will need to gather the following information prior to importing a file:
*Asset specific information
*Location and physical dimension information regarding the asset
*Data series specific information
*Visual specific information

[[File:Import from File.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and select the button called “Import from File…” this will open a new window titled “Import from File”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Click the “Browse” button to select the document to import into LiveDC</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Once the file is selected, you will have the option to perform analysis on the imported data before committing that information to the database</li>
<li>This helps prevent errors and will give you the results back to ensure all values are correct before actually importing the data</li>
</ol>
<li>To perform an analysis on the document, check the box titled “Perform Analysis Only” to green check mark</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Once you have validated that there are no errors and the data looks correct (denoted by performing analysis and getting all green highlighted columns back in the results spreadsheet)</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Green means you are good to go, there are no errors found</li>
<li>Yellow means warning, something has been updated but you are still ok to upload</li>
<li>Red means error, this item will not be imported into LiveDC</li>
<li>No color or white means that that item is already in the software and there are no changes to it</li>
</ol>
<li>To actually import the file and commit the data into LiveDC, check the box titled “Perform Analysis Only” to change it to the red X</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Import”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Graph Line==
[[File:Graph Line.PNG]]
===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Enter the following information in the “Create Graph Line” window </li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the line in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Physical Servers, Average Temperature, Historical Power, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter a name for the legend of this line in the “Legend Label” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Historical, Max Temp, Physical Servers, etc.</li>
<li>This will appear in the bottom of the graph window</li>
</ol>
<li>Select a color for the graph line in the “Color” section</li>
<li>Select the data series that will provide the data for the graph line in the drop-down menu or create a new data series record by clicking the star button (See [[Create a Data Series#Creating a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Add a futures line to show how the graph line could change in the future by clicking the star button to create a new “Futures” record </li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Enter the name of the graph line future in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Example: 2.5%</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter a label for the legend in the “Legend Label” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Example: 2.5%</li>
</ol>
<li>Define the period of time the graph will extend into the future in the “Time Period” section</li>
<li>Enter the amount of future graph lines to come from the historical data in the “Number Per Period” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Example: 1 Month</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter a formula for the future graph line in the “Formula” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Example: prev*1.05</li>
</ol>
<li>Define a color for the future graph line in the “Color” field</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Add” on the “Create Graph Line” window</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Physical Disk RAID==
A physical disk RAID is a redundant array of independent disks. LiveDC provides an avenue for tracking these disks for each piece of hardware. It is valuable to track each disk for the purposes of asset management.

[[File:Physical Disk RAID.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>In the “Create Physical Disk RAID” window enter the following:</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the physical disk RAID in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: Disk Controller</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the physical disk RAID in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Physical Disk Speed==
LiveDC provides an avenue for tracking these disks for each piece of hardware. It is valuable to track each disk speed for the purposes of asset management.

[[File:Physical Disk Speed.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>In the “Create Physical Disk Speed” window enter the following:</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the physical disk speed in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the physical disk speed in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Exporting a File==
[[File:Export.PNG]]
===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left side), click the desired tab to export records from. To find specific records, utilize LiveDC's robust Search feature (See [[Using LiveDC Search#How to Use Search|How to Use Search]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Once the desired records are in a list format on the screen, click “Export” in the top right corner of the screen</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>A small window titled “Confirm Export” will appear</li>
<li>Click "Export"</li>
<li>LiveDC will compile an Excel spreadsheet of the desired records (these records can be used for the mass import format as a template for what data needs to be entered before importing)</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>To import new records (See [[#Importing from a File|Importing from a File]] section for instructions)</li>
</ol>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Adding a Floor Plan to a Map==
===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>First you need to upload a PNG floor plan into LiveDC (See [[#Uploading an Image|Uploading an Image]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>Once the floor plan is uploaded into LiveDC, On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Layers” this will open a new tab titled “Layers”</li>
<li>Within the layers tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Layer.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the layer in the "Name" Field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Server Room Floor Plan, Data Center Floor Plan</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter additional information about the layer in the "Details" field</li>
<li>For a floor plan layer, we will select "Image" in the "Layer Type" drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>In the drop-down list find the floor plan image you uploaded in step 1</li>
<li>Select "center" from the "Placement" drop-down menu</li>
[[File:Image Layer.JPG]]
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
<li>Next we need to create a Solid Background layer for the map</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Again, in the upper left-hand corner click "Create"</li>
<li>Enter the name of the layer in the "Name" Field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Solid Background</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter additional information about the layer in the "Details" field</li>
<li>For a solid background layer, we will select "Solid" in the "Layer Type" drop-down menu</li>
<li>Select the color you want the background to be</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>We like to use #808080</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter the Transparency Percent</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>We usually do 0%</li>
[[File:Solid Layer.JPG]]
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Visuals” and click “Maps” this will open a new tab titled “Maps”</li>
<li>Within the maps tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Map.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the map in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Operational Model – Cooling, Power %, Operational Cost per Cabinet, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the map in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Define a horizontal size in pixels for the map in the “Width” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>A good rule of thumb is to look at the properties of the image and use those predefined dimensions (usually no more than 1650 pixels)</li>
</ol>
<li>Define a vertical size in pixels for the map in the “Height” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>A good rule of thumb is to look at the properties of the image and use those predefined dimensions (usually no more than 1300 pixels)</li>
</ol>
<li>Add a legend to the map in the section titled “Legends” by selecting from the drop down menu and clicking the left-hand facing arrow or create a new “Legend” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Legend|Creating a Legend]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>In the Map Layers section, click the star button</li>
<li>Select the "Solid Background" layer from the drop-down list</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Change the red x to a green check mark for "Show Dots" and "Show Values"</li>
<li>Do not change line color, text color, background color or background transparency percent</li>
[[File:Solid Map Layer.JPG]]
<li>Click "Add"</li>
</ol>
<li>Again, click the star button in the Map Layers section</li>
<li>Select the floor plan layer you created above from the drop-down list</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Change the red x to a green check mark for "Show Dots"</li>
<li>Do not change line color, text color, background color or background transparency percent</li>
<li>Click "Add"</li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
<li>You have now created a Map with a floor plan. You will need to add additional layers to the map to see data. (See [[Map#Creating a Map|Creating a Map]] section for instructions)</li>
</ol>
</ol>

File:Solid Map Layer.JPG

2015-01-27T16:54:46Z

Khackenmiller:

Extras

2015-01-27T16:54:20Z

Khackenmiller: /* Instructions */

__TOC__

==Creating Accounting Shares==
An accounting share is a way to track what department or function of the business owns or is making payments for a piece of hardware. You will need to know the following information to create an accounting share:
*Business unit or business department having ownership of the device
*Number of shares that business unit owns
[[File:Accounting Share.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Select a business unit from the “Business Unit” drop-down menu or create a new “Business Unit” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Business Unit|Creating a Business Unit]] section for instructions)</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Examples: Accounting, Production, Marketing, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter the desired amount of shares into the “Shares” field</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating Address Type==
Creating an address type is required for each operating system, usually defined as IPv4 or IPv6. The address type is not considered the actual address.You will need to know the following information before creating an address type:
*Whether the address type is an IP-V4 or IP-V6
[[File:Address Type.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Address Type” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Address Types” this will open a new tab titled “Address Types”</li>
<li>In the address types tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Address Type”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the address type in the field titled “Name”</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: IP Address, IP Address (location-based), etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the address type in the “Details” field</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Business Unit==
A business unit or business department is a great way to track ownership or affected areas of the organization that touch a specific piece of hardware, software, or virtual machine. A business unit uses the parent-child relationship like a hardware product. This can be utilized for accounting and tracking purposes of the asset. You will need to gather the following information when creating a business unit:
*Name of the business unit or function you wish to create
*A parent business unit, if any
[[File:Business Unit.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Business Unit” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Business Unit” this will open a new tab titled “Business units”</li>
<li>Within the business unit tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Business Unit” or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, service tab in the business unit section click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the company name in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Target, Best Buy, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the name of the company in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the business unit tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, service tab in the business unit section click the star button</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the department in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Marketing, Accounting, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the department name in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the company name in the “Parent Business Unit” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Target, Best Buy, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Company==
Creating a company is a way to distinguish the physical history and payment history of an asset in the event of a merger and acquisition or any other event which would involve transfer of ownership. You will need to know the following information before creating a company:
*Name of the company you wish to create
[[File:Company.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Company” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Companies” this will open a new tab titled “Companies”</li>
<li>Within the companies tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Company.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the company name in the field titled “Name”</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the company in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Component==
Components tracking is a great way to record what is contained within a specific piece of hardware you are creating. The component information can give you insight into how much of a resource you are utilizing and consuming in your data center. It tracks everything from power to memory to peripheral cards inserted into the back of your servers. You will need to gather the following information to create a component record for your hardware:
*Memory in GB for the hardware
*Number of logical disk volumes
*Number of network interfaces for the hardware
*Number of management interfaces for the hardware
*Number of CPU’s in the hardware
*Other components, utilizing the parent-child relationship, located within the hardware
*Physical disks
*SAN connections
*Number and type of power plugs
[[File:Component.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Component” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Components” this will open a new tab titled “Components”</li>
<li>In the components tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Component.” If you are in the “Create Hardware” window, component tab in the component section click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the peripheral name of the components in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Network Card, PCIE Card, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the peripheral in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the components tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, component tab in the component section click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the ports in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: port numbers</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the ports in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the peripheral in the “Parent Component” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Network Card, PCIE Card, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Contact==
A contact is utilized when referring to an asset, specifically a piece of hardware. This is the organization and person you would contact if the asset has a disruption of service or experiences a failure or outage. You will need to gather the following information when creating a contact:
*Type of contact; electrician, service provider, maintenance, etc.
*Name of the contact; first and last name, company the contact works for, and contact method (see [[#Creating a Contact Method Type|Creating a Contact Method Type]] for instructions)
[[File:Contact.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Contact” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Contacts” this will open a new tab titled “Contacts”</li>
<li>Within the contact tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Contact”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the first name of the contact in the “First Name” field</li>
<li>Enter the last name of the contact in the “Last Name” field</li>
<li>Select which company the contact is associated with in the “Company” drop-down menu or create a new “Company” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Add a contact method by clicking the star button. In the “Create Contact Method” window enter the following:</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Enter a “Type” from the drop down menu or by clicking on the star button to create a new “Type” record. (see [[#Creating a Contact Method Type|Creating a Contact Method Type]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>Enter a phone number or email for the contact method in the “Value” field </li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information for the contact in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Contact Method Type==
A contact method type provides the means to reach the point of contact for an asset, typically for hardware. The contact method type refers to the email or phone number used to get in touch with the person. You will need to gather the following information when creating a contact method type:
*What mode of contact is preferred for reaching this person; email, SMS, mobile phone, etc.
[[File:Contact Method Type.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Contact Method Type” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Contact Method Types” this will open a new tab titled “Contact Method Types”</li>
<li>Within the contact method type tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Contact Method Type.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the contact method type in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the contact method type in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a CPU Type==
[[File:CPU Type.PNG]]
===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create CPU Type” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “CPU Types” this will open a new tab titled “CPU Types”</li>
<li>Within the CPU type tab, in the upper left-hand corner click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create CPU Type.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the CPU type in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Intel Xeon E5450</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the CPU type in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Enter the speed of the CPU type in the field “Speed in GHz”</li>
<li>Enter how many physical cores the CPU type has in the “Physical Cores” field</li>
<li>Enter how many virtual cores the CPU type has in the “Virtual Cores” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Discount Program==
A discount program is used when referring to the service of an asset, typically hardware. Creating a discount program record is valuable for tracking what service company your dollars are going to and what deal you are receiving from a discount standpoint. You will need to gather the following information before creating a discount program record:
*Name of the discount program, for tracking purposes
*Percentage of the discount program, to know what deal has been provided by the service company
[[File:Discount Program.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Discount Program” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Discount Program” this will open a new tab titled “Discount Programs”</li>
<li>Within the discount program tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Discount Program.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the discount program in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the discount program in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Enter a discount percent in the field called “Percent”</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Domain==
A domain record refers to a collection of devices within your network, similar to contoso.com, and helps delineate between internal devices and devices that reside in other domains. The LiveDC platform will track what domains are being utilized by which operating systems and provide ease of searching this information. You will need to gather the following information before creating a domain record:
*Name of the domain record you wish to create
[[File:Domain.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Domain” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Domains” this will open a new tab titled “Domains”</li>
<li>Within the domains tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Domain.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the domain in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: company_xyz.local</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the domain in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating an Influence==
An influence is the way to represent what is happening to a specific data series in the data center on a map. The influence is shown by using a color scale, known as a legend, to provide knowledge around the objects real-time state. The influence’s color is affected by the data series it is connected to. As the data in the data series changes, so does the color of the influence, based upon the legend associated with the map. You will need to gather the following information before creating an influence:
*Specific data series that you would like to attach to the influence (see [[Create a Data Series#Creating a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] for instructions)
*Map that you would like to place the influence on (see [[Create Map#Creating a Map|Creating a Map]] for instructions)
*Layer of the map you will be placing the influence on (see [[#Creating a Layer|Creating a Layer]] for instructions)
*Influence template that you will be using to give the influence boundaries, shape, and scale (see [[#Creating an Influence Template|Creating an Influence Template]] for instructions)
[[File:Influence.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Layers” this will open a new tab titled “Layers List”</li>
<li>Select the desired layer to place influences on from the layers list and click “Manage Influences.” This will open a new tab titled “Manage Influences.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Within the manage influence tab a list titled “Influence List,” where all of the influences for the desired layer will reside, will be open. Click “Create” to make a new influence.</li>
<li>A new window will open up titled “Create Influence”</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Select the data series you wish to correspond with the influence in the “Data Series” drop-down menu or create a new “Data Series” record by clicking the star button (see [[Create a Data Series#Creating a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select an influence template to define the parameters for the influence in the “Template” drop-down menu or create a new “Influence Template” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating an Influence Template|Creating an Influence Template]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Define the location of the influence horizontally in the “X Coordinate” field (this can be adjusted at a later time, default: 1)</li>
<li>Define the location of the influence vertically in the “Y Coordinate” field (this can be adjusted at a later time, default: 1)</li>
<li>Select the type of link for the influence in the “Link Type” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>If data series, select the corresponding data series or create a new “Data Series” record by clicking the star button (see [[Create a Data Series#Creating a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>If hardware visual, select the corresponding hardware or create a new “Hardware” record by clicking the star button (see [[Create a Site#Creating Hardware|Creating Hardware]] section for instructions)</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
<li>To edit the position of an influence, either edit the specific influence from the influence list or from the map (see [[#Editing a Map Influence|Editing a Map Influence]] for more information)</li>
</ol>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating an Influence Template==
An influence template provides the visual boundaries that are placed around an influence for a map. Basically, the template will tell the influence what shape to take, if the pixels are going to fade at the edges, and the algorithm to follow in reference to what you are trying to display (usually will be predefined “Power2”). You will need to gather the following information before you create an influence template:
*Name of the influence template you wish to create
*What shape you are intending your influence to have (See [[#Creating a Shape|Creating a Shape]] for instructions)
*Fade on the influence, basically if you want it to have hard edges or softer edges
[[File:Influence Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Influence Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Influence Templates” this will open a new tab titled “Influence Templates”</li>
<li>Within the influence templates tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Influence Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the influence template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Standard Humidity, Standard Temperature, Standard Power kW, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the influence template in the field titled “Details”</li>
<li>Select what shape you want to make the influence template in the drop-down menu called “Shapes” or create a new “Shape” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Shape|Creating a Shape]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>Select the “Algorithm” to be applied to the shape from the drop down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Default for temperature / humidity: Power2</li>
<li>Default for power: Constant</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter a value for the “Fade Pixels” of the shape if you want soft edges when two influences collide</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>The value is the number of pixels at the edge of the shape that will be softened</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Legend==
A legend is how to define the value boundaries for an influence to represent colors. The legend is seen at the bottom of a map to visually display the value range in a color scale. It all works as follows: First a data series produces a numerical value and pushes that number to the associated influence, next the influence template will give that numerical value a shape boundary, within the influence template boundary the numerical value will correspond with the legend to produce a certain color value for representation of the influence on the map. You will need to gather the following information to create a legend:
*Name of the legend you wish to create
*Number format template that corresponds with the numerical value you wish to display
*Define a low value for the legend
*Define a high value for the legend
*Define the number of hints you wish the legend to have (hints are the number of values displayed on the legend)
*Choose a gradient file to correspond with your legend
[[File:Legend.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Legend” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Legends” this will open a new tab titled “Legends”</li>
<li>Within the legend tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Legend.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the legend in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Data Center Power, Cost Per Cabinet, Data Center Temps, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the legend in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the number format template to be used with the legend in the “Number Format Template” drop-down menu or create a new “Number Format Template” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Number Format Template|Creating a Number Format Template]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>Enter value of lowest point in the “Low Value” field</li>
<li>Enter value of highest point in the “High Value” field</li>
<li>Enter a number of desired hints in the “# of Hints” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>If you want to represent 0-10, you would select 11 for number of hints</li>
</ol>
<li>Select a gradient file to use for the legend in the “New Gradient File” section</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Layer==
A layer is an aspect of the map that serves a very important purpose. The first layer is the solid background, which is the foundational piece for creating any map. The second layer is the layer on which the influences sit, which is usually placed in between the solid background and the floor plan layer. The third layer is a transparent floor plan layout of the data center; the top-down view of what infrastructure (cabinets, PDU’s, UPS, etc.) is located within the room. Lastly, you can add a link layer which allows you to click on the map and link out to either a URL, data series, graph, map, LiveTile, or a piece of hardware directly. This order of layering provides the capabilities to show a floor layout, 9-box model, risk assessment, etc. and the abilities to place influences on top to paint a clear picture of real-time metrics in your data center. You will need to gather the following information to create a layer:
*Name of the layer you wish to create
*What type of layer that is to be created; basic influence, image, link, or solid
*Legend you wish to correspond to the influences that will be placed on the map (see [[#Creating a Legend|Creating a Legend]] for instructions)
[[File:Create Layer.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Layer” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Layers” this will open a new tab titled “Layers”</li>
<li>Within the layers tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Layer.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the layer in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Floor Plan, Cost Per Cabinet, Humidity % 10 inch, Solid Background, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the layer in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the type of layer desired in the “Layer Type” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>If “Basic Influence," choose which legend to use in the “Legend” drop-down menu or create a new “Legend” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Legend|Creating a Legend]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>If “Image," select the appropriate image from the drop-down menu or create a new “Image” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Uploading an Image|Uploading an Image]] section for instructions. Select the placement of the image from the drop-down menu.</li>
<li>If “Link," no additional information is needed</li>
<li>If “Solid," define the desired color and percentage of transparency in the “Color” and “Transparency Percentage” fields</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create,” you can now view your layer in the Layers List</li>
<li>If you created a "Link Layer" see the next steps in section [[#Attaching a Link to a Link Layer|Attaching a Link to a Link Layer]]</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Attaching a Link to a Link Layer==

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Layers” this will open a new tab titled “Layers”</li>
<li>Select the desired link layer you want to add a link to from the “Layer List”. If the link layer is not created see [[#Creating a Layer|Creating a Layer]] section for instructions</li>
<li>On the bottom half of the screen, click "Manage Links"</li>
[[File:Manage-Links.png]]
<ol type="a">
<li>In the new tab,(in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Link”</li>
[[File:Create Link.JPG]]
<ol type="i">
<li>Enter the name of the link in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Example: Google, Facebook, Avg Cold Aisle Data Series, Executive Summary Map</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional details about the link in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the shape you want the link to have on the map from the drop down menu or create a new “Shape” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Shape|Creating a Shape]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Define the location of the Link horizontally in the “X Coordinate” field (this can be adjusted at a later time, default: 1) (see [[Create Map#Moving an Influence or Link Location on a Map|Moving an Influence or Link Location on a Map]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Define the location of the Link vertically in the “Y Coordinate” field (this can be adjusted at a later time, default: 1) (see [[Create Map#Moving an Influence or Link Location on a Map|Moving an Influence or Link Location on a Map]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select the type of link for the link layer in the “Link Type” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>If URL, enter URL into the text box</li>
<li>If data Series, select the corresponding data series from the drop-down menu or create a new data series record by clicking the star button (see [[Create a Data Series#Creating a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>If graph, select the corresponding graph from the drop-down menu or create a new graph record by clicking on the star button (see [[Create Graph#Creating a Graph|Creating a Graph]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>If hardware, select the corresponding hardware from the drop-down menu or create a new hardware record by clicking on the star button (see [[Create a Site#Creating Hardware|Creating Hardware]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>If LiveTile, select the corresponding LiveTile from the drop-down menu or create a new LiveTile record by clicking on the star button (see [[Create LiveTile#Creating a LiveTile|Creating a LiveTile]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>If Map, select the corresponding Map from the drop-down menu or create a new Map record by clicking on the star button (see [[Create Map#Creating a Map|Creating a Map]] section for instructions) </li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
<li>You have just successfully added a link to the specified layer.</li>
<li>To add your new layer to a map, see section [[Create Map#Applying a Layer to a Map|Applying a Layer to a Map]] for instructions </li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Number Format Template==
A number format template takes a raw number value and changes it into usable and contextual metrics. One would typically use this when formatting from Amps to kW or a whole number to a dollar amount or percentage, but it is not limited to that. You will need to gather the following information to create a number format template:
*Name of the number format template you wish to create
*Specified type of number format template; either simple, currency, or java decimal pattern
[[File:Number Format Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Number Format Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and select the button called “Number Format Templates” this will open a new tab titled “Number Format Templates”</li>
<li>Within the number format templates tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Number Format Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the number format template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Fahrenheit (rounded), Percent, kWh, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the number format template in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the type of number format template in the “Type” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>If “Simple” type, define Prefix and Suffix</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Prefix: $, etc.</li>
<li>Suffix: kW, Amps, Tons, Months</li>
</ol>
<li>If “Currency” type, choose “Locale” from the drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Default: en_US</li>
</ol>
<li>If “Java Decimal Pattern” type, enter the pattern in the “Pattern” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>To create a number with a single value after the decimal, you would enter: ##.#</li>
</ol>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Payment==
A payment record, referring to the payment for any asset, is a way to track a payment for a specific device and when/who the payment goes to through the LiveDC platform. You will need to gather the following information before you create a payment record:
*Date of the payment
*Amount to be paid
*How you will be paying the payment (see [[#Creating a Payment Type|Creating a Payment Type]] for instructions)
*Who the payment is paid by (see [[#Creating a Business Unit|Creating a Business Unit]] for instructions)
*Who the payment is paid to (see [[#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] for instructions)
[[File:Payment.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Enter the date of when the payment for the hardware is to be paid in the “Date” field</li>
<li>Enter the amount of the payment in the “Amount” field</li>
<li>Select the type of payment in the “Type” drop-down menu or create a new “Payment Type” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Payment Type|Creating a Payment Type]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select who will be making the payment in the “Paid By” drop-down menu or create a new “Paid By” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Business Unit|Creating a Business Unit]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select to whom the payment is going to in the “Paid To” drop-down menu or create a new “Paid To” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Add tags to the payment in the section titled “Tags” by selecting from the drop down menu and clicking the left-hand facing arrow or create a new “Tag” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating Tags|Creating Tags]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the payment in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Payment Type==
A payment type is defining the mode of how the payment is paid. Whether that be a check or automatic deposit, it’s the way to define how you are paying for an asset within the LiveDC platform.
[[File:Payment Type.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Payment Type” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Payment Types” this will open a new tab titled “Payment types”</li>
<li>Within the payment types tab, (in the upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Payment Type.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the payment type in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the payment type in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Physical Disk==
A physical disk is used to store all server data. LiveDC provides an avenue of tracking these disks for each piece of hardware. It is valuable to track each disk for the purposes of asset management.

[[File:Physical Disk.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Enter the amount of physical disks of the hardware in the “Quantity” field</li>
<li>Enter the amount of capacity the physical disk has in the “Capacity in GB” field</li>
<li>Select the physical disk RAID that is utilized by the hardware in the “RAID” drop-down menu or create a new “Physical Disk RAID” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Physical Disk RAID|Creating a Physical Disk RAID]] section for instructions) </li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the physical disk RAID in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: Disk Controller</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the physical disk RAID in the “Details” field</li>
</ol>
<li>Select the physical disk speed that is utilized by the hardware in the “Speed” drop-down menu or create a new “Physical Disk Speed” record by clicking the star button (see [[#Creating a Physical Disk Speed|Creating a Physical Disk Speed]] section for instructions)</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the physical disk speed in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the physical disk speed in the “Details” field</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug==
The LiveDC platform provides a means of tracking power plugs for each piece of hardware. This is valuable from the standpoint of tracking single and dual corded devices. You will need to gather the following information before creating a power plug:
*Number of power plugs for the specific piece of hardware
*Type of power plug
*Observed wattage
*Estimated wattage
*Amount of wattage displayed on the nameplate of the hardware
*Amount of ampere
*Backup source of the hardware
*What circuit the hardware is linked back to
*Amount of voltage for the hardware
[[File:Power Plug.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>In the window titled “Creating Hardware”, enter the amount of Power Plugs for the piece of hardware in the “Quantity” field</li>
<li>Select the type of power plug in the “Plug Type” drop-down menu or create a new “Plug Type” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Power Plug Type|Creating a Power Plug Type]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Enter the amount of watts observed in the “Observed Watts” field)</li>
<li>Enter the amount of watts estimated in the “Estimated Watts” field</li>
<li>Enter the amount of watts on the nameplate of the hardware in the “Nameplate Watts” field</li>
<li>Select an ampere for the power plug in the “Ampere” drop-down menu or create a new “Ampere” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Power Plug Ampere|Creating a Power Plug Ampere]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select a backup source for the power plug in the “Backup Source” drop-down menu or create a new “Backup Source” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Power Plug Backup Source|Creating a Power Plug Backup Source]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select a power circuit for the power plug in the “Circuit” drop-down menu or create a new “Circuit” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Power Plug Circuit|Creating a Power Plug Circuit]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select a voltage for the power plug in the “Voltage” drop-down menu or create a new “Voltage” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Power Plug Voltage|Creating a Power Plug Voltage]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug Ampere==
LiveDC tracks the amperage that is produced in each power plug. Tracking such information is useful for estimating power usage throughout your data center.

[[File:Power Plug Ampere.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Power Plug Ampere” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Power Plug Amperes” this will open a new tab titled “Power Plug Amperes”</li>
<li>Within the power plug amperes tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Power Plug Amperes.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the power plug ampere in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the power plug ampere in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug Backup Source==
Tracking the backup source related to each power plug for hardware is important information to have on hand in the case of a power failure or outage. LiveDC will track the backup power source for each piece of hardware located in your data center.
[[File:Power Plug Backup.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Power Plug Backup Source” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Power Plug Backup Sources” this will open a new tab titled “Power Plug Backup Sources”</li>
<li>Within the power plug backup sources tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Power Plug Backup Source.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the power plug backup source in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the power plug backup source in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug Circuit==
LiveDC can track which specific circuit breaker(s) a piece of hardware is connected to. This sort of information is valuable to know for proactively managing scheduled maintenance and powering down hardware.
[[File:Power Plug Circuit.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Power Plug Circuit” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Power Plug Circuits” this will open a new tab titled “Power Plug Circuits”</li>
<li>Within the power plug circuits tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Power Plug Circuits.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the power plug circuit in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the power plug circuit in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug Type==
In LiveDC, the type of power plug that is used can be tied back to a specific piece of hardware. We track this information to help identify how many plugs of each type are available in each rack and how many are used.
[[File:Power Plug Type.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Power Plug Type” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click called “Power Plug Types” this will open a new tab titled “Power Plug Types”</li>
<li>Within the power plug types tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Power Plug Type.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the power plug type in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the power plug type in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Power Plug Voltage==
Tracking voltage, utilizing the LiveDC platform, is a simple and valuable operation. By entering the voltage information about a specific piece of hardware, you are able to plan for power usage and estimate monthly costs surrounding a single device or many devices.
[[File:Power Plug Voltage.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Power Plug Voltage” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Power Plug Voltages” this will open a new tab titled “Power Plug Voltages”</li>
<li>In the power plug voltages tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Power Plug Voltage.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the power plug voltage in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the power plug voltage in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Product==
LiveDC utilizes a parent-child relationship for creating and tracking products. Products tie directly to assets in your data center and make the search function of LiveDC a valuable means of accessing and analyzing your information. You will need to gather the following information before creating a product:
*Manufacturer of the product
*Category of the product
*Model of the product
*Model number of the product
*Generation of the product
[[File:Create Product.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Product” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Products” this will open a new tab titled “Product”</li>
<li>Within the products tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Product” or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, basic tab in the “Product” section, click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the manufacturer name of the product in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Dell, Oracle, EMC, HP, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the manufacturer name of the product in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the products tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, basic tab, “Product” section, click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the category name of the product in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Server, Storage, Network, or Infrastructure</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the category name of the product in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the manufacturer in the “Parent Product” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Dell, Oracle, EMC, HP, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the products tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, basic tab, “Product” section, click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the model name of the product in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: ProLiant, PowerEdge, SunFire, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the model name of the product in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the “Manufacturer – Category” in the “Parent Product” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Dell-Server</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the products tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, basic tab, “Product” section, click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the model number name of the product in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: DL385, 2900, X4250, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the model number name of the product in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the “Manufacturer – Category – Model” in the “Parent Product” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Dell-Server-ProLiant</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>In the products tab, click the “Create” button or if you are in the “Create Hardware” window, basic tab, “Product” section, click the star button.</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the generation / version name of the product in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: G5, V2, 7.1, etc</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the qualifier name of the product in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select the “Manufacturer – Category – Model – Model Number” in the “Parent Product” drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: Dell-Server-Proliant-DL385</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
<li>You can create as many levels of information as needed, but the 5 levels we have just described seem to cover almost all instances of product tracking</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a SAN Connection==
A SAN (Storage Area Network) connection can be tracked within the LiveDC platform. Tracking this information in LiveDC is valuable, for storage devices especially, to provide an understanding of which SAN fabrics a device is connected to and to determine if there is redundancy. You will need to gather the following information before creating a SAN connection record:
*Number of connections the hardware has
*Name of the SAN
*Amount of capacity in GB of the SAN connection
[[File:SAN Connection.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Enter the amount of SAN connections the hardware obtains in the “Number of Connections” field</li>
<li>Select the SAN in the “SAN” drop-down menu or create a new “SAN” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a SAN|Creating a SAN]] for instructions)</li>
<li>Enter the amount of capacity the SAN connection has in the “Capacity in GB” field</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a SAN==
The SAN (Storage Area Network) is used primarily with storage devices. Tracking this information in LiveDC is valuable, for storage devices especially, to provide an understanding of which SAN fabrics a device is connected to and to determine if there is redundancy between SANs.

[[File:Create SAN.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create SAN” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “SANs” this will open a new tab titled “SANs”</li>
<li>Within the SANs tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create SAN.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the SAN in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: SAN A, SAN B, Storage SAN, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the SAN in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating Service Infos==
LiveDC tracks what and who will perform service on each piece of hardware through the service infos section. This information is valuable to track for knowing who to contact in the case of scheduled maintenance, an outage, or failure. You will need to gather the following information before creating a service info record:
*Name of the provider (See [[#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] for instructions)
*Type of service that the provider performs
*Start date of the service for the hardware
*End date of the service for the hardware
*Discount program of the service (See [[#Creating a Discount Program|Creating a Discount Program]] for instructions)
*Amount of base monthly cost for the service
[[File:Service Info.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Select the company that does the service for the hardware in the “Provider” drop-down menu or create a new “Company” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Company|Creating a Company]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Select the type of service the company provides for that hardware in the “Service Type” drop-down menu</li>
<li>Select a beginning date of the service in the “Start Date” field</li>
<li>Select an ending date of the service in the “Stop Date” field</li>
<li>Select a discount program for the company in the “Discount Program” drop-down menu or create a new “Discount Program” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Discount Program|Creating a Discount Program]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Enter a monthly cost in the “Base Monthly Cost” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the service in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Service Tier==
In the LiveDC platform, you can track both the requested and actual service tier associated with each piece of hardware. This information is valuable to have when considering recovery times and planning for outages and failures.

[[File:Service Tier.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Service Tier” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Service Tiers” this will open a new tab titled “Service Tiers”</li>
<li>Within the service tiers tab, in the upper left-hand corner click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Service Tier.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the service tier in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Tier 1, Tier 2, Tier 3, Tier 4, etc. </li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the service tier in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Shape==
Shapes in LiveDC refer to the boundaries for an influence that are placed on maps. The shapes for an influence can be either a square or a circle, but can be manipulated to represent different sizes for cabinets, PDUs, UPS equipment, etc. A color will fill the shape when it is corresponded to a legend on the map. You will need to gather the following information before creating a shape:
*Name of the shape you wish to create
*Which basic shape you are wishing to create, circle or square
*Pixel height of the shape
*Scale width of the shape you are creating
*Degrees of rotation of the shape
*Disregard the last 4 items (fill color, fill transparency, border pixels, border color) as they have no impact on the shape at the current time, they are placeholders for future functionality

[[File:Shape.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Shape” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Shapes” this will open a new tab titled “Shapes”</li>
<li>Within the shapes tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Shape.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the shape in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Cabinet, Standard Humidity Return, Standard Temperature, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the shape in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select what kind of shape to create in the “Basic Shape” drop-down menu</li>
<li>Define the height of the shape in the “Pixel Height” field</li>
<li>Enter a value for the width in the “Scale Width” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>This value is in relation to the height, so if you wanted a square that was 10 high x 20 wide, you would enter 10 for height and 2 for scale width</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter a value of rotation for the shape in the “Rotation Degrees” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>This would be used if you wanted to represent a diamond, you would create a square and rotate it 90 degrees</li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a SNMP V1 Template==
An SNMP V1 template is a set of rules for Elicit to follow to collect data points from an asset. Utilizing a web address, read community string, and an OID, Elicit will gather information using these instructions and populate data series for use in maps, LiveTiles, and/or graphs. You will need to gather the following information to create an SNMP V1 template:
*Name of the SNMP V1 template you wish to create
*IP address or URL for Elicit to communicate with
*Specified read community string: default is public
*Specific OID for the piece of information you are trying to gather
*The regular expression to tell Elicit which data you are specifically looking for
*An adjustment expression for the data being returned to the LiveDC platform
*Specific invalid raw values that are typically returned, which can be excluded. Some sensors return a 0 when in error state.

[[File:SNMP V1 Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create SNMP V1 Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “SNMP V1 Templates” this will open a new tab titled “SNMP V1 Templates”</li>
<li>Within the SNMP V1 templates tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create SNMP V1 Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the SNMP V1 template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Chatsworth Humidity (Port 1), Chatsworth Power % 30A (Phase XY), etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the SNMP V1 template in the “Details” field</li>
<li>The parameter format can be left as is and provides a way for you to specify what values you need to enter and what the label should be in the pop-up screen</li>
<li>Enter the Internet Protocol Address in the “Address” field using the defined parameter format</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: { {Address} }</li>
<li>This will prompt the user to enter the specific IP address each time</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter the community string in the “Read Community String” field using the defined parameter format</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>If standard across the organization, you can enter it here and not have to enter it again when creating a data series</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter the object identification number in the “Object Identifier OID” field using the defined parameter format</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Usually very specific for a type of power strip and can be entered here once and used for all power strips of that type</li>
<li>Example: 1.3.6.1.4.1.319.1.2.1.0</li>
</ol>
<li>Define the regular expression in the “Regular Expression” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Leave blank as it is not really leveraged at this time</li>
</ol>
<li>Define the adjustment expression in the “Adjustment Expression” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>This will take the raw value received via SNMP and perform an adjustment on that before sending the database for data normalization</li>
<li>Example: Raw/100</li>
</ol>
<li>Add any raw values that are invalid in the “Invalid Raw Values” field and click the left-hand facing arrow, if applicable</li>
<li>Click “Create”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating Tags==
Tags are what connects almost everything together in LiveDC. Giving a record a tag is very valuable for tracking purposes. Objects with tags are easily found using LiveDC's robust search function. Tags can be used to define location, category of product, type of metric in a data series, client specific tags, or anything else for that matter.

[[File:Tag.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Tag” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Tags” this will open a new tab titled “Tags”</li>
<li>Within the Tags tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Tag.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the tag in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: A Side, Row 10, Server, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the Tag in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Timing Template==
Data series utilize timing templates to tell Elicit how often to collect data from a device. The templates can be configured from polling once every minute to once every month, depending on how important the data is to the end-user.

[[File:Timing Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Timing Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Timing Templates” this will open a new tab titled “Timing Templates”</li>
<li>Within the timing templates tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Timing Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the timing template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: 1 minute, 1 hour, 15 minute, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the timing template in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Define how often the desired poll will take place in the “Poll Period” field</li>
<li>Define how often the desired warning period will last in the “Warning Period” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>This warning period will provide alerts if a data series has not communicated within the specified interval</li>
</ol>
<li>Define when, if at all, the poll will expire in the “Expire Period” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>This expire period will provide alerts if a data series has not communicated within the specified interval and will expire the reading so that it does not show up on maps</li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Trend Template==
A trend template tells Elicit to create a data series based upon the data that is in a separate data series. The new data series is created by choosing either the average, maximum, median, minimum, or sum of the data series being polled.

[[File:Trend Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Trend Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Trend Templates” this will open a new tab titled “Trend Templates”</li>
<li>Within the trend templates tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Trend Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the trend template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Past 3 Months, Past Day, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the trend template in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Select what “Operation” you would like to perform on the data from the drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Average, Maximum, Minimum, Median, Sum</li>
</ol>
<li>Define time period in which you would like the data to trend in the “Time Period” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: 30 Days, 1 Month, 24 Hours</li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Uploading an Image==
Uploading an image provides flexibility for the user to customize maps specific to one’s data center. Maps are not limited to just a floor plan though, you can upload virtually any image to construct a map that will depict your data.

[[File:Upload Image.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Uploaded Images” this will open a new tab titled “Upload Images”</li>
<li>Within the uploaded images tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Uploaded Image.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the uploaded image in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: DC Room 1, Storage, POD 2, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Choose the file that to upload in the “Image File” section</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the uploaded image in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a URL Scrape Template==
A URL scrape template provides an avenue for Elicit to collect data from a specific web page (a web page with no login requirements). This is valuable for collecting data off of the web for many different reasons. Typically the data series created are based upon intelligent assets in the data center that have a web server serving up an HTTP page. You will need to gather the following information prior to creating a URL scrape template:
*Name of the URL scrape template
*Specific URL you intend to collect the data from
*Regular expression to tell Elicit where to look within all the text on the web page
*Adjustment expression, if you want to format the data as it enters the LiveDC platform
*Any invalid raw values you do not wish to use in the data series

[[File:URL Scrape Template.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create URL Scrape Template” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “URL Scrape Templates” this will open a new tab titled “URL Scrape Templates”</li>
<li>Within the URL Scrape Templates tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create URL Scrape Template.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the URL scrape template in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: C:\ Drive, Configuration File Collection, CPU, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the URL scrape template in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Define the format for the parameters of the URL scrape template in the “Parameter Format” fields</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: {{ }}</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter the URL that will be used to gather the data in the “URL Scrape Template” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: File:///c|public/{ {hostname} }{ {counter} }.txt</li>
</ol>
<li>Define the regular expression in the “Regular Expression” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: =(\d*)</li>
</ol>
<li>Define the adjustment expression in the “Adjustment Expression” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: 100-raw</li>
</ol>
<li>Add any raw values that are invalid in the “Invalid Raw Values” field and click the left-hand facing arrow, if applicable</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Virtual Machine Datacenter==
Since there is no physical location to put a virtual machine, creating a virtual machine datacenter is the solution. This is the place for virtual machines to reside. It ties the virtual machine to a logical location for tracking purposes.

[[File:Virtual Machine Data Center.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>If you are already in the “Create Virtual Machine” window skip to step 3a. If you are not in that window continue to step 2.</li>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Virtual Machine Datacenters” this will open a new tab titled “Virtual Machine Datacenters”</li>
<li>Within the Virtual Machine Datacenters tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Virtual Machine Datacenter.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the virtual machine datacenter in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: Virtual Room 1</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the virtual machine datacenter in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Importing from a File==
Importing from a file is the mode of entering large amounts of data records into LiveDC at one time. There is a learning curve to this process, but once this skill is acquired it becomes very useful. Essentially, the user is inputting all of their data records in at the same time and letting LiveDC do the heavy lifting and analysis. Importing from a file is used all across the LiveDC platform, where mostly everything in the software can be imported in a bulk format. You will need to gather the following information prior to importing a file:
*Asset specific information
*Location and physical dimension information regarding the asset
*Data series specific information
*Visual specific information

[[File:Import from File.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and select the button called “Import from File…” this will open a new window titled “Import from File”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Click the “Browse” button to select the document to import into LiveDC</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Once the file is selected, you will have the option to perform analysis on the imported data before committing that information to the database</li>
<li>This helps prevent errors and will give you the results back to ensure all values are correct before actually importing the data</li>
</ol>
<li>To perform an analysis on the document, check the box titled “Perform Analysis Only” to green check mark</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Once you have validated that there are no errors and the data looks correct (denoted by performing analysis and getting all green highlighted columns back in the results spreadsheet)</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Green means you are good to go, there are no errors found</li>
<li>Yellow means warning, something has been updated but you are still ok to upload</li>
<li>Red means error, this item will not be imported into LiveDC</li>
<li>No color or white means that that item is already in the software and there are no changes to it</li>
</ol>
<li>To actually import the file and commit the data into LiveDC, check the box titled “Perform Analysis Only” to change it to the red X</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Import”</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Graph Line==
[[File:Graph Line.PNG]]
===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>Enter the following information in the “Create Graph Line” window </li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the line in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Physical Servers, Average Temperature, Historical Power, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter a name for the legend of this line in the “Legend Label” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Historical, Max Temp, Physical Servers, etc.</li>
<li>This will appear in the bottom of the graph window</li>
</ol>
<li>Select a color for the graph line in the “Color” section</li>
<li>Select the data series that will provide the data for the graph line in the drop-down menu or create a new data series record by clicking the star button (See [[Create a Data Series#Creating a Data Series|Creating a Data Series]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Add a futures line to show how the graph line could change in the future by clicking the star button to create a new “Futures” record </li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Enter the name of the graph line future in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Example: 2.5%</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter a label for the legend in the “Legend Label” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Example: 2.5%</li>
</ol>
<li>Define the period of time the graph will extend into the future in the “Time Period” section</li>
<li>Enter the amount of future graph lines to come from the historical data in the “Number Per Period” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Example: 1 Month</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter a formula for the future graph line in the “Formula” field</li>
<ol type="A">
<li>Example: prev*1.05</li>
</ol>
<li>Define a color for the future graph line in the “Color” field</li>
<li>Click “Add”</li>
</ol>
<li>Click “Add” on the “Create Graph Line” window</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Physical Disk RAID==
A physical disk RAID is a redundant array of independent disks. LiveDC provides an avenue for tracking these disks for each piece of hardware. It is valuable to track each disk for the purposes of asset management.

[[File:Physical Disk RAID.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>In the “Create Physical Disk RAID” window enter the following:</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the physical disk RAID in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Example: Disk Controller</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the physical disk RAID in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Creating a Physical Disk Speed==
LiveDC provides an avenue for tracking these disks for each piece of hardware. It is valuable to track each disk speed for the purposes of asset management.

[[File:Physical Disk Speed.PNG]]

===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>In the “Create Physical Disk Speed” window enter the following:</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the physical disk speed in the “Name” field</li>
<li>Enter any additional information about the physical disk speed in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Exporting a File==
[[File:Export.PNG]]
===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left side), click the desired tab to export records from. To find specific records, utilize LiveDC's robust Search feature (See [[Using LiveDC Search#How to Use Search|How to Use Search]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>Once the desired records are in a list format on the screen, click “Export” in the top right corner of the screen</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>A small window titled “Confirm Export” will appear</li>
<li>Click "Export"</li>
<li>LiveDC will compile an Excel spreadsheet of the desired records (these records can be used for the mass import format as a template for what data needs to be entered before importing)</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>To import new records (See [[#Importing from a File|Importing from a File]] section for instructions)</li>
</ol>
</ol>
</ol>
 

==Adding a Floor Plan to a Map==
===Instructions===
<ol>
<li>First you need to upload a PNG floor plan into LiveDC (See [[#Uploading an Image|Uploading an Image]] section for instructions) </li>
<li>Once the floor plan is uploaded into LiveDC, On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Extras” and click “Layers” this will open a new tab titled “Layers”</li>
<li>Within the layers tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Layer.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the layer in the "Name" Field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Server Room Floor Plan, Data Center Floor Plan</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter additional information about the layer in the "Details" field</li>
<li>For a floor plan layer, we will select "Image" in the "Layer Type" drop-down menu</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>In the drop-down list find the floor plan image you uploaded in step 1</li>
<li>Select "center" from the "Placement" drop-down menu</li>
[[File:Image Layer.JPG]]
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
<li>Next we need to create a Solid Background layer for the map</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Again, in the upper left-hand corner click "Create"</li>
<li>Enter the name of the layer in the "Name" Field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Solid Background</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter additional information about the layer in the "Details" field</li>
<li>For a solid background layer, we will select "Solid" in the "Layer Type" drop-down menu</li>
<li>Select the color you want the background to be</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>We like to use #808080</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter the Transparency Percent</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>We usually do 0%</li>
[[File:Solid Layer.JPG]]
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
<li>On the navigation menu (left-hand side) click “Visuals” and click “Maps” this will open a new tab titled “Maps”</li>
<li>Within the maps tab (upper left-hand corner) click the “Create” button. A new window will open up called “Create Map.”</li>
<ol type="a">
<li>Enter the name of the map in the “Name” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Examples: Operational Model – Cooling, Power %, Operational Cost per Cabinet, etc.</li>
</ol>
<li>Enter any additional information about the map in the “Details” field</li>
<li>Define a horizontal size in pixels for the map in the “Width” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>A good rule of thumb is to look at the properties of the image and use those predefined dimensions (usually no more than 1650 pixels)</li>
</ol>
<li>Define a vertical size in pixels for the map in the “Height” field</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>A good rule of thumb is to look at the properties of the image and use those predefined dimensions (usually no more than 1300 pixels)</li>
</ol>
<li>Add a legend to the map in the section titled “Legends” by selecting from the drop down menu and clicking the left-hand facing arrow or create a new “Legend” record by clicking the star button (See [[#Creating a Legend|Creating a Legend]] section for instructions)</li>
<li>In the Map Layers section, click the star button</li>
<li>Select the "Solid Background" layer from the drop-down list</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Change the red x to a green check mark for "Show Dots" and "Show Values"</li>
<li>Do not change line color, text color, background color or background transparency percent</li>
<li>Click "Add"</li>
</ol>
<li>Again, click the star button in the Map Layers section</li>
<li>Select the floor plan layer you created above from the drop-down list</li>
<ol type="i">
<li>Change the red x to a green check mark for "Show Dots"</li>
<li>Do not change line color, text color, background color or background transparency percent</li>
<li>Click "Add"</li>
</ol>
<li>Click "Create"</li>
</ol>
<li>You have now created a Map with a floor plan. You will need to add additional layers to the map to see data. (See [[Map#Creating a Map|Creating a Map]] section for instructions)</li>
</ol>
</ol>

File:Solid Layer.JPG

2015-01-27T16:53:50Z

Khackenmiller: